T Nav User Guide English

17.
Simulation
User Guide
Rock Flow Dynamics
September 2017
17.3
Copyright Notice
Rock Flow Dynamics r (RFD), 2004-2017. All rights reserved. This document is the intel-
lectual property of RFD. It is not allowed to copy this document, to store it in an information
retrieval system, distribute, translate and retransmit in any form or by any means, electronic
or mechanical, in whole or in part, without the prior written consent of RFD.
Trade Mark
RFD, the RFD logotype and tNavigator r product, and other words or symbols used to
identify the products and services described herein are trademarks, trade names or service
marks of RFD. It is not allowed to imitate, use, copy trademarks, in whole or in part, without
the prior written consent of the RFD. A graphical design, icons and other elements of design
may be trademarks and/or trade dress of RFD and are not allowed to use, copy or imitate, in
whole or in part, without the prior written consent of the RFD. Other company, product, and
service names are the properties of their respective owners.
Security Notice
The software’s specifications suggested by RFD are recommendations and do not limit the
configurations that may be used to operate the software. It is recommended to operate the
software in a secure environment whether such software is operated on a single system or
across a network. A software’s user is responsible for configuring and maintaining networks
and/or system(s) in a secure manner. If you have any questions about security requirements
for the software, please contact your local RFD representative.
Disclaimer
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice and should
not be construed as a commitment by RFD. RFD assumes no responsibility for any error that
may appear in this manual. Some states or jurisdictions do not allow disclaimer of expressed
or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
Since the software, which is described in the present document is constantly improved, you
may find descriptions based on previous versions of the software.
2
17.3
Press to open tNavigator Library

Press to open User Manual
Contents
Contents 3
1. Introduction 10
2. tNavigator documentation 11
3. Open model in tNavigator 13

3.1. tNavigator main window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.2. Menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.3. Main toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.4. Module’s Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.5. tNavigator window with opened model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.6. Document. View. Files. Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3.7. (Status) Report Panel – log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.8. Top Panel Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.8.1. Create New View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.8.2. Show All Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3.8.3. Hide All Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3.8.4. Save Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3.8.5. Split model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.8.6. History Matching Variables Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.8.7. Reload Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.8.8. Run calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.8.9. Playback Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.8.10. Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.9. Left panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.10. Run model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.10.1. Compute to a fixed step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.10.2. Re-Run Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.10.3. Start Calculations from Any Previously Calculated Step . . . . . . . . 36
3.11. tNavigator hotkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.12. Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3.13. Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
CONTENTS 3
17.3
4. Grid Properties 41
4.1. Initial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
4.2. Calculated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
4.2.1. 2D maps for Saturation Ternary Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
4.2.2. Request for the distribution of blocks with convergence problems . . . 57
4.2.3. Request for distributions of total flows of water, oil and gas . . . . . . 58
4.3. Fluid-in-place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
4.4. Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
4.5. User Cuts, User Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
4.6. Vector Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
4.7. Interblock Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
5. Grid Properties. Right panel buttons 65

5.1. Views and Presentation Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
5.2. 3D Slicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
5.3. Create a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
5.4. Distance between two specified blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
5.5. Create a Slice Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
5.6. Create a Cross-Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
5.7. Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
5.8. Well, Groups and Network Filter. Stream Line Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
5.8.1. Well filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
5.8.2. Streamline Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
5.8.3. Group filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
5.8.4. Network filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
5.9. Create Screenshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
5.10. Well Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
5.11. Find a Well or Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
5.12. Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
5.13. Well Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
6. Grid Properties. General principles 94

6.1. Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
6.2. Local Grid Refinements (LGR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
6.3. Properties for dual porosity model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
6.4. Properties in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
6.5. Properties in 2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
6.6. Working with user polygons (contours) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
6.6.1. Import user polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
6.6.2. How to work with region created by polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
6.7. Bubble maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
6.7.1. Visualization settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
6.7.2. Bubble Map State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
6.7.3. Accumulated Bubble Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
CONTENTS 4
17.3
6.7.4. Correlation Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

6.7.5. Mismatch Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
6.7.6. Custom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
6.8. Network visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
6.9. Histogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
6.10. Export of grid properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
7. Graphs. General principles 138

7.1. Graphs Right Panel Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
7.2. Select Object and Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
7.2.1. Search well in a list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
7.2.2. Sort wells in a list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
7.3. Well Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
7.4. Graph View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
7.4.1. Scaling along X and Y Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
7.4.2. Expanding Graph Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
7.4.3. Dragging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
7.4.4. Time Display in the Graph and in the Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
7.4.5. Graph View. Change Graph Color and Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
7.5. Trend line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
7.6. Auto sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
7.7. Coordinate Axes. Multiple Coordinate Systems in the Same Window . . . . 156
7.8. Setting Minimum and Maximum Values for Graph Axes . . . . . . . . . . . 157
7.9. Graph tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
7.10. Multiple Models’ Results Graphs in the Same Window . . . . . . . . . . . 160
7.11. Graph Types (Object Item, Parameter, Step) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
7.12. Graph templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
8. Graphs. Graphs list 168

8.1. Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
8.2. Totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
8.3. Fluid-in-place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
8.4. Analytics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
8.5. Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
8.6. Flow Between FIPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
8.7. Run Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
8.8. Crossplots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
8.9. Well profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
8.10. Well section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
8.10.1. Visualization of RFT (MDT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
8.10.2. Visualization of PLT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
8.11. User Arithmetics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
8.12. Block Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
8.12.1. Request of distributions of relative permeabilities and capillary pressures221
CONTENTS 5
17.3
8.13. Profile info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

8.14. Pressure/Temperature Slices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
8.15. Historical vs. Calculated (Hist vs Calc) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
8.16. Unified History Matching Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
8.17. Comparison of Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
8.18. Well RFT Mismatch Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
8.19. Well PLT Oil Mismatch Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
8.20. Tracers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
8.21. User selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
8.22. Aquifers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
9. Load Well Data 243

9.1. Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
9.2. Trajectories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
9.2.1. GWTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
9.2.2. Trajectory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
9.2.3. LAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
9.2.4. Generalized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
9.2.5. Dip-circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
9.2.6. WellHead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
9.3. Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
9.3.1. Well – Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
9.3.2. Group – Wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
9.3.3. Group – Parent Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
9.4. Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
9.5. Well History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
9.5.1. History table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
9.5.2. History – FHF Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
9.6. Well Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
9.6.1. Well Logs (LAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
9.6.2. RFT (MDT) data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
9.6.3. PLT data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
10. Waterflood 261

10.1. Stream Lines. Stream Line Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
10.2. Well drainage zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
10.3. Drainage matrix, graph, table, network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
10.3.1. Drainage Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
10.3.2. Drainage Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
10.3.3. Drainage matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
10.3.4. Drainage network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
10.4. Balancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
10.5. Waterflood compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
CONTENTS 6
17.3
11. 2D Histogram. Crossplot 284

11.1. 2D Histogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
11.2. X/Y Histogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
11.3. Crossplot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
12. Fluid Properties 293

12.1. Properties editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
12.2. Properties. Right Panel Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
12.3. SRP (Scaled Relative Permeability Parameters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
12.4. Hysteresis visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
12.5. Rates vs. SWAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
12.6. Flow Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
12.7. Propants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
12.8. Chemical Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
12.9. VFP tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
13. Economical parameters 308

13.1. Setting Economics Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
13.2. Net Present Value Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
14. User Arithmetic 313

14.1. Available User Maps and Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
14.2. Scaling User Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
14.3. Arithmetic operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
14.4. Difference in arithmetic usage in interface and in files . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
14.5. Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
14.5.1. Unary and Binary operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
14.5.2. Logical operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
14.5.3. Local changes in internal areas of a property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
14.5.4. Examples for user properties (maps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
14.5.5. Examples for user cuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
14.6. Functions for User Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
14.6.1. Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
14.7. Functions for Wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
14.7.1. Functions for Single Wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
14.7.2. Combining wells under common mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
14.7.3. Functions for wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
14.7.4. Functions for blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
14.7.5. Filters for well data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
15. Property editing. Smoothing. Interpolation 336

15.1. Calculator for User Cuts and User Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
15.2. Region Brush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
15.3. User Cuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
CONTENTS 7
17.3
15.3.1. Load FIP Boundaries to User Cuts or to User Maps . . . . . . . . . . 344

15.3.2. Save a Report for the Well Side Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
15.3.3. How to Use a User Cut to Add an Aquifer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
15.4. User Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
15.4.1. How to Add the Created User Map to the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
15.5. Property Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
15.5.1. Arithmetics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
15.5.2. Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
15.5.3. Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
15.5.4. Wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
15.5.5. Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
15.5.6. Cross-Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
15.5.7. Wells data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
15.5.8. 3D Grid Properties Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
15.5.9. Stream lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
15.5.10. Derivative Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
15.5.11. Voronoi Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
15.5.12. Connected components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
15.5.13. Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
15.6. Smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
15.7. Interpolation methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
15.7.1. Least Squares method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
15.7.2. Trivial interpolation method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
15.7.3. Multilayer IDW method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
15.7.4. Kriging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
15.7.5. Sequential Gaussian Simulation (SGS) method . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
15.8. Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
15.8.1. Interpolation by Multilayer Least Squares method . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
15.8.2. Interpolation by 3D Least Squares method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
15.8.3. Interpolation by Multilayer Kriging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
15.8.4. Interpolation by 3D Kriging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
15.8.5. Interpolation by Multilayer SGS method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
15.8.6. Interpolation by 3D SGS method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
15.8.7. Interpolation by trivial interpolation method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
15.8.8. Interpolation by multilayer IDW method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
15.9. Permeability Multiplier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
16. Field Development Planning 394

16.1. Adding a well. Forecast. Tracers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
16.2. Hydraulic fracture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
16.3. Well bottomhole zone treatment (BHZT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
CONTENTS 8
17.3
17. tNavigator settings 399

17.1. tNavigator’s General Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
17.2. Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
17.3. Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
17.4. Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
17.5. Maps and Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
17.6. Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
17.7. Update settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
17.8. Client Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
17.9. Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
17.10.Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
17.11.Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
17.11.1. Well And Connection Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
18. References 420
CONTENTS 9
17.3
1. Introduction
tNavigator is a software package, offered as a single executable, which allows to build
static and dynamic reservoir models, run dynamic simulations, perform extended uncertainty
analysis and build surface network as a part of one integrated workflow. All the parts of
the workflow share common proprietary internal data storage system, super-scalable paral-
lel numerical engine, data input/output mechanism and graphical user interface. tNavigator
supports METRIC, LAB, FIELD units systems.
tNavigator is a multi-platform software application written in C++ and can be installed on
Linux, Windows 64-bit OS and run on systems with shared and distributed memory layout
as a console or GUI (local or remote) based application. tNavigator runs on workstations and
clusters. Cloud based solution with full GUI capabilities via remote desktop is also available.
tNavigator contains the following 8 functional modules licensed separately:
• Geology Designer (includes PVT Designer and VFP Designer);
• Model Designer (includes PVT Designer and VFP Designer);
• Network Designer (includes PVT Designer and VFP Designer);
• Black Oil simulator;
• Compositional simulator;
• Thermal simulator;
• Assisted History Matching (AHM, optimization and uncertainty analysis);
• Graphical User Interface.
The list of tNavigator documentation is available in tNavigator Library.
In this document there is a description of Graphical User Interface, that is fully in-
tegrated with simulation modules (Black Oil simulator, Compositional simulator, Thermal
simulator).
tNavigator User Manual contains the description of physical model, mathematical model
and the keywords that can be used in dynamic model.
Graphical User Interface allows to edit dynamic model in a single graphical user interface,
reflecting changes in 2D, 3D and graphs, and run model computations demonstrating the
computation process. The user may modify the dynamic model during simulation interactively
and review the results during or after the calculation (tNavigator presents the results as tables,
graphs, bubble maps, 2D and 3D, well sections, crossplots and various forms of reports).
1. Introduction 10
17.3
2. tNavigator documentation
Technical documentation for all tNavigator modules is available in Russian and English. The
list is in the document tNavigator Library.
Documents can be opened from tNavigator’s main window by choosing tab Manuals and
pressing on Manuals List button (see figure 1). The technical descriptions are available in
the language corresponding to the current language of the interface. Clicking on the button
Export in the menu Manuals will lead to the export of all manuals. In addition any manual
can be opened using menu Help.
Figure 1. Manuals
The newest version of tNavigator manuals for users (and all training tutorials with test
models) is available on support site https://support.rfdyn.com. You will need to
enter your login and password twice.
Links to the documentation are on the left bottom corner of the page (figure 2).
• View docs in English – view documentation in English.
• View docs in Russian – view documentation in Russian.
17.3
• Download docs ENG – download documentation in English (including all training

courses and test models).
• Download docs RUS – download documentation in Russian (including all training

courses and test models).
Figure 2. Download the newest tNavigator’s documentation
17.3
3. Open model in tNavigator

The structure of model files and calculation results files is described in the chapter Data files
of User Manual (document tNavUserManualEnglish).
3.1. tNavigator main window

tNavigator’s main window has the menu bar and main toolbar at the top. Menu bar contains
File, Modelling, Designers, Settings, Help. Main toolbar contains Open, Parallel and Use
GPU. The design of the main window is modified so as to allow more convenient access to
all the modules. The first column contains the following modules: Geology Designer, Model
Designer, PVT Designer, VFP Designer, Network Designer, Licenses. The second column
contains: Simulation, Simulation Results, History Matching, Batch Jobs, Remote GUI
and Manuals.
Figure 3. tNavigator main window.
3.2. Menu bar

1. File menu.
• Recent Projects.
Opens recently loaded projects (also specifies the opening format: IMEX, STARS,
3. Open model in tNavigator 13

17.3
MORE, E100, or E300). You can also use shortcuts: ”Ctrl + 1” opens the most
recent model, ”Ctrl + 2” opens the second most recent model, etc.
The list of recent projects persists even if the tNavigator executable

i file is relocated to a different directory or updated to a newer
version.
• Document.
All documents corresponding to the opened model will be shown.
• Exit.
Hot key – Ctrl+Q.
2. Modeling menu.
• Simulation.
– Open;
– Open As;
– Recent Documents;
– Prepare model for MR
Hot key – Ctrl+H.
Prepares model to calculations in Multiple Realizations (MR) mode. MR (in
license policy) is a mode which allows running two different models with
mutual grid requiring no second tNavigator license. That is, only one tNav
license is used.
tNavigator calculates special hash code of the grid. Models are considered
as having mutual grid when their grid codes are equal. tNavigator stores this
code in the model .data file under the keyword MODELKEY.
A backup of the original file will be created and saved with the extension
”.BACK”.
• Simulation Results.
– View Results. see All Results;
– View Graphs. see Only Graphs;
– View large model.
Opens model with simple 3D imaging.
– Recent Documents.
– Copy Model.
• History Matching. Assisted History Matching.
• Batch Jobs.
• Remote GUI.
3. Designers menu.
3.2. Menu bar 14

17.3
• Geology Designer.
• Model Designer.
• PVT Designer.
• VFP Designer.
• Network Designer.
4. Settings menu.
• Language. Selects language: English/Russian.
! Changing language requires restarting tNavigator.
• Options. See detailed description in section tNavigator settings.

Selects text editor. Sets maps and graphs visualization options.
• Export administrator settings. Exports a file with administrator’s settings. This
file can contain link to license file, cluster connection settings, and tNavigator
update settings.
• Import administrator settings.
Imports the administrator’s settings from a file.
5. Help menu.
• About. Displays simulator’s version, license status, user name and other details.
• Registration. Generates registration file if you are using license file (see details
in the document tNavInstallGuide).
• Install license. See details in the document tNavInstallGuide.
• License details. Displays the License Status (see details in the document tNavIn-
stallGuide).
• License agreement. Displays the text of License Agreement.
• Check for Updates. See detailed description in section Update settings.
• Update options. See detailed description in section Update settings.
• User Manual (Russian/English).
Opens the technical description and reference manual for Simulation core (de-
scribes the physical and mathematical model, keywords). The manual’s language
corresponds to the current language of the interface.
• User Guide (Russian/English).
Opens the present document. The manual’s language corresponds to the current
language of the interface.
• Designer Guide.
Opens the description of Geology Designer, Model Designer, PVT Designer. The
manual’s language corresponds to the current language of the interface.
3.2. Menu bar 15

17.3
• License Server Guide.

Description of license server installation process. The manual’s language corre-
sponds to the current language of the interface.
• Release Notes.
Description of tNavigator releases. The manual’s language corresponds to the
current language of the interface.
3.3. Main toolbar

1. Open.
• Open.
Opens reservoir model files (*.data) (E100). Alternatively, press Ctrl+O;
2. Parallel.
• Custom. Selects the number of streams for parallel computation. tNavigator will
automatically determine the number of cores in your computer and will run calcu-
lations using all the cores. The ”Parallel” option allow you to specify the number
of cores used for computation. For a quad-core computer, for instance, you can
specify 1, 2 or 4 cores. This parameter must be modified before the model is
opened. If the model is open, the computation will use all the cores detected
automatically by tNavigator.
3. Use GPU.
Check to use GPU for computations.
3.4. Module’s Tabs

1. Geology Designer.
See the training course 9.1 How to Use Geology.
• New. New project;

• Open. Open project;
• Recent. Recent project.
2. Model Designer.
See the training course 9.3 How To Load Rescue And Create Model. Work with
Designer. Import of initial data from rescue file (grid, porosity, permeability, well
trajectories). Editing static model, creating hydrodynamic one and calculation in one
window. creating or import RP, PVT, import wells data, equilibration data, setting
compositional properties. Initial and calculated maps and graphs.
• New. New project;
3.3. Main toolbar 16

17.3

3. PVT Designer. See the training course 9.5 How To Use PVT Designer
• New. Create project;

4. VFP Designer.

5. Network Designer.

6. Licenses.
• Install. Install licenses;

• Register.
• Details.
7. Simulation.
• Open.
Open model with default preferences;
• Open as.
Open reservoir model files with non-default preferences (or press Alt+O):
Input Syntax. Select one of the file formats: IMEX, GEM, STARS, MORE, E100,
E300.
Core number. see Parallel menu.
Select Which Steps to Write on Model Open. Selective recording of results can
be set if necessary (it can be selected when opening the model; for description see
Wizard for selective writing of result). Selective recording of computed results in
the RESULTS folder. It is possible to record all data for all steps (default setting)
3.4. Module’s Tabs 17

17.3
or to record some data for certain time steps only.
tNavigator keywords which can be used for writing properties and graphs:
– keywords to record data at specified dates: RPTMAPD (see 12.17.2), RPT-
GRAPHD (see 12.17.2);
– keywords to record data at specified time period: RPTMAPT (see 12.17.3),
RPTGRAPHT (see 12.17.3);
– keywords to record data at first and last time steps only: RPTMAPL
(see 12.17.4), RPTGRAPHL (see 12.17.4).
Automatically Run Model on Open (check it if the model editing or reviewing
is not required prior to computation).
Dump Eclipse Binaries. Choose type of Eclipse binary files to dump and the
directory to save them.
• Recent. Recent projects.
8. Simulation Results.
• All Results.
Hot key – Ctrl+R.
It is better to use this mode when you are not going to calculate the model.
View results of the model that was calculated before. In this mode you can’t
change results, i.e., they can not be deleted or rewritten.
• Only Graphs.
Hot key – Ctrl+G.
It is better to use this mode when you are not going to calculate the model. In
this mode you can’t change results, i.e., they can not be deleted or rewritten.
View graphs of the model that was calculated before. In this mode the functions
which use grid are unavailable. For example:
– visualization of grid properties is not available;
– the following graphs are not available: Flow between FIPs, Block Info,
Well Profile, Well Section;
– some results data can’t be saved as binary files (maps, connection data).
• Recent.
Recent results.
9. History Matching. This module can be used to create projects of Assisted History
Matching and Uncertainty Analysis. See training courses:
• 8.1 AHM Theoretical Course,

• 8.2 How To Use Assisted History Matching,

17.3
• 8.3 How To Use RFT in History Matching,

• 8.4 How To Find The Best Well Trajectory,
• 8.5 Corey RP in AHM,
• 8.6 How To Use AHM for Hydraulic Fracture,
• 8.7 How To Run Different GEO Realizations.

10. Batch Jobs.
• New.
Create .tnb file of models queue.
• Open.
Open .tnb file of models queue.
• Recent.
Show list of the last queues opened.
11. Remote GUI. Hot key – Ctrl+M.

• Open. Open project.
12. Manuals.
• List.
Manuals list.
• Export.
Export of all manuals.
• Notes.
tNavigator’s Releases Notes.

17.3
3.5. tNavigator window with opened model

tNavigator’s GUI contains:
• Top Menu (Document. View. Files. Reports);
• Top Panel Buttons;
• Options Panel (Definitions, Grid Properties, Graphs, Graph Templates, Waterflood, 2D
Histogram, Fluid Properties, Schedule);
• Display Panel (2D, 3D, Histogram);
• Report Panel (Log).
Left-click an option to select it. Selecting an option will pop up a sub-options panel (for
most options). On the right-hand panel the selected data are visualized and available for
editing.
Figure 4. tNavigator main window.
To view a model, you can use the following options: Definitions (general information
about the model) Grid Properties (with the sub-options Initial, Calculated, Fluid-in-place,
3.5. tNavigator window with opened model 20

17.3
Regions, User Cuts (filters), User Maps, Vector Fields, Interblock flows), Graphs, Graph
template, Waterflood, 2D Histogram, Fluid Properties, Schedule.
3.5. tNavigator window with opened model 21

17.3
3.6. Document. View. Files. Reports

1. Menu Document.
• Reload With New Recording Options
Figure 5. Wizard for Selective Writing of Results.
Selective recording of computational data. Options: record all data for all steps
or record only selected data for specified time steps. The steps will be selected
in the dialogue that will pop up when a model is opened for the first time; data
will be recorded if a graph or properties are visible, otherwise data will not be
recorded (properties and graph visibility settings are in tNavigator’s main window
menue Settings).
In addition exporting calculated properties and graphs at specified dates can be
set via several keywords (see below). The amount of data, written to a disk, can
be reduced.
The keywords to set the record data specification are:
3.6. Document. View. Files. Reports 22

17.3
– keywords to record data at specified dates: RPTMAPD (see 12.17.2), RPT-

GRAPHD (see 12.17.2);
– keywords to record data at specified time period: RPTMAPT (see 12.17.3),
RPTGRAPHT (see 12.17.3);
– keywords to record data at first and last time steps only: RPTMAPL
(see 12.17.4), RPTGRAPHL (see 12.17.4).
• Reload Model.
Reload model is equivalent to close and re-open a model. Hot key – Ctrl+L;
• Clear Results and Reload.
All files will be deleted from the RESULTS folder, and the model will be re-
opened.
Hot key – Ctrl+Shift+L;
• Reload Schedule.
Only well data will be reloaded;
• Reload Model and Run Calculation.
A model will be reloaded. After reloading the model a calculation will be started
automatically.
• Save.
Save model at any time step.
Hot key – Ctrl+S.
• Save zip-archive with model.
Model .data-file and all included files will be saved in separate zip-archive. This
functionality can be used to zip the model with a lot of included folders with data
and a lot of included files.
• Split. This feature can only be used before a computation. Detailed instruc-
tions on model splitting are in the section Split and merge (sector modeling) of
tNavUserManual.
See the training course 7.1 How To Split And Merge Model.
• Approximate RP.
This menu can be used to convert RP defined via tables (SWOF (see 12.6.1),
SGOF (see 12.6.2), etc.) to RP defined via end points.
– Convert RP to Corey Correlation (the keywords COREYWO (see 12.6.3),
COREYGO (see 12.6.4) will be created);
– Convert RP to LET Correlation (the keywords LETWO (see 12.6.8), LETGO
(see 12.6.9) will be created).
See detailed description in the section Properties editing.

17.3
• Create Forecast.
This will pop up the dialogue Creating Forecast Model. See detailed description
in the training course How To Use Restart.
• Create History Matching Project.
Choosing this option allows to create a History Matching Project. You can create
the project using existing, already specified variables or you can set them using
the History Matching Variables Manager or directly in the data file via the
keyword DEFINES (see 12.1.21).
The detailed description of algorithms, the objective function calculation, the
uncertainty analysis is in the User Guide for History Matching Module (document
tNavAHMUserGuideEnglish).
• History Matching Variables Manager.
Allows to set the variables for AHM according to available scenarious.
See training courses:
8.1 AHM Theoretical Course,
8.2 How To Use Assisted History Matching,
8.3 How To Use RFT in History Matching,
8.4 How To Find The Best Well Trajectory,
8.5 Corey RP in AHM,
8.6 How To Use AHM for Hydraulic Fracture,
8.7 How To Run Different GEO Realizations.
• Export Settings. Allows to set properties and graph settings for one model only
and then apply these settings to other models. Settings: graph colors, Graphs
Templates, graphs in User selection, colors for properties, visualization options.
(a) Set required settings in one model. Press Document. Export Settings. All
the settings will be saved in the .tNav-file.
(b) Open a new model (to which the created settings should be applied). Docu-
ment. Import Settings.
(c) Select .tNav-file to be applied to the current model.
• Import Settings.
Import file with settings of graphs style, Graph Templates, graphs in User Selec-
tion, properties colors and visualisation options. See paragraph Export Settings.
• Load Well Data.
Load well data from text files: well trajectories, layers, events, history, well logs,
RFT (MDT), PLT.
• Load results.
Graphs of different runs can be compared in one window (for wells, groups, etc.)
– 7.10.
Computation data of tNavigator, Eclipse or MORE can be loaded. See the training

17.3
course 1.5 How To Load Maps And Graphs.
This option can be used to compare various versions of the field development
forecast. All the graphs will show graphs corresponding to the added model. The
added models’ results will be superimposed on the initial model data. If reporting
steps are not the same, the results will be interpolated into the initial model’s
steps; If wells from loaded model are not existed in the initial model they will be
ignored, etc.
Grid properties can be loaded here in the following formats:
– GRD file[M] – .grd
File type: binary file, generated via Roxar MORE.
File format – .grd.
Data description: you will be offered a choice of which cubes of properties
available in the file to load.
– Array file[M] – .ara
File type: binary file, generated via Roxar MORE.
File format – .ara.
available in the file to load and for which time steps.
– Restart file – .UNRST
File type: binary file, generated via Eclipse.
File format – .UNRST.
available in the file to load and for which time steps.
• Show Loaded Results.
Show loaded models’ results.
• Preferences.
There you can configure Visualization, Well options, Contour lines, Streamlines,
Drainage network;
• Economics Preferences.
See the detailed description of economic parameters and Net Present Value graph
in the section Economics Preferences.
• Calculation Parameters.
This item allows to see and edit parameters of the iteration process (the keyword
RUNCTRL, see 12.18.124).
• Close.
Close the model.
Hot key – Ctrl+Q.
2. Menu View.

17.3
• New. Create New View. Create an additional window for the current model. It is
possible to create several windows for the same model for simultaneous viewing
graphs and properties in different windows.
Create Quick Graph View. Hot key – Ctrl+N. This will create a new window
with graphs for the current model.
• Show all.
Show all windows created for the current model.
• Hide all.
Hide all windows created for the current model.
• Close.
Close all the windows additionally created for the current model (except for the
model’s main window).
3. Menu Files.
A full list of the current model’s files. Clicking on a file will open it in a text editor.
The text editor to view files can be set via Settings. Options. Path in tNavigator main
window.
4. Reports.
See the training tutorial1.3 How To Import Export Data Reports.

17.3
3.7. (Status) Report Panel – log

In the bottom part of the window, there is a panel showing the loading and computation
status of the model. It shows brief information about the model’s loading status and for each
time step. General information is shown in green, errors are shown in red, and warnings are
shown in orange. The level of detail is driven by the settings in .data file defined by the
keywords REPORTFILE (see 12.1.3) and REPORTSCREEN (see 12.1.3). These keywords are
setting references of log panel.
Figure 6. Report Panel.
The default setting is to show all messages (button Messages on the bottom panel).
To have warnings and errors only shown, click button Warnings and Errors on the
bottom panel.
Elapsed shows the time passed from the begining of the computation. Estimated shows
the time left to the completion of the computation.
A full report about tNavigator’s work with the model can also be viewed in the file
MODEL_TITLE.log in the RESULTS folder (the folder is created near the model’s .data
file).
Search in log.
To use Search in the log panel press one mouse click on the panel and press Ctrl+F.
Enter the text in the appeared row – figure 7.
Figure 7. Search in the log.
Double click on any warning or error shown in the log-panel will open the file to which
this warning or error refers (see figure 8). The line of the file which contains error will be
highlighted.
3.7. (Status) Report Panel – log 27

17.3
Figure 8. The file corresponds to the warning in the log.
It is available to view messages only for wells (for example, changing well control during
calculation). Press button Well Events for this (see figure 9)
Figure 9. Well Events in the log.
3.7. (Status) Report Panel – log 28

17.3
3.8. Top Panel Buttons

tNavigator’s top panel accommodates principal keys for operating the model and controlling
computation.
3.8.1. Create New View

– Create New View.
Create Another View
You can create any number of windows showing the same model, so you can view
different properties and graphs on different windows. Checking Auto Sync will synchronize
zooming by axes (or rotation) in two simultaneously opened windows of this model. Well
graphs can only be synchronized in different windows. When you move on to a new well in
one window, that well will be automatically selected in the other windows, too.
Create Quick Graph View (the arrow right of the button) or Ctrl+N.
This will create a graph view for wells. Moving to a different well in the main list of
wells will move you to that well in this window too. Graphs for the following parameters
can be selected from a pop-down menu: production rates, total production rates, pressure,
water-cut, gas-oil ratio, etc.
It is possible to create several graph views for a model:
1. Create Graph View on 2D.
2. Press button Duplicate in graph view on the right side.
3. Choose well in any graph view.
4. Press Lock current well in this view.
5. Go to the next view, choose well, fix it and so on.
3.8. Top Panel Buttons 29

17.3
Figure 10. Quick Graph Views.
Lock Current Well. The well will not replaced in the graph window when you select
another one in the main window.
Synchronize With Other Graph Views.
Show Hist/Calc Results. Select the graphs to be shown. By default calculated and
historical results are shown. You can visualize historical or calculated results on separate
windows.
Models to Show. Select a model for which graphs will be shown.
Duplicate. Create another graph window.
3.8.2. Show All Views

– Show All Views. All the windows created for the current model will be shown. To
create another window press –Create Another View.
3.8.3. Hide All Views

– Hide All Views. All the windows created for the current model will be hidden.
3.8.4. Save Model

– Save Model. Hot key – Ctrl+S.
3.8.2. Show All Views 30

17.3
You can save the model at any time step of your computations. To do so set the time
slider to the time step starting which you want to save your model, e.g. Step 20 – 01.01.2005.
Then activate the Save Model dialogue and save the model. The saved model will have time
step 01.01.2005 as its starting point, i.e. Step 0.
Save Options:
• Export Model. Export an entire model; SCHEDULE section will be saved in tNavigator
format.
• Export Model in E100/E300 Format. Export an entire model; SCHEDULE section

will be saved in E100/E300 format. In this case keywords which can be used only for
tNavigator will not be exported; you will see a warning about it at the bottom of the
dialogue window. Also you can turn on/off printing warning messages about keywords
into the log file (item Dont’t print warnings about skipped keywords into log
report file).
• Export Schedule Data. Export SCHEDULE section only. The section saving format is
specified in the dialogue Schedule options below.
• Save only User Files. Files, contained in the folder USER, will be saved only. This
option is available only when there are user modifications in the model.
• Custom. Allow to define options to save a model. You can select parts of the model
to save below in the dialog Model Parts.
In the dialog Model Parts you can select only necessary parts of the model to be saved.
This dialog is available only if the option Custom of the dialog Save Options was selected.
The following parts are available to select:
• Main Data File.
• Grid Data.
• PVT Properties.
• Relative Permeabilities.
• Regions Data.
• Initial State Data.
• Flux Data.
• Schedule.
• All / None. Select each options or nothing.
3.8.4. Save Model 31

17.3
In the dialog Schedule Options you can set SCHEDULE section saving format. It is
available only if the option Export Schedule Data or Custom was selected. The dialog
contains the following options:
• Default. SCHEDULE will be exported in tNavigator format.
• E100/E300 Format. SCHEDULE will be exported in E100/E300 format. In this case
keywords which can be used only for tNavigator will not be exported; you will see a
warning about it at the bottom of the dialog window.
• Save Perforations in E100/E300 Format.
• Keep Schedule Syntax. Export SCHEDULE section in the initial format. The option
is available only for the hybrid or MORE type models.
When saving the file specify a full path and the name of the file.
3.8.5. Split model
– Split model.
This feature can only be used before running a model computation. See the detailed
instructions on the model splitting in the section Split and merge (sector modeling) of
tNavUserManual.
See the training tutorial7.1 How To Split And Merge Model.
3.8.6. History Matching Variables Manager
– History Matching Variables Manager.
Create History Matching Project – The window to create a History Matching Project
will be opened. You can create a project using existing, already specified variables or you
can set them in the History Matching Variables Manager or directly in the data file via
the keyword DEFINES (see 12.1.21).
The detailed description of all algorithms, the objective function calculation, the uncertainty
analysis is in the User Guide for History Matching Module (document tNavAHMUser-
GuideEnglish). History Matching Variables Manager – Allows to set the variables for
AHM according to available scenarious.
See the training courses:
8.1 AHM Theoretical Course,
8.2 How To Use Assisted History Matching,
8.3 How To Use RFT in History Matching,
8.4 How To Find The Best Well Trajectory,
8.5 Corey RP in AHM,
8.6 How To Use AHM for Hydraulic Fracture,
8.7 How To Run Different GEO Realizations.
3.8.5. Split model 32

17.3
Figure 11. To save a model dialog.
3.8.7. Reload Model

– Reload Model.
See the detailed description in the section Document. View. Files. Reports
3.8.8. Run calculation

– Run.
Runs model calculations. Calculation details. You can run a calculations by pressing
Ctrl+R. The time slider will move by time step. The steps completed will be redlined.
3.8.7. Reload Model 33

17.3
3.8.9. Playback Results
– Playback.
Auto playback calculated time step results (step changes in properties, graphs, and tables).
3.8.10. Stop
– Stop.
Stop (pause) calculations. You can resume a computation where you stopped it or from
any previously computed time step.
3.8.9. Playback Results 34

17.3
3.9. Left panel buttons

Description of left panel buttons.
• Show list of visualization methods and tree of corresponding objects.

Press this button to show the options panel and tree of corresponding objects. Second
pressing on this button hides this panel.
• Show visualization properties.

Press this button to show the panel of current object visualization settings.Second
pressing on this button hides this panel.
3.9. Left panel buttons 35

17.3
3.10. Run model
Figure 12. Run and stop calculation panel
To run calculations from step 0, click Run regardless of the position of the time
step slider. Calculations can be run from any previously calculated time step. You can run
calculations by pressing Ctrl+R.
To stop computations at any step, click Stop. Putting the mouse pointer on the time
slider will display the date of the time step corresponding to the slider’s current position.
3.10.1. Compute to a fixed step

To run calculations from step 0 to a fixed step:
1. Check Goto Step on the top panel;
2. Select the time step number in the neighboring field;
3. Click Run.
The calculation will stop when the selected time step is reached.
3.10.2. Re-Run Calculations

You can re-run a calculation from any step:
1. Pause the calculation by clicking Stop.
2. Wait for the calculation to stop (for the processor loading indicator to stop rotating).
3. Use the left mouse button to move the time slider to the step from which you want the
computation to resume.
4. Click Run.
5. You may re-Run calculations as many times as you need.
Remark. The time slider cannot be moved during a calculation (if Stop button is not
pressed). The slider shows the number of the current time step. The slider can only be
moved after the calculation is stopped.
3.10.3. Start Calculations from Any Previously Calculated Step

This feature can be used as follows: run calculations for any time step number, close the
model, re-open the model’s data file (ModelName.data), set the time slider at any previously
calculated time step and press Run. Previously calculated steps are marked with a red
line under the time slider.
3.10. Run model 36

17.3
3.11. tNavigator hotkeys

The following hotkeys are available in tNavigator:
• Ctrl+R – run calculations.
• Ctrl+P – make a screenshot.
• Ctrl+S – save model.
• Ctrl+Q – close model.
• Ctrl+N – create Quick Graph View.
• Ctrl+L – reload model.
• Ctrl+Shift+L – clear results and reload model (all files in the RESULTS folder will be
deleted, and a model will be re-opened).
• Ctrl+click (on property) – open dialog Well properties for editing the nearest well to
click.
• Alt+click (on property) – add new well (producing, injecting or well template – de-
pending on settings).
• Double click on well (on property) – jump to Rates graphs for this well.
• Double click on block (on property) – jump to Block info graph for this block.
• Simultaneous clicking left and right mouse buttons or Ctrl+0 (for 2D, 3D and
Graphs) – default view.
3.11. tNavigator hotkeys 37

17.3
3.12. Definitions
Definitions contains general information about model (figure 13):
• Model title;
• Starting date;
• Language;
• Model type;
• Collector type (Single porosity, Dual porosity);
• Dimensions NX, NY, NZ (the number of blocks which model divided along X, Y, Z
axes);
• Total block number, active block number;
• Wells number, transit wells, well groups, the number of connections, maximal connec-
tions number per well;
• Information about polymer, alkaline, surfactant, brine, tracers data in the model (On /
Off).
Figure 13. Definitions
3.12. Definitions 38
17.3
3.13. Schedule
The option displays a well geometry and well production parameters set in a model. All the
data are displayed in the tabular form. The tables can be sorted as in the Graphs option.
Tables display the parameters, specified by keywords in the initial model, regarding wells.
Move the mouse on the keyword or its parameter to see the pop-up tip.
The Schedule (Well Data) option displays the following tabs:
• Well Definitions. The data in the table correspond to the keywords WELSPECS
(see 12.18.3), COMPDAT (see 12.18.6), WPIMULT (see 12.18.30), COMPFRAC
(see 12.18.131), WFRAC (see 12.18.127). The table presents the following well
data: commissioning date and perforation jobs. The columns are: Date, Operation,
Well Name, Group Name, Connection Blocks (I, J, k1, k2), Status, Diameter, Skin,
Direction, Productivity Index Multiplier and Fracture Azimuth Angle.
Figure 14. Schedule. Well definition.
• Well Production. The data in the table correspond to the keywords WCONHIST
(see 12.18.37), WCONPROD (see 12.18.36), WCONINJE (see 12.18.38), etc. The table
presents production history data and specifies production rate and pressure caps. The
columns are: Date, Operation, Well Name, Status, etc.
• Multisegment wells.
The table presents the following well data: COMPSEGL (see 12.18.23), COMPSEGS
(see 12.18.22), WELSEGS (see 12.18.11), WSEGAICD (see 12.18.15), WSEGEXSS
(see 12.18.17), WSEGFLIM (see 12.18.18), WSEGITER (see 12.18.118), WSEGTABL
(see 12.18.13), WSEGVALV (see 12.18.14) and other.
3.13. Schedule 39
17.3
• Economic Limits, Drilling and Workovers.

The table presents the following well data: CECON (see 12.18.68), DRILPRI
(see 12.18.208), GCUTBACK (see 12.18.49), GDRILPOT (see 12.18.212), GECON
(see 12.18.107), GRUPRIG (see 12.18.215), PRORDER (see 12.18.220), QDRILL
(see 12.18.211), WBHGLR (see 12.18.50), WCUTBACK (see 12.18.48), WDRILPRI
(see 12.18.209), WDRILRES (see 12.18.213), WDRILTIM (see 12.18.210), WECON
(see 12.18.63), WECONCMF (see 12.18.65), WECONINJ (see 12.18.69), WELSOMIN
(see 12.18.2), WLIMTOL (see 12.18.146), WORKLIM (see 12.18.214), WREGROUP
(see 12.18.75), WTEST (see 12.18.165) and other.
• Other operations. This table presents, for instance, group operation data. The keyword
is ACTIONC (see 12.18.145).
• All operations. All operations presented above.
3.13. Schedule 40
17.3
4. Grid Properties
The general view of the Grid Properties option is shown in figure 15.
The following grid properties are displayed:
• Initial
• Calculated;
• Fluid-in-place;
• Regions;
• User Cuts;
• User Maps;
• Vector Fields;
• Interblock Flows.
To open a list of properties, click the triangle next to the required option. Clicking the
triangle again will collapse the list of properties.
Figure 15. Initial properties
Any property can be displayed as 2D (select 2D), 3D distributions (select 3D) or as a

Histogram. You can shift from one view mode to another by left-clicking on the required
mode.
17.3
The main buttons to work with property are on the right panel.
The list of properties for the black-oil model are different from one for the compositional
model.
17.3
4.1. Initial
List of initial properties contains:
Property symbol (tNavigator key- Property Description, Units, if present

word)
Block size along X (DX, see 12.2.2) Model block size along X (METRIC: m, FIELD: ft)
Block size along Y (DY, see 12.2.2) Model block size along Y (METRIC: m, FIELD: ft)
Block size along Z (DZ, see 12.2.2) Model block size along Z (METRIC: m, FIELD: ft)
Depth (DEPTH, see 12.3.28) Middle blocks depth level (METRIC: m, FIELD: ft)
Tops (TOPS, see 12.2.6) Top blocks depth level (METRIC: m, FIELD: ft)
Net to Gross Ratio (NTG, Net-to-gross property
see 12.2.25)
Porosity (PORO, see 12.2.24) Porosity property
Permeability along X (PERMX, Blocks’ absolute permeability along X (mDarcy)
see 12.2.13)
Permeability along Y (PERMY, Blocks’ absolute permeability along Y (mDarcy)
see 12.2.13)
Permeability along Z (PERMZ, Blocks’ absolute permeability along Z (mDarcy)
see 12.2.13)
Trans. Mult. along X Transmissibility multiplier for block faces along X axis.
This property is a result of multiplication of the fol-
lowing multipliers: transmissibility multiplier along X
(MULTX, see 12.2.15), cumulative transmissibility mul-
tiplier along X (HMMULTX (see 12.2.22) or HMMLTXY,
see 12.2.22), fault transmissibility multiplier in X di-
rection (MULTFLT, see 12.2.39). If any multiplier is
specified in both GRID section and EDIT section
then its values are multiplied together. The property
is available if any keyword MULTX (see 12.2.15) or
MULTFLT (see 12.2.39), or HMMULTX (see 12.2.22),
or HMMLTXY (see 12.2.22) is specified at least in
one section GRID or EDIT. If keyword MULTX
(see 12.2.15) (or MULTFLT (see 12.2.39), or HMMULTX
(see 12.2.22), or HMMLTXY, see 12.2.22) is specified
several times in one section its value will be overwrit-
ten and equal to its last specified value. This property
can not be edited by right–clicking on it.
4.1. Initial 43
17.3
Trans. Mult. along Y Transmissibility multiplier for block faces along Y axis.
This property is a result of multiplication of the fol-
lowing multipliers: transmissibility multiplier along Y
(MULTY, see 12.2.17), cumulative transmissibility mul-
tiplier along Y (HMMULTY (see 12.2.22) or HMMLTXY,
see 12.2.22), fault transmissibility multiplier in Y direc-
tion (MULTFLT, see 12.2.39). If any multiplier is spec-
ified in both GRID section and EDIT section then its
values are multiplied together. The property is avail-
able if any keyword MULTY (see 12.2.17) or MULT-
FLT (see 12.2.39), or HMMULTY (see 12.2.22), or
HMMLTXY (see 12.2.22) is specified at least in one sec-
tion GRID or EDIT. If keyword MULTY (see 12.2.17)
(or MULTFLT (see 12.2.39), or HMMULTY (see 12.2.22),
or HMMLTXY, see 12.2.22) is specified several times in
one section its value will be overwritten and equal to its
last specified value. This property can not be edited by
right–clicking on it.
Trans. Mult. along Z Transmissibility multiplier for block faces along Z
axis. This property is a result of multiplication of the
following multipliers: transmissibility multiplier along
Z (MULTZ, see 12.2.19), cumulative transmissibility
multiplier along Z (HMMULTZ, see 12.2.22), fault
transmissibility multiplier in Z direction (MULTFLT,
see 12.2.39). If any multiplier is specified in both
GRID section and EDIT section then its values are
multiplied together. The property is available if any key-
word MULTZ (see 12.2.19) or MULTFLT (see 12.2.39),
or HMMULTZ (see 12.2.22) is specified at least in one
section GRID or EDIT. If MULTZ (see 12.2.19) (or
MULTFLT (see 12.2.39), or HMMULTZ, see 12.2.22) is
specified several times in one section its value will be
overwritten and equal to its last specified value. This
property can not be edited by right–clicking on it.
4.1. Initial 44
17.3
Trans. Mult. along X- Transmissibility multiplier for block faces in opposite to

X axis direction (X-). This property is a result of multi-
plication of the following multipliers: transmissibility
multiplier along X- (MULTX-, see 12.2.16), cumula-
tive transmissibility multiplier along X- (HMMULTX-
, see 12.2.23), fault transmissibility multiplier in di-
rection X- (MULTFLT, see 12.2.39). If any multiplier
is specified in both GRID section and EDIT section
is available if any keyword MULTX- (see 12.2.16), or
HMMULTX- (see 12.2.23), or MULTFLT (see 12.2.39)
is specified at least in one section GRID or EDIT. If
MULTX- (see 12.2.16) (or HMMULTX- (see 12.2.23), or
MULTFLT, see 12.2.39) is specified several times in one
section its value will be overwritten and equal to its
Trans. Mult. along Y- (MULTY-, Transmissibility multiplier for block faces in opposite to
see 12.2.18) Y axis direction (Y-). This property is a result of multi-
multiplier along Y- (MULTY-, see 12.2.18), cumula-
tive transmissibility multiplier along Y- (HMMULTY-
rection Y- (MULTFLT, see 12.2.39). If any multiplier
is available if any keyword MULTY- (see 12.2.18) or
HMMULTY- (see 12.2.23), or MULTFLT (see 12.2.39)
MULTY- (see 12.2.18) (or HMMULTY- (see 12.2.23), or
4.1. Initial 45
17.3
Trans. Mult. along Z- (MULTZ-, Transmissibility multiplier for block faces in opposite to
see 12.2.20) Z axis direction (Z-). This property is a result of multi-
multiplier along Z- (MULTZ-, see 12.2.20), cumula-
tive transmissibility multiplier along Z- (HMMULTZ-
rection Z- (MULTFLT, see 12.2.39). If any multiplier
is available if any keyword MULTZ- (see 12.2.20) or
HMMULTZ- (see 12.2.23), or MULTFLT (see 12.2.39)
MULTZ- (see 12.2.20) (or HMMULTZ- (see 12.2.23), or
Std Pore Volume (STDPORV) Pore Volume (at reference pressure). In the .log file
there is Pore volume KRB. This value is calculated as
sum(stdporv) (METRIC: m3 , FIELD: stb)
Pressure (PRESSURE, see 12.15.10) The property is available for viewing only if the initial
pressure distribution is set (METRIC: barsa, FIELD:
psia)
Water Saturation (SWAT, The property is available for viewing only if the initial
see 12.15.12) water saturation distribution is set
Gas Saturation (SGAS, see 12.15.13) The property is available for viewing only if the initial
gas saturation distribution is set
Oil Saturation (SOIL, see 12.15.14) The property is available for viewing only if the initial
oil saturation distribution is set
Critical water saturation used for The property is available for viewing only if the crit-
scaling saturation endpoints (SWCR, ical water saturation is set by the keyword SWCR
see 12.6.30) (see 12.6.30)
Critical gas saturation used for scal- The property is available for viewing only if the critical
ing saturation endpoints (SGCR, gas saturation is set by the keyword SGCR (see 12.6.31)
see 12.6.31)
Critical oil saturation to water The property is available for viewing only if the critical
(SOWCR, see 12.6.32) oil saturation to water is set by the keyword SOWCR
(see 12.6.32)
4.1. Initial 46
17.3
Critical oil saturation to gas The property is available for viewing only if the criti-
(SOGCR, see 12.6.33) cal oil saturation to gas is set by the keyword SOGCR
(see 12.6.33)
Minimum water saturation used for The property is available for viewing only if the min-
scaling saturation endpoints (SWL, imum water saturation is set by the keyword SWL
see 12.6.27) (see 12.6.27)
Minimum gas saturation used for The property is available for viewing only if the
scaling saturation endpoints (SGL, minimum gas saturation is set by the keyword SGL
see 12.6.29) (see 12.6.29)
Aquifer properties (Aquifer) Properties are available for viewing only if there are
aquiferN (N is the aquifer num- analytic aquifers in the model. The property shows
ber) the aquifer influx coefficient. This parameter can be
set via the 9-th parameter of the keyword AQUANCON
(see 12.16.11) or can be calculated by default as a sur-
face of the connection area between aquifer and this
grid block (METRIC: m2 , FIELD: f t 2 ).
Numerical aquifers The number of numerical aquifer is visualized. Proper-
ties are available for viewing only if there are numerical
aquifers in the model, specified via keywords AQUCON
(see 12.16.13), AQUNUM (see 12.16.12).
Properties of user defined arrays Properties are available for viewing if user’s arrays are
ARR (see 12.3.5) defined (keyword ARR, see 12.3.5).
In addition to the main initial properties listed in this section, the following properties
can be displayed for the thermal model:
Property symbol (tNavigator key- Property Description, Units, if present

word)
Full Volume A block’s full volume (the sum of pore volume and rock
volume).
Heat Losses (for example, Heat Heat losses to the external media. For the Kerogen
Losses 1 and Heat Losses 2, for two model: the reservoir has two external media contacts:
external medium contacts) (from the top – Heat Losses-1 property and from the
bottom–Heat Losses-2 property). If there are no heat
losses in the block, the value of Heat Losses property
is assigned to ”-1”. If there are heat losses in the block
the value of the property is equal to the area of block’s
surface through which heat loses.
4.1. Initial 47
17.3
4.2. Calculated
In the list below there is a description of calculated properties available in the graphical user
interface by default. Also the following properties can be requested additionally:
• Request for the distribution of blocks with convergence problems;
• Request for distributions of total flows of water, oil and gas.
Calculated Maps contain:
Map Title tNavigator designation, description

Pressure Pressure (METRIC: barsa, FIELD: psia)
Oil Saturation SOIL (see 12.15.14)
Water Saturation SWAT (see 12.15.12)
Gas Saturation SGAS (see 12.15.13)
Saturation Ternary Diagram This diagram is developed for three-phase models. It
shows the saturation distribution for each block (see,
e.g., figure 16) If you left-click on a block, under the
picture you will see the values of Oil Saturation (SOIL),
Water Saturation (SWAT), and Gas Saturation (SGAS)
for the block.
The block’s colour will show whether the block is
mostly water, oil or gas (blue is the maximum water
saturation, green is the maximum oil saturation, and red
is the maximum gas saturation).
Note. The description of 2D views Sum, Rms, Con-
centration, Density for Saturation ternary diagram is
available in the section 4.2.1.
Bubble Pressure PBUB (see 12.15.32) (METRIC: barsa, FIELD: psia)
Dew-Point Pressure PDEW (see 12.15.35) (METRIC: barsa, FIELD: psia)
1/water formation volume factor ibw (1/bw – the reciprocal of the water formation vol-
ume factor bw) (METRIC: m3 /(m3 under reservoir con-
ditions), FIELD: b/(b under reservoir conditions))
1/oil formation volume factor ibo (1/bo – the reciprocal of the oil formation volume
factor bo) (METRIC: m3 /(m3 under reservoir condi-
tions), FIELD: b/(b under reservoir conditions))
1/gas formation volume factor ibg (1/bg – the reciprocal of the gas formation vol-
ume factor bg) (METRIC: m3 /(m3 under reservoir con-
ditions), FIELD: Mscf/(b under reservoir conditions))
4.2. Calculated 48
17.3
Map Title (continued) tNavigator designation, description

Solubility of Gas rs (gas content) (METRIC: m3 /m3 , FIELD: Mscf/stb
Vaporization of Oil rv (oil in gas content)
1/water viscosity imuw (1/muw – the reciprocal of water viscosity –
muw) (1/cP)
1/oil viscosity imuo (1/muo – the reciprocal of oil viscosity – muo)
(1/cP)
1/gas viscosity imug (1/mug – the reciprocal of gas viscosity – mug)
(1/cP)
Trans. Mult. along X Transmissibility multiplier for block faces along X axis
direction. This property is the result of multiplica-
tion of the following transmissibility multipliers: trans-
missibility multiplier along X (MULTX, see 12.2.15),
fault transmissibility multiplier in X direction MULT-
FLT (see 12.2.39), specified in the section SCHEDULE
– from initial time step up to current time step. If
these keywords are not specified this property is shown
and equal to 1. The keyword MULTX (see 12.2.15)
(or MULTFLT, see 12.2.39) can be specified at each
time step. The effect is cumulative (e.g., when MULTX
(see 12.2.15) is encountered in the SCHEDULE sec-
tion, it multiplies the current transmissibility in the X
direction).
Trans. Mult. along Y Transmissibility multiplier for block faces along Y axis
direction. This property is the result of multiplica-
tion of the following transmissibility multipliers: trans-
missibility multiplier along Y (MULTY, see 12.2.17),
fault transmissibility multiplier in Y direction MULT-
FLT (see 12.2.39), specified in the section SCHEDULE
– from initial time step up to current time step. If
and equal to 1. The keyword MULTY (see 12.2.17)
time step. The effect is cumulative (e.g., when MULTY
tion, it multiplies the current transmissibility in the Y
direction).
4.2. Calculated 49
17.3

Trans. Mult. along Z Transmissibility multiplier for block faces along Z axis
direction. This property is the result of multiplication
of the following transmissibility multipliers: transmis-
sibility multiplier along Z (MULTZ, see 12.2.19), fault
transmissibility multiplier in Z axis direction MULTFLT
(see 12.2.39), specified in the section SCHEDULE –
from initial time step up to current time step. If
and equal to 1. The keyword MULTZ (see 12.2.19)
time step. The effect is cumulative (e.g., when MULTZ
tion, it multiplies the current transmissibility in the Z
direction).
Trans. Mult. along X- Transmissibility multiplier for block faces in opposite
to X axis direction (X-). This property is the result of
multiplication of the following transmissibility multi-
pliers: transmissibility multiplier along X- (MULTX-,
see 12.2.16), fault transmissibility multiplier in direc-
tion X- (MULTFLT, see 12.2.39), specified in the section
SCHEDULE – from initial time step up to cur-
rent time step. If these keywords are not specified
this property is shown and equal to 1. The keyword
MULTX- (see 12.2.16) (or MULTFLT, see 12.2.39) can
be specified at each time step. The effect is cumulative
(e.g., when MULTX- (see 12.2.16) is encountered in the
SCHEDULE section, it multiplies the current transmis-
sibility in the direction X-).
4.2. Calculated 50
17.3

Trans. Mult. along Y- Transmissibility multiplier for block faces in opposite
to Y axis direction (Y-). This property is the result of
pliers: transmissibility multiplier along Y- (MULTY-,
tion Y- (MULTFLT, see 12.2.39), specified in the section
MULTY- (see 12.2.18) (or MULTFLT, see 12.2.39) can
(e.g., when MULTY- (see 12.2.18) is encountered in the
sibility in the direction Y-).
Trans. Mult. along Z- Transmissibility multiplier for block faces in opposite
to Z axis direction (Z-). This property is the result of
pliers: transmissibility multiplier along Z- (MULTZ-,
tion Z- (MULTFLT, see 12.2.39), specified in the section
MULTZ- (see 12.2.20) (or MULTFLT, see 12.2.39) can
(e.g., when MULTZ- (see 12.2.20) is encountered in the
sibility in the direction Z-).
Rock compaction Trans. Mult. General Transmissibility Multiplier for rock compaction
taken from the rock compaction table (ROCKTAB,
see 12.5.19).
Rock compaction Trans. Mult. along Rock compaction Transmissibility Multiplier in the X
X direction from the rock compaction table (ROCKTAB,
see 12.5.19). It is available if keyword RKTRMDIR
(see 12.5.18) is specified.
Rock compaction Trans. Mult. along Rock compaction Transmissibility Multiplier in the Y
Y direction from the rock compaction table (ROCKTAB,
4.2. Calculated 51
17.3

Rock compaction Trans. Mult. along Rock compaction Transmissibility Multiplier in the Z
Z direction from the rock compaction table (ROCKTAB,
Aquifer water inflow (displayed if Aqflow – Cumulative mass water inflow (METRIC:
there is an aquifer in the model) kg − m)
Phase mass densities: water, oil, gas.
Note for the black-oil model. The distribution of phase mass density (oil, water, gas) is
different from the distribution of component mass density WATER, OIL, GAS. Phase mass
density is calculated as a weight of the phase per unit volume (METRIC: kg/m 3 , FIELD:
lb/ft 3 ) in the case when the volume is occupied only by this phase. Component mass density
is calculated as a weight per unit volume (METRIC: kg/m 3 , FIELD: lb/ft 3 ) in the case when
the volume is occupied by a mixture of all components existed in the block.
Mass density of water wat_den (METRIC: kg/m3 , FIELD: lb/ft3 )

Mass density of oil oil_den (METRIC: kg/m3 , FIELD: lb/ft3 )
Mass density of gas gas_den (METRIC: kg/m3 , FIELD: lb/ft3 )
Relative permeability of water Krwater
Relative permeability of oil Kroil
Relative permeability of gas Krgas
Oil-water capillary pressure (METRIC: barsa, FIELD: psia)
Gas-Oil capillary pressure (METRIC: barsa, FIELD: psia)
Pore volume porv (Current pore volume at reservoir pressure).
In the .log file there is Reservoir pore volume KRB.
This value is calculated as sum(porv) (METRIC: m3 ,
FIELD: b).
Molar density of components. (For black-oil models it is called as the mass density).
For black-oil models a distribution of the mass density of components is visualized, since
a weight of component is measured in kilograms, so the ”mole density” of the component is
the weight density of the component, and has the same units (kg/m 3 ) as the mass density. For
compositional models component molar weight is specified (a keyword MW) and therefore
”mole density” is really the molar density of component and has units – mol/m 3 .
’WATER’ component: Molar density (METRIC: kg/m3 , FIELD: lb/ft3 )

(Mass density)
4.2. Calculated 52
17.3
’OIL’ component: Molar density (METRIC: kg/m3 , FIELD: lb/ft3 )

(Mass density)
’GAS’ component: Molar density (METRIC: kg/m3 , FIELD: lb/ft3 )
(Mass density)
Cumulative cross-flows of water Cumulative cross-flow distributions (FLOWW – for wa-
Cumulative cross-flows of oil ter, FLOWO – for oil and FLOWG – for gas) will be
Cumulative cross-flows of gas accessible only if requested prior to computations via
the keyword RPTMAPS (see 12.15.51). (METRIC: m3 ,
FIELD: stb)
In addition to the main calculated properties listed in this section, the following properties
are available for components for the compositional models:
K-values K-values are calculated by tNavigator or can be set

via the keywords KVALUES (see 12.1.73), KVTABLE
(see 12.13.19).
Oil molar fraction (a value from 0 to Shows the current component molar fraction in oil
1) phase. Initial molar fraction can be set via the keyword
XMF (see 12.15.19) or XMFVP (see 12.13.15) (depends
on the pressure).
Gas molar fraction (a value from 0 to Shows the current component molar fraction in gas
1) phase. Initial molar fraction can be set via the keyword
YMF (see 12.15.20) or YMFVP (see 12.13.16) (depends
on the pressure).
In addition to the main calculated properties listed in this section, the following properties
are available for the thermal model:
Temperature (METRIC: ◦ C, FIELD: ◦ F)

Solids Saturation Dimensionless value
Enthalpy of water (METRIC: kJ/kg-mole, FIELD: BTU/lb-mole)
Enthalpy of oil (METRIC: kJ/kg-mole, FIELD: BTU/lb-mole)
Enthalpy of gas (METRIC: kJ/kg-mole, FIELD: BTU/lb-mole)
Enthalpy of solids (METRIC: kJ/kg-mole, FIELD: BTU/lb-mole)
Enthalpy of rock (METRIC: kJ/m3 , FIELD: BTU/ft3 )
Full energy (METRIC: kJ, FIELD: BTU)
Block’s heat conductivity (METRIC: kJ/m/◦C/day, FIELD: BTU/ft/◦ F/day)
4.2. Calculated 53
17.3
Heat Losses Heat losses from the block. If there are no heat losses
in the block, the value of the propery for the block is 0
(METRIC: kJ, FIELD: BTU)
If the model contains tracers (TRACER (see 12.7.1), WTRACER, see 12.18.154), or if
there are lumped pseudocomponents and their original components are monitored as tracers
(LUMPING, see 12.13.9), or if soluble salts and/or polymers are specified, then there is an
additional group ASP Flood and Tracers containing the following properties:
Tracer ’<name>’ concentration (for Dimensionless

each tracer)
See training courses 2.2 How To Interactive Tracer Injection and 2.5 How To Use
Salts.
4.2. Calculated 54
17.3
4.2.1. 2D maps for Saturation Ternary Diagram
Figure 16. Saturation ternary diagram
Saturation Ternary Diagram: block colour depends on oil saturation (Soil ), water satura-
tion (Swat ), or gas saturation (Sgas ) in this block.
2D maps Concentration, Density, Rms, Sum are visualized for oil saturation.
2D maps Maximum, Minimum are visualized the following way: blocks (from block
column) with minimum (maximum) oil saturation is taken.
k
Soil = min Soil
k=0,...,NZ
Water saturation (Swat ) and gas saturation (Sgas ) for this block are taken (the block with
minimum (maximum) oil saturation).
2D map Average (Avg) is calculated the following way:

NZ NZ
k ∗V k k ∗V k
∑ Soil collector ∑ Sgas collector
k=0 k=0
Soil = NZ
, Sgas = NZ
k k
∑ Vcollector ∑ Vcollector
k=0 k=0
NZ
k ∗V k
∑ Swat collector
k=0
Swat = NZ
k
∑ Vcollector
k=0
4.2.1. 2D maps for Saturation Ternary Diagram 55

17.3
where:
• The summation is over the layers in the vertical direction (from 0 to NZ );
• Vcollector
k = V k ∗ ntgk ;
• V k – block volume;
• ntg – is specified via the corresponding keyword NTG (see 12.2.25).
4.2.1. 2D maps for Saturation Ternary Diagram 56

17.3
4.2.2. Request for the distribution of blocks with convergence problems

The option CONVERGENCE_PROBLEM_NUM of the keyword TNAVCTRL (see 12.1.4) can
be used to request the distribution of blocks with convergence problems.
The distribution consists of integer values defined in each block. At each time step
the value in the block is increased by one if a convergence problem occurs, i.e. the residual
value becomes larger than the specified value (in percents) from the maximum residual value.
To request the distributions:
1. Prior to loading a model, add the following lines to the *.data file:
TNAVCTRL
CONVERGENCE_PROBLEM_NUM 90 /
/
2. After the model is reloaded (to read the changes in the *.data file), the distribution will
be visible as a tab in Grid Properties. Calculated. Run a calculation to generate this
distribution:
• Number of Convergence problems.
4.2.2. Request for the distribution of blocks with convergence problems 57

17.3
4.2.3. Request for distributions of total flows of water, oil and gas
tNavigator allows to build and use distributions of cumulative cross-flows of fluid phases
(water – FLOWW, in vertical direction – FLOWWZ, oil – FLOWO, in vertical direction –
FLOWOZ and gas – FLOWG, in vertical direction – FLOWGZ, FIPFLOW – flows between
FIP regions).
You can request these distributions via the keyword RPTMAPS (see 12.15.51).
These distributions can be used to split models (by minimum cross-flow area).
1. Prior to loading a model, add the following lines to the *.data file:
RPTMAPS
FLOWW FLOWWZ FLOWG FLOWGZ FLOWO FLOWOZ
/
2. After the model is reloaded (to read the changes in the *.data file), the distributions
will be visible as tabs in Grid Properties. Calculated. Run a calculation to generate
distributions of (figure 17):
• Total flux Water;

• Total flux Oil;
• Total flux Gas;
• Total flux Water XY;
• Total flux Oil XY;
• Total flux Gas XY.
3. In the options User Maps and User Cuts, the distributions can be accessed through
the names FLOWO, FLOWW, FLOWG, FLOWOZ, FLOWWZ, FLOWGZ,
FIPFLOW.
To create a cut for low oil drainage blocks (User Cut), type FLOWO > AVG(FLOWO)
in the Map Arithmetics command line and click Apply (figure 18).
4.2.3. Request for distributions of total flows of water, oil and gas 58
17.3
Figure 17. Calculated of cumulative oil cross-flows.
Figure 18. User Cut ”FLOWO > AVG(FLOWO)” is applied.
4.3. Fluid-in-place
See the detailed description in the section Oil and gas in-place of tNavigator User manual.
Calculation of fluid-in-place in specified area can be done by using filter Cut to specify
area – see the training tutorial1.1 How To Use tNavigator.
4.3. Fluid-in-place 59
17.3
4.4. Regions
Regions are shown in different colors.
Designation (tNavigator keyword) Map Description

PVT Regions (PVTNUM, see 12.4.2) PVT property regions. Regions have the following pa-
rameters assigned: reference pressure, formation volume
pressure, compressibility factor, viscosity.
Saturation function Regions (SAT- Filtration regions. For each region, relative permeabili-
NUM, see 12.4.3) ties to saturation ratios are assigned.
IMBNUM (see 12.4.7) (filtration re- It is used to specify hysteresis of relative permeabil-
gions at imbibition) ities – Hysteresis (option HYSTER in the keyword
SATOPTS, see 12.1.71). This keyword specifies which
saturation tables should be used for each block during
imbibition. For processes of drainage and equilibrium
the keyword SATNUM (see 12.4.3) is used.
Rock Properties Regions (ROCK- For each rock properties region, a table of rock trans-
NUM, see 12.4.14) missibility vs. pressure is assigned.
Equilibrium Regions (EQLNUM, For each equilibrium region, the model assigns param-
see 12.4.9) eters used for calculating initial conditions (the depth,
the pressure at the depth, oil-water contact level, capil-
lary pressure at the oil-water contact level, the gas-oil
contact level, and the capillary pressure at the gas-oil
contact level). All the blocks of an equilibrium region
belong to the same PVT region and the same Filtration
region.
SURFWNUM (see 12.4.5) (filtration It is used to modelling ASP flooding, adsorption and
regions for water-wettability case) influence on RP. In this case SATNUM sets RP regions
of oil-wettability case, and SURFWNUM – for water-
wettability case.
Active Blocks (ACTNUM, Shows all active blocks.
see 12.2.29)
4.4. Regions 60
17.3
FIPNUM (see 12.4.10) (Fluid-in- All the reporting data will be shown for these regions.
place Regions) It is possible to view the following properties for fluid-
in-place regions:
• The regions (properties showing the regions);
• Water, oil, gas, and fluid rates, (H), under reser-

voir conditions;
• Water, oil, and fluid production per month;
• Water and gas injection rates, (H), under reservoir

conditions;
• Water, oil, or gas flow through the region’s bound-

ary under standard and reservoir conditions;
• Aquifer water inflow.
Select a property in a pop-down menu at the bottom of

the sub-options window – figure 19.
FIPPATT (see 12.4.13) Parts of original property after splitting
Figure 19. Menu of properties for FIP regions.
4.4. Regions 61
17.3
4.5. User Cuts, User Maps

Cuts
Cut User Filters. You can create any number of User Filters:
Cut, Cut1, Cut2, Cut3...
See the detailed description in the section User Cuts.
Maps
Map User Maps. You can create any number of User Maps:
Map, Map1, Map2, Map3...
See the detailed description in the section User Maps.
4.5. User Cuts, User Maps 62

17.3
4.6. Vector Fields
Initial Stress Initial stress value in each block – figure 20. These
properties are available if the Geomechanics option is
activated (keywords GEOMECH (see 12.1.94), ROCK-
AXES (see 12.5.21), ROCKSTRE, see 12.5.22)
Property of Stress Matrix Diagonal The magnitude of the vector comprising the diagonal
Elements elements of each block’s stress tensor.
These properties are available if the Geomechanics op-
tion is activated (keywords GEOMECH (see 12.1.94),
ROCKAXES (see 12.5.21), ROCKSTRE, see 12.5.22).
This property evaluates mesh block deformation in
each block. These are matrix values, so the distribu-
tion shows a vector magnitude comprising diagonal el-
ements. The diagonal element sign is shows as a unit
vector whose components are normalized components
of a vector comprising diagonal elements. The vector
direction indicates axial compression (the correspond-
ing vector component is less than 0) or axial expansion
(the corresponding vector component is greater than 0).
To display vectors, check Show Vector Field in the
graphic interface. Vector size is controlled by a slider.
Figure 20. Initial Stress Map.
4.6. Vector Fields 63

17.3
4.7. Interblock Flows

All cross-flows are shown as lines of various colors connecting the centers of the blocks
that have cross-flows between them (neighboring or non-neighboring connections). Non-
neighboring connections are designated by keywords NNC (see 12.2.49) and EDITNNC
(see 12.2.50).
• Geometry Transmissibility (is calculated by tNavigator from the grid properties or

can be set via the keywords TRANX (see 12.2.52), TRANY (see 12.2.53), TRANZ,
see 12.2.54);
• Transmissibility (Transmissibility is calculated as a product of Geometry Transmissi-

bility and transmissibility multipliers);
• Water Flow;
• Oil Flow;
• Gas Flow.
4.7. Interblock Flows 64

17.3
5. Grid Properties. Right panel buttons

The main buttons to work with properties are placed on the right side of property’s visual-
ization
5.1. Views and Presentation Parameters

Views and presentation params. You can visualize properties in 2D and 3D at various
angles and flip the visualization over X and Y axes.
For the 2D visualization:
• Show Default View (hot key – Ctrl+0);
• Flip over X Axis (the view will be flipped over X axis);
• Flip over Y Axis (the view will be flipped over Y axis).
For the 3D visualization:
• Show Default View (hot key – Ctrl+0);
• Show Top Side (hot key – Z);
• Show Bottom Side (hot key – Shift+Z);
• Show from South (hot key – X);
• Show from North (hot key – Shift+X);
• Show from West (hot key – Y);
• Show from East (hot key – Shift+Y);
• Flip over X Axis;
• Flip over Y Axis;
• Auto-Rotate Map.
To see the model’s position relative to the axes X, Y, and Z and cardinal points, you can
check Axes 3D and Show Compass, respectively. The compass needle points north.
5. Grid Properties. Right panel buttons 65

17.3
5.2. 3D Slicing
3D Slicing.
This features shows slices of the model, combinations of layers and intersections. In the
Slicing dialogue you should select/check:
1. Layer numbers along the axes X, Y, and Z (figure 21).
Check layer numbers manually or press the buttons:
Check All, Uncheck All (at the bottom of the dialogue window) – this will
check/uncheck all layers along all the axes.
Check All, Uncheck All (under X, Y, or Z) – this will check/uncheck all the
layers along the relevant axis.
Each – this will check every, every second, every third and so on layer (depending on
you selection) along the relevant axis.
Range – this is described in this section below.
Figure 21. Slicing window.
5.2. 3D Slicing 66
17.3
2. X, Y, Z Operation – select the operation you want to perform to the checked layers:
• Union (show all the layers checked on X, Y, and Z panels);

• Intersection (show intersections of the layers checked on three panels).
3. Slider Operation:
• show;
• hide;
• invert.
If you select Show, moving the slider will red-highlight the layer selected by the slider.
If you select Hide, the layer will be hidden. If you select Invert, the blocks that were
visible will be hidden when the slider moves through them, and invisible blocks will
be shown (inverted operation).
Selecting a Range by Layer.
You don’t have to check layers manually, you can check a Range manually or using the
slider:
1. Click Uncheck All to uncheck all layers;
2. In X, Y, Z Operation check Union;
3. In Slider Operation, check Show;
4. Check Range;
5. Set the number of layers along X to be shown, manually or moving two sliders (along
the layer number) – figure 22. Setting a layer range to be shown;
6. The selected layers will be highlighted by red color and shown in the display panel.
5.2. 3D Slicing 67
17.3
Figure 22. Setting the range of layers to be visialized.
5.2. 3D Slicing 68
17.3
5.3. Create a Profile

Profile.
The button Profile allows to create a profile (or a vertical section) to visualise the vertical
distribution of parameter in a reservoir along the profile line or along a vertical section of
horizontal well.
The profile can be used to analyze graphs of parameters along profile (pressure, satura-
tions, porosity etc.) (see Profile Info).
The difference between Creating a Profile and Creating a Cross-Section.

A profile line automatically connects the center of blocks selected with a broken line,
passing consecutively through the centers of neighboring blocks. To build a straight-line
slice of the model (a depth section, a cross-section via selected points, a well section, a well
trajectory section), use the button Create a Cross-Section.
Creating a Profile – figure 23.

1. A profile can be created on 2D or 3D view for the selected parameter. Having created
the profile other parameters can be viewed along the profile’s section as well.
2. In the pop up menu, select a profile name, e.g. Profile 1. To add a new profile, select
Add Profile in the menu.
3. Left-click points on the property to create the profile; the centers of points will be
connected by a straight line. The selection of points can be canceled by click on Undo.
To delete the entire profile line, click Delete.
4. Then click Apply, OK. The profile created will be saved if you close and re-open the
model.
Selection of points for profile – figure 24.
To view a profile:
1. Go to 2D view.
2. Select Profile in the drop-down menu placed on the visualization settings tab.
3. Select the target profile, e.g. Profile 1.
Delete a Profile.
1. Click Create a Profile on the button panel on the right.
2. Select a profile name in the pop up menu. To delete the profile, select Delete.
3. If a profile was deleted the profiles follow the deleted profile are renumbered. For
example: You have Profile 1, Profile 2, and Profile 3. If you delete Profile 1 Profile 2
and Profile 3 will change the number to Profile 1 and Profile 2, respectively.
5.3. Create a Profile 69

17.3
Figure 23. Creating a Profile.
Figure 24. Profile of Saturation of Oil in 2D.
5.3. Create a Profile 70

17.3
5.4. Distance between two specified blocks

Distance between two specified blocks.
This option allows to measure the distance between two blocks specified by consecutive
mouse clicks or set by XYZ numbers in the pop up dialogue.
The measured distance will be shown in the Distance field.
Figure 25. Distance between blocks on the map.
5.4. Distance between two specified blocks 71

17.3
5.5. Create a Slice Filter

Slice Filter.
This options allows to automatically create a User Cut for vertical layers and choose
wells with perforations in the selected layers (create a Well Filter).
To create a Slice Filter:
1. Select layers (along X, Y and Z axes) to be shown, e.g., layers from 13 to 32 along X,
from 10 to 27 along Y and from 1 to 10 along Z (figure 26).
2. Click Apply to Cut.
3. In the pop up dialogue choose a filter (”Cut” by default) or create a new one. Press
Apply.
4. It is possible to show wells which have perforations in the selected layers. Tick Apply
to Well Filter, set a filter’s name. Press Apply.
5. Wells with perforations in these layers are shown only.
Figure 26. Slice Filter.
6. To check selection of the wells, you can open the Well Filter Dialogue - figure 27. You
can see that only wells with perforations in these layers are checked.
5.5. Create a Slice Filter 72

17.3
Figure 27. Well Filter created using a Slice Filter.
5.5. Create a Slice Filter 73

17.3
5.6. Create a Cross-Section

Create a Cross-Section.
This option allows to create vertical or horizontal cross-sections of the model. You can
also create a cross-section via selected points or wells or well trajectories. The created cross-
section can be viewed in 2D.
The difference between creating a Model Profile and creating a Model Cross-
Section.
Create a Profile and Create a Cross-Section buttons. A profile automatically
connects the centers of selected blocks by a broken line passing consecutively through the
centers of neighboring blocks. To build the straight-line slice of the model (a depth section,
a cross-section via the selected points, a well section, a well trajectory section), use the button
Create a Cross-Section.
Figure 28. Create a Cross-Section/Fence.
There are several cross-sections types:

• Vertical Cross-Section;
• Coordinate Plane;
• Points Selection;
• Well Fence;
• Multi Well Fence.
The detailed description of creation of cross-sections is shown below.
Creating a Vertical Cross-Section – figure 29.
1. In the Cross-Section dialogue window select Vertical Cross-Section. Select start point
and end point of the section by left-clicking on the model.
2. The appeared plane of the section can be moved by pulling the yellow balls. You can
rotate the plane by pulling the corner cubics.
5.6. Create a Cross-Section 74

17.3
3. In the dialogue, you can manually set the cross-section’s coordinates (in (METRIC: m,
FIELD: f t )).
4. Apply. OK.
Figure 29. Create Vertical Cross-Section 1.
Creating a Coordinate Plane Cross-Section – figure 30.

1. In the Cross-Section dialogue window select Coordinate Plane and Plane parallel to
which the cross-section will be created, e.g. Z plane.
2. Press the green plus button to Add new cross-section– Cross-Section 2.
3. The appeared plane of the section can be moved by pulling the yellow balls. You can
rotate the plane by pulling the corner cubics.
4. If the cross-section crosses the boundary between blocks parallel to the Z plane you
can select the blocks above or below the cross-section which faces will be located at
Cross-Section.
5. In the dialogue, you can manually set the cross-section’s depth (in (METRIC: m,
FIELD: f t )).
6. Apply. OK.
Viewing Cross-Sections in 2D.
1. Go to a 2D. In the drop-down menu placed on the visualization settings tab, select
Cross-Section.

17.3
Figure 30. Create Coordinate Plane Cross-Section 2.
2. Cross-Section 1 is the created vertical cross-section – figure 31. Cross-Section 2 is the

horizontal cross-section.
3. When viewing a vertical cross-section, it is recommended to uncheck Aspect Ratio

(vertical sizes of blocks are small and difficult to analyze).
Figure 31. Cross-Section 1 is a vertical section.
Creating a Well Fence via a selection of points.
1. In the Cross-Sections dialogue select Points Selection.

17.3
2. Cross-Section. Add Cross-Section (pressing on the green plus)– Cross-Section 3.
3. Click the property to select the points for the construction of cross-section – figure 32.
4. Press Undo to delete the last point.
5. The appeared fence can be moved by pulling the yellow balls.
6. You can change the position of fence points by pulling the cubic.
7. Apply. OK.
Figure 32. A points fence.
To view a cross-section:
8. Go to the 2D view. In the drop-down menu placed on the visualization settings tab
select Cross-Section–Cross-Section 3.
9. Check Fence Lines. If this option is unchecked the vertical lines, corresponding to the
fence points of cross-section, will be hidden.
Creating a Well Fence.
1. In the Cross-Section dialogue select Well Fence.
3. Select a well from the list. The selected well should be directional. Otherwise, if well is
vertical this type of cross-section will be degenerate and will not be shown; figure 33.

17.3
4. If the well’s trajectory has been loaded, you can check Trajectory and select the
trajectory branch along which the fence will be created.
5. The Tolerance slider define a number of points of well’s trajectory which will be used
to create a well fence. The tolerance determines how far from the created line (defined
the cross-section) skiped points of trajectory can be located.
Based on the slider position, the maximum distance (tolerance in the formula below),
which should not be exceeded, is calculated according to the following formula:
0.002 · (1.0 − slider_value) · length

tolerance = ,
n_points
where:
slider_value is the slider value from 0 to 1, length is the trajectory length, n_points
is the number of trajectory points.
6. Apply. OK.
Figure 33. A well fence.
8. Fence Lines is checked (figure 33). If this option is unchecked the vertical lines,
corresponding to the fence points of cross-section, will be hidden.

17.3
Creating a Multi-Well Fence.
1. In the Cross-Sections dialogue select Multi-Well Fence.
3. Select the wells based on which the fence will be created (you can select wells from
Well Filters or from Well Selection – figure 34) in the drop-down menu.
4. If well trajectories have been loaded, you can check Prefer Trajectories.
5. Close Fence creates a closed fence (the first point and the last point will be connected).
6. Alignment: Top, Middle, or Bottom (for horizontal wells the fence line depends on
the type of the alignment)
7. Apply. OK.
Figure 34. A Multi Well Fence.
9. Fence Lines is checked – figure 35. If this option is unchecked the vertical lines,
corresponding to the fence points of cross-section, will be hidden.
Created cross-section can be visualized on current 3D-map. For more details see descrip-
tion of 3D map suboptions and figure 56.

17.3
Figure 35. A multi-well fence in 2D.
5.7. Export
Grid properties can be saved to a file and can later be re-loaded or added to the model
via an include-file. The file will be saved to the model folder.
See the detailed description of all formats in the section Export of grid properties.
5.7. Export 80
17.3
5.8. Well, Groups and Network Filter. Stream Line Filter

Use Well Filter. The button with the well filter on.
The button Well Filter allows to:
1. Create well filter – section 5.8.1. If the filter is turned on, only the selected objects
will be shown in all visualization; in the Graphs option (including Unified History
Matching Results) only graphs and data for the selected objects will be accessible.
2. Create filter for groups – section 5.8.3. This filter allows to visualize only selected
groups and connections between them in 2D.
3. Create filter for surface network visualization – section 5.8.4. This filter allows to
visualize only selected nodes of surface network and branches between them in 2D.
4. Create a Streamline Filter – section 5.8.2. Using this filter allows to show all the wells
of the model and visualize only streamlines for the wells selected by the streamline
filter.
5.8.1. Well filter

The Well Filter dialog is shown in the figure 36. Using this dialog you can select wells one
by one (left side of the dialog– Single Well Selection) or select multiple wells (right side of
the dialog – Multiple Well Selection).
To select wells:
1. Deselect All there is no selected wells.
2. Single Well Selection. In the left side of the dialog, check the wells you need (or
select all wells by clicking on Select All). You can find a well in the list of wells using
the search line (start typing well’s name or number in the search line).
3. Multiple Well Selection. Left-click on a group:
• FIPs – selects wells in a certain fluid-in-place region.

• Current Historical and Calculated Well Types: Producers, Injectors, Stopped,
Shut, Not Present on This Time Step. Accumulated category means that the well
have several statuses (e.g., a producer converted to an injector), so if you select
Accumulated, the well will be selected as a producer and as an injector.
• Hist vs Calc. Low Rate Wells and Matched Wells (these wells will be selected
according to the settings used in the graphs Historical vs Calculated). Click Select
Only. The wells selected will be added to the filter. You can Add wells to the
filter or exclude wells from the filter by right-clicking on a group and press on
Select Only or Deselect, respectively.
5.8. Well, Groups and Network Filter. Stream Line Filter 81

17.3
Figure 36. Creating a well filter.
4. After you include all the wells of interest in the filter, click Close.
5. Well filters will remain active when you close and re-open the model.
Buttons to work with filter.
• Delete Filter.
• Create Filter.
• Duplicate Filter the current well filter (create a new filter that only includes the
wells selected in the current filter).
• Use As Streamline filter (the wells in the current filter will be included in
the Stream Line Filter (a stream line filter description follows below)). Use As Well
Selection Filter.
• Create Well List.

Currently selected wells will be saved as a well list (WLIST). Graphs for wells
included this list are available as well. When list is created, the keyword WLIST
(see 12.18.28) is writing to user-file in the USER folder.
Well list (WLIST) creating.
5.8.1. Well filter 82

17.3
1. Check wells which will be included to a new list. Press Create Well List.
2. Enter a list name. Press OK.
• Export. A list of wells in the filter will be saved to a text file. The file can be loaded
to the model as a filter.
• Import. A saved filter can be loaded from a file or from the clipboard.
5.8.2. Streamline Filter

This example is also presented in the training tutorial 2.1 How To Manage Waterflood.
Figure 37. Streamlines for wells included in the Streamline Filter.
Creating a Stream Line Filter:

1. In the Well Filter dialog, select Current Filter – Streamline Filter. Select the required
wells. For these wells streamlines will be visualized.
2. Select the Current Filter – Well Filter 1 (or a different filter that includes wells
required to be displayed). Well Filter 1 includes all wells. Click Close in the dialog.
3. Go to 3D view or 2D view of the model. Uncheck Show Mesh and check Stream
Lines. Streamlines will be shown only for the selected wells– figure 37. However, all
the wells of the model will be visible (according to Well Filter 1).
4. Go to 2D view. Right-click on the property near a well, and you will see a pop-up
menu to define the Stream Line Filter. Add This Well. Selecting Keep This Well
Only keeps only this well in the Stream Line Filter.
5.8.2. Streamline Filter 83

17.3
5.8.3. Group filter

The example of this functionality is shown in the training tutorial 1.11 How to use NET-
WORK.
For models with group hierarchy defined via GRUPTREE (see 12.18.87) its visualization
is available in 2D view.
This filter allows to visualize only selected groups and connections between them in 2D.
Switch to 2D view. Select Groups in the drop-down menu of Nodes located on the visual-
ization settings tab to see the filter’s action – picture 38.
Figure 38. Group filter.
For groups with subordinate groups the following options are available via right mouse
click on 2D visualizion:
• Remove from filter. The object will remove from filter and will not be visible.
5.8.4. Network filter

The example of this functionality is described in the training tutorial 1.11 How to use NET-
WORK.
For models with surface network defined via NETWORK (see 12.1.87) its visualization is
available in 2D view.
The detailed description of these objects is in the section NETWORK option. Automatic
chokes. Compressors of tNavigator user manual (document tNavUserManualEnglish).
5.8.3. Group filter 84

17.3
This filter allows to visualize only selected network nodes and branches between them in 2D
view. Select Network Nodes in the drop-down menu of Nodes located on the visualization
settings tab to see the filter’s action – picture 39.
Figure 39. Network filter.
Multiple Selection is also available for the surface network visualization:

• Compressor.
• Choke.
• Node.
For objects with subordinate objects the following options are available via right mouse
click on 2D visualization:
• Remove from filter. The object will not be visible on map.
• Add all children to filter. All child objects for selected one will be visualized in 2D
view.
• Remove from filter with children. Selected object and all its ”childs” will not be
visible in 2D view.
• Remove only children from filter. All objects which are child to selected will not be
visible in 2D view.
Also see the section Surface network visualization. Bubble maps can be visualized for
network nodes (e.g., node pressure, gas rate etc.).
5.8.4. Network filter 85

17.3
5.9. Create Screenshot

Create Screenshot.
This option allows to save an image (e.g., properties, graphs) to raster, vector formats or
print it. The Print dialog is shown in the figure 40.
Created image preview is on the right of tab Print. On the left the following parameters
can be selected:
• Page Layout:
– Best Fit;
– Stretch Viewport.
• Save to Raster File. Raster file will be saved to the model’s folder in .png or .jpg
formats.
– Width;
– Height.
• Save to Vector File. Vector File will be saved to to the model’s folder in .pdf format.
– Page size. The following sizes are available: A3, A4, Letter;
– Orientation: Landscape, Portrait.
• Print to Microsoft XPS Document Writer.
• Print to. To define print settings press the button Configuration.... The dialogue
allowing to define page settings will appear. Number of copies is set in Copies.
On the tab Caption you can set a caption for your image.
• Font;
• Position. Above or below.
5.9. Create Screenshot 86

17.3
Figure 40. Screenshot dialog.
5.9. Create Screenshot 87

17.3
5.10. Well Actions

Well Actions.
This option allows to define settings for well creation and to export trajectories of wells. It is
possible to define settings for Single Well, Single Injector, Single Producer, Well Pattern.
Pressing Alt+click to add Vertical Wells, Horizontal Wells, Well Pattern (Flooding Pattern).
See the training tutorialHow To Do Field Development Planning.
5.10. Well Actions 88

17.3
5.11. Find a Well or Connection

Find Well/Conn.
The dialog also has a feature allowing to find a well in a list. Just start typing the well’s
name or number. Wells with names coincide with the typed symbols will be highlighted with
arrows in the visualization and moved to the top of the list – figure 41.
Figure 41. Find a well in the list or in the visualization.
5.11. Find a Well or Connection 89

17.3
5.12. Statistics
Statistics.
A statistics window will open for the current property, with the following data:
• Entries – the total number of active blocks;
• Sum – the sum of property’s values for all the blocks;
• Mean, RMS, Min, Max – the property’s mean, RMS, minimum and maximum values.
Using statistics it is possible to estimate total resources in the reservoir, average perme-
ability and other parameters.
Data can be selected using a mouse and copied to a text editor (e.g., MS Excel).
Figure 42. Statistics.
Statistics for several blocks only. This option can be used to estimated resources, e.g.,
in the selected area. This example is described in the training tutorial 1.1 How To Use
tNavigator.
If the User Cut is on, statistics will be shown for cut-selected blocks only:
1. Create User Cut filter.
2. Go to some property, for example, Oil in Place (Mass).
3. Check Use Cut.
4. Only cut-selected blocks are shown.
5.12. Statistics 90
17.3
5. Click Statistics.
6. Statistics is calculated only for the filter-selected blocks.
5.12. Statistics 91
17.3
5.13. Well Selection

Start Well Selection.
This button is available only in 2D view. This option will allow you to click and select
wells that can be used as a Well Filter or for plotting graphs for the selected wells in the
Graphs.
Create a Well Selection. There are 3 methods to create selection. The method is set in
the dialog Wells which appears after Start Well Selection button is pressed:
1. Select Wells One by One. Select wells by clicking on them. Selected wells are
marked by circles. To deselect well click on its icon again.
2. Select Wells by Rectangle. The rectangle area is set. Wells which are inside this
area will be included in the selection. If it is necessary to select two or more well
areas, specify them while holding Shift button. If it is necessary to remove some wells
from a selection, get them in a rectangle while holding Ctrl button.
3. Freeform Well Selection. The freeform area is set. Well which are inside this area
will be included in the selection (figure 43). If it is necessary to select two or more
well areas, specify them while holding Shift button. If it is necessary to remove some
wells from selection, get them in an area while holding Ctrl button.
Figure 43. Freeform Well Selection.
By clicking button Start Well Selection again you can (figure 44):
5.13. Well Selection 92

17.3
• Finish Wells selection;

• Clear Wells selection (this will clear all the wells from the selection);
• Export to Well Filter (the wells will be added to the Well Filter);
• Import from Well Filter (all the wells currently included in the well filter will be
marked by circuses);
• Create well list. Currently selected wells will be saved as a well list (WLIST). Graphs
for wells of this list are available too. When list is created, the keyword WLIST
(see 12.18.28) is writing to user-file in USER folder;
• Keep Selected Only Injectors, Producers, Stopped or Shut wells;
• Remove from Selection Injectors, Producers, Stopped or Shut wells.
Figure 44. Well Selection.
Graphs for Selected Wells.

1. Click Start Well Selection.
2. Click Create Graph Window or press Ctrl+N to create a new Quick Graph
View.
3. Select the wells required. They will be marked by circles.
4. In the Graph Window, a graph of the sum of the selected wells will be shown (Wells
Group at the top of the window).
5.13. Well Selection 93

17.3
6. Grid Properties. General principles

View.
In the 3D view, the value of the selected parameter (formation top, porosity, pressure, oil
saturation, reserves, etc.) is indicated in color.
Figure 45. 2D. 3D. Histogram.
• Display options: 2D, 3D, Histogram – figure 45.
• You can rotate the image, by pressing and holding the left button of the mouse.
• You move the image within the window by pressing and holding the right button of
the mouse.
• You can zoom the image using the mouse wheel or pulling the sliders Zoom by Axes
on the visualization settings panel, XY Aspect Ratio and Z Scaling.
• Checking Aspect Ratio in 2D view will keep the actual aspect ratio and will not stretch
the image through the entire visualization window.
• To the right of the visualization there are buttons to work with visualization.
• A vertical palette to the left of the visualization shows the color legend of the values
of the shown parameter.

17.3
• Bringing the cursor to a block shows the block’s information below the visualization:
the block’s coordinates in the grid (in blocks), the block’s coordinates (in METRIC:
m, FIELD: ft), and the value and the name of the shown parameter in the block (see
figure 45).
• Checking Auto Sync synchronizes the zoom (or rotation) of image in two simulta-
neously opened windows of the model. To use this option, click Create New
Window on the horizontal tool panel. In the new window, you can view 2D or 3D
visualization, zoom it synchronized with the view in the previously opened window.
Right click on Visualization.
Right-clicking on a block pops up the following menu:
Figure 46. Right Click on Visualization Menu
• Selecting Block Statistics opens the Statistics for Block [Block Number] window.
The values of all parameters (initial and calculated) for this block are shown.
[The block number] in X, Y, Z axes is shown on the left. To go to statistics for another
block, you can select other block’s numbers in X, Y, Z on the left.
To save Block Statistics select the required column(s) or line(s) by clicking on them
and press Ctrl+Ñ (Copy). To select the whole table click on its top left corner. The
data can be pasted into an Excel worksheet using the combination Ctrl+V (Paste).
• Selecting Add Well opens the Add Well Dialog.
• Selecting Show Block Info is equivalent to double–clicking on the block without the
well. This moves you to the Graphs option, Block Info sub-option. The graphs of the
selected block’s parameters will be shown.
• Selecting SRP Oil-Water (SRP Gas-Oil) moves you to Fluid Properties, SRP Oil-
Water (SRP Gas-Oil) sub-option for this block (scaled relative permeabilities).

17.3
• Selecting Visualization Options moves you to the Visualization Options dialog.
• Selecting Default View returns the property to the default view (any user-defined zoom
and movement of the visualization will be canceled).

17.3
6.1. Palette
The palette sets the correspondence between the values of the current parameter and colors.
The palette is a vertical strip to the left of the visualization of parameter. You can move the
palette by its top (with the property’s title). Colors on the palette are separated by horizontal
lines (each line is the start of a color). Between the lines, colors are linearly interpolated. The
values corresponding to the horizontal lines are shown near each line of the palette. Color’s
lines can be moved pressing on the left button of the mouse. Right-clicking on the palette
will display the following menu – figure 47:
Figure 47. Palette.
• Copy Value. The value clicked is a number. You can paste that number into a text file
by pressing Ctrl+V.
• Add Color. Add a color to the current item.
• Change Color. Change the nearest color.
• Set Value. Set the user’s value to the selected color.
• Remove Color. Remove the nearest color.
6.1. Palette 97
17.3
• Clear Color List (clears all the colors and values, except the maximum and the
minimum; all colors become gray).
• Saved Palettes. Open a 5-colors default palette, a 7-colors default palette, k-colors
palette (palette with arbitrary colors number; k is set by user) or palettes saved by user.
To rename or delete a palette press the right mouse button and select corresponding
option (picture 48).
Figure 48. Palette management.
• Save. Saves the current palette.
• Copy. The current palette is copied and can be used in the different tNavigator window
(click Paste Palette).
• Paste. The palette will be pasted.

The palette includes 4 options for setting the maximum and/or the minimum: Set
Auto Step Maximum, Set Auto Maximum for All Calculated Steps, Set Fixed
Maximum and Set Fixed Minimum:
6.1. Palette 98
17.3
– Set Auto Step Maximum (the default setting for the property is to calculate the
maximum of a parameter for all steps – cumulative maximum, i.e. the maximum
increases constantly, and the palette’s borders expand. If this option is selected
the cumulative maximum, re-calculated at each time step, is shown in 2D or 3D
view. To go back to the cumulative maximum computation, right-click the palette
and select Auto Maximum for All Time Steps;
– Set Fixed Maximum (this opens the window for setting a new maximum; after
setting a fixed maximum you can change it by selecting Change Current Maxi-
mum; to come back to auto maximum computation, right-click on the palette and
select Set Auto Step Maximum).
– Set Auto Step Minimum (the default setting for the view is to calculate the
minimum of a parameter for all steps – cumulative minimum, i.e. the minimum
decrease constantly, and the palette’s borders vary. If this option is selected the
minimum, re-calculated at each time step, is shown in 2D or 3D view. To go back
to the cumulative minimum computation, right-click on the palette and select Set
Auto Minimum for All Time Steps).
– Set Fixed Minimum (this opens the window for setting a new minimum; after
setting a fixed minimum you can change it by selecting Change Current Mini-
mum; to come back to auto maximum computation, right-click on the palette and
select Set Auto Step Minimum).
• Set Discrete Palette (this will cancel linear interpolation between colors and will
show a contour line analogue; to come back to a continuous palette, right-click palette
and select Set Continuous Palette). In the discrete palette (see figure 49) property’s
colors corresponding to a property’s values vary from the minimum (indicated by the
horizontal line at the bottom of the palette’s color) to the maximum (indicated by the
horizontal line at the top of the palette’s color). In a continuous palette every value of
the parameter corresponds to a color shade of the palette.
6.1. Palette 99
17.3
Figure 49. Discrete Palette.
6.1. Palette 100

17.3
• Inverted Palette. Red color marks maximum parameter’s values, and blue color marks
minimum property values. In an inverted palette (select Inverted Palette), maximum
values will be inverted to blue color, and the minimum values will be inverted to red
color. Inverted Palette is the default setting for the initial grid properties Tops (Grid
Properties. Initial);
• Palette Mode
– Normal. Default palette.

– Logarithmic Palette (colors corresponding to the positive values are distributed
logarithmically, while the negative values correspond to 0). This is the default
setting for the PermX, PermY, PermZ distributions– Grid Properties.Initial).
– SymLog. Logarithmic change of palette’s colors is carried out for positive and
negative values separately.
– Integer. Palette values are integers. Property’s values in blocks are rounding using
math rules.
• Drag other marks proportionally. When you move any palette’s mark others will
move automatically. The direction of other marks coincide with the direction of the
selected mark. Shifts of other marks are proportional to the shift of the selected one:
the smallest shift corresponds to the mark located at the highest distance from the
selected one.
• Show Histogram. The distribution of property’s values will be shown on the palette.
6.1. Palette 101

17.3
6.2. Local Grid Refinements (LGR)

If there are local grid refinements in the model, the LGRs will be shown in 2D, 3D (keywords:
LGR (see 12.1.84), CARFIN (see 12.2.89), REFINE (see 12.2.90), ENDFIN (see 12.2.91), WEL-
SPECL (see 12.18.4), COMPDATL (see 12.18.7), NXFIN (see 12.2.92), NYFIN (see 12.2.92),
NZFIN (see 12.2.92), HXFIN (see 12.2.93), HYFIN (see 12.2.93), HZFIN, see 12.2.93).
Figure 50. Two LGR areas in 3D.
On the visualization settings panel, there is Hide LGR option. Checking it will hide the
LGR.
You can add wells to LGR areas in the same way you add wells to the areas without grid
refinement.
See the training tutorial 7.2 Local Grid Refinement LGR.
6.2. Local Grid Refinements (LGR) 102

17.3
6.3. Properties for dual porosity model

For models with dual porosity and dual permeability (keywords DUALPORO (see 12.1.79),
DUALPERM, see 12.1.80) all properties are visualized on two tabs Matrix and Fracture –
see the picture 51. Switch between these tabs to see the corresponding properties.
The detailed description of dual porosity and dual permeability models is given in the
section of tNavManualEnglish Dual porosity.
See also the training tutorial 7.3 Dual porosity.
Figure 51. Dual porosity model.
Note. Properties visualization with the keyword DPNUM (see 12.2.67).

If the keyword DPNUM (see 12.2.67) is defined in the model with a dual porosity and a
single permeability (define the regions which should be considered as regions with single
porosity). These blocks are visualized on the tab Fracture (and are not visualized on the
tab Matrix). Such visualization is the result of these blocks’ behaviour is corresponds to the
fracture’s blocks: the flow is possible between these blocks located in the single porosity
regions. Moreover, these blocks can be perforated.
6.3. Properties for dual porosity model 103

17.3
6.4. Properties in 3D
Wells’ Visualization – figure 52.
A producer is marked by a red upward-looking arrow. An injector is a blue downward-
looking arrow. A stopped well has a green color. The colors, heights, and thicknesses can be
changed in the settings.
Figure 52. Well presentations in 3D.
Scaling visualization in 3D.

Dragging the slider located below the XY Aspect Ratio scales the model along X and Y
axes. To come back to the default scale check XY Aspect Ratio (see figure 52).
Dragging the slider located below Z Scaling scales the model along the axis Z. To come
back to the default scale, click the button Set default Z scaling. To view the actual Z
scale, uncheck Z Scaling.
Go from 3D view to graphs of all parameters for the fixed model’s block.
In the option Initial, 3D view, double-clicking on a block moves you to the Graphs
option, Block Info tab, with graphs of the selected block’s parameters.
3D visualization settings. Check and select the following sub-options:
• Axes 3D. show / hide 3D axes (see figure 52).
• Show Compass. the Compass needle points to the north (see figure 52).
• Show Grid. if you uncheck it, only wells will be displayed, but not the mesh –
figure 53. This sub-option is convenient when you show Stream Lines.
• Framework only (show block boundaries only) – figure 54.
• Grid Lines. Show / hide grid lines.
6.4. Properties in 3D 104

17.3
Figure 53. Show Grid unchecked.
Figure 54. Framework only view.
• Show Palette (show / hide the palette). You can drag the palette over the window while
holding its top.
• Well Names. Show / hide well names.
• Well Status. Show / hide well status.
• Show All Wells. If this sub-option is checked wells drilled later will be shown using
gray color.
• Draw Trajectories. If well trajectories are loaded into the model they will be shown
as grey lines, and the wells will be shown to match with their trajectories. In figure 55
trajectories of wells are shown.

17.3
Figure 55. Trajectories of wells.
• Stream Lines. Show / hide stream lines.
• Use Cut. This will activate the Cut selected from a list, so only the blocks selected by
this Cut will be shown.
• Show Cross-section. Cut based on cross-section. Based on the selected cross-section

the plane is created. which The shown side of the model can be selected using the Cut
front side and Cut back side (with respect to the plane). Cross-section can be built in
this menu (button Settings).

17.3
Figure 56. Cross-section Cut.

17.3
6.5. Properties in 2D
Wells’ Visualization.
A producer will be shown as a black dot (e.g., wells P18, P17 in the figure 57). An
injector will be marked by a cross with arrows pointing away from its center (wells I5, I6
in the figure 57). A well stopped or shut will be marked by a cross (X) (well P17 in the
figure 57).
Figure 57. 2D view.
Go from 2D visualization to Well Rates Graphs in the Graphs Option.

Double-clicking a block with a well’s connection (perforated interval) will take you to
the option Graphs, tab Well Rates, – well rates graphs for this well.
Go from a 2D Map to the Summary Graphs for the Fixed Block.

In the option Grid Properties. Initial, 2D view, double-clicking on a block without a
well takes you to the option Graphs, tab Block Info. Graphs of calculated parameters for the
selected block are shown.
2D visualization settings.
• General Settings
– Aspect Ratio.
– Navigation Panel – figure 57. The navigation panel allows to track which local
area of the model is being shown. The panel pops up in the top right corner of

17.3
the 2D view. The outer square of the model is the entire visualization. The inner
square is the shown local area.
If you move the model’s visualization on the screen (by right-clicking and hold-
ing), the inner square will move accordingly. If you zoom it (using the mouse
wheel), the inner square will zoom respectively. By left-clicking and holding the
current image square, you can move it in the navigation panel. The corresponding
local area will be shown.
– Show Axes
– Scale Bars see figure 57;
Figure 58. Contour Lines settings.
• Grid Settings
– Color by Grid see figure 58;

– Color by Contour Lines see figure 58;
– Show Grid Lines (show / hide grid lines).
– Show Boundaries (show / hide boundaries of the model).
– Show Contour Lines (lines running through areas of equal values of the pa-
rameter are displayed. Contour line density, the number of captions per contour
line, and the decimal-digit precision can be modified in the contour line’s display
settings). Figure 58 shows Pressure contour lines.

17.3
– Show Palette (show / hide the palette). The palette can be moved around the
view by clicking and dragging the top part of the palette.
• Show Wells (show / hide wells). Figure 57 shows wells’ icons, wells’ names, and
wells’ statuses.
– Well Names (show / hide well names).

– Well Status (show / hide well status).
– Show All Wells (checking this sub-option will also display wells drilled during
periods after the current time step).
– Draw Trajectories (if well trajectories have been loaded into the model, the well
paths will be displayed even if the well has not been perforated but only has a
well trajectory loaded).
– Draw Trajectories Projections (if trajectories are loaded, then their projections
to plane will be showed).
• Bubble Maps for Wells.
• Show Network Nodes. See the detailed description in the section Network visualiza-
tion.
– Nodes. The Drop–down menu allows to switch between Groups and Network
Nodes;
– Show Connecting Lines. See the detailed description in the section Network
visualization.
– Show lines to wells. See the detailed description in the section Network visual-
ization.
– Show All Nodes.
– Node names. See the detailed description in the section Network visualization.
• Stream Lines (show / hide stream lines).
• Show Drainage network (show / hide drainage network).
• Use Cut (this will activate a Cut selected from a list. Only the blocks selected by the
Cut will be shown).
2D Visualization’s Types.
Drop-down menu figure 59: Layer, Sum, Min, Max, Avg, Rms, Concentration, Density,
Profile, Roof, Bottom, Cross-Section.
• Layer. The Layer shows the distribution of the selected parameter in the defined layer
for all active blocks. Layers in the XY plane can be shown if in the drop-down menu
IJ is selected (cross-sections along the Z axis), layers in the XZ plane can be shown

17.3
Figure 59. 2D Visualization’s Types.
Figure 60. Pressure distribution Layer in the XZ plane.
if in the drop-down menu IK is selected (cross-sections along the Y axis), and layers
in the YZ plane can be shown if in the drop-down menu JK is selected (cross-sections
along the X axis). You can set the layer number by dragging the slider (figure 60).
• Sum. The visualization Sum shows the sum of values of a parameter over all the
vertical layers in all the active blocks.
• Min. The visualization Min. shows the minimum value of a parameter among all the

17.3
• Max. The visualization Max. shows the maximum value of a parameter in all the
• Average. The visualization Avg shows the average value of a parameter in all the
• RMS. The visualization RMS shows the spread (variability) of a parameter in all the
• Concentration. The visualization Concentration can be used for calculating reserves

concentration. See detailed description and the formula for calculation of concentration
in the section Fluid-in-place density and concentration of tNav User Manual.
• Density. Can be used for calculation of reserves density. See detailed description
and the formula for calculation of density in the section Fluid-in-place density and
concentration of tNav User Manual.
• Profiles. A profile (or a vertical section) is used to view vertical distribution of a

property/parameter in the formation along the profile’s line. You should first create the
profile by clicking the button Create a Profile.
• Roof. The value of the selected parameter in the first active block in each vertical
column of blocks along the Z axis.
• Bottom. The value of the selected parameter in the last active block in each vertical
column of blocks along the Z axis.
• Cross-Section. A cross-section (vertical or horizontal section of the model) is used to

view the distribution of parameter in the formation along the cross-section line. You
should first create the cross-section by clicking the button Create a Cross-Section.

17.3
6.6. Working with user polygons (contours)

• User polygons can be drawn in GUI using Profile or Cross-Section;
• User polygons can be imported from file;
• The area inside a polygon can be visualized using User Maps and User Cuts;
• Parameters can be visualized and/or calculated inside a polygon’s area.
6.6.1. Import user polygons

You can import any created polygon’s for 2D visualization. To do that follow the steps:
1. Go to 2D view, select Sum, for example.
2. Right-click and select Loaded Contours from the pop-up menu.
3. In the appeared User Contours dialog select Load New Contour from File.
4. Select the file in the format shown in the figure 62. The file contains XYZ coordinates
of blocks (no headers are required). Each blocks will be connected by a line.
5. Select the contour’s line color, thickness, and type in the dialog.
Figure 61. Loading polygons into the model.
6.6. Working with user polygons (contours) 113

17.3
Figure 62. A user’s polygon file.
A user’s polygon file may contain only X,Y columns data, data in Z column can be set
0.
Two loaded contours are shown in figure 63. A profile can be created by loaded contour.
To create a profile press Create Profile from Contour in User Contours dialog, then enter
a profile’s name. Go to Maps. Profile to see the created profile.
6.6.1. Import user polygons 114

17.3
Figure 63. Loaded polygons.
6.6.2. How to work with region created by polygon

Having created a polygon manually in GUI using a Profile or a Cross-Section or having
imported a polygon from a user file the obtained area can be visualized.
To do that following the steps:
1. Go to User Maps. Map.
2. Right click on Map, then select Edit.
3. In the pop-up menu Property Editing select Profile.
4. Ensue you checked the box Apply for Profile Inside, type any integer number in the
Expression (see figure 209), then press Apply.
5. The area inside polygon changes a color.
6. Go to User Filter. Cut. In Arithmetic Command Line type Map and pressApply to
Cut. The created Map was applied to Cut.
7. To visualize and/or calculate a property in the polygon’s area check the box Use Cut
on visualization settings tab and select Cut. See the detailed description in the training
tutorial 1.1 How To Use tNavigator.
6.6.2. How to work with region created by polygon 115

17.3
6.7. Bubble maps

Bubble maps can be viewed before and/or during a computation. When a model has been
loaded but before a computation, you can view bubble maps for historical production or
bubble maps generated during a previous computation.
To activate the option, check Show Bubble Maps. Bubble maps can be viewed in 2D of
any type of visualization. To view bubble maps for a certain moment of time, set the time
slider at the required time step .
In the drop-down menu, the following types of Bubble Maps are available: Correla-
tion Coefficients, Mismatch Map and Custom. The following types of Bubble Maps for
Networks/Groups are available: Mismatch Map and Custom.
Figure 64. Types of bubble maps.
6.7. Bubble maps 116

17.3
One can create templates for bubble maps. They are similar to graph templates – a set
of bubble maps with specified settings, which can be saved and imported to other models
to build there the same bubble maps. So, defaulted bubble maps Rates and Totals are State
Bubble Map and Accumulated Bubble Map, respectively.
One can create any number of templates. The template list is visualized at the left panel
of bubble maps configuration dialog. In the context menu of template’s name list of available
actions is contained: Rename, Remove, Export, Import of template.
Each well/network node/group will have a bubble (circle) around it, the size of the
bubble corresponding to the magnitude of the selected parameters (relative to other wells).
The maximum bubble size is fixed and can be changed by moving the Size slider in the
bubble map’s menu.
6.7. Bubble maps 117

17.3
6.7.1. Visualization settings

• Show Bubble Maps. Bubble maps will be shown in 2D.
• Show Values. Show values of selected bubble maps or not.
• Show Units. Show units of selected bubble maps or not.
• The number of Decimal Places. The number of decimal places after a comma.
Parameter value is rounded by math rules at decreasing.
• Font. Set font of bubbles captures.
• Size. Moving the slider allows to vary the diagram’s size. The diagram size (diameter)
is proportional to the parameter value. A diagram with the highest possible diameter
corresponds to maximal parameter value at this step.
• Set Fixed Maximum. If a diagram parameter value exceeds this value, then diagram
size becomes constant and does not increase (see the description of the Size parameter
above).
• Color. There is colored rectangle near each bubble map’s parameter. Corresponding
part of the bubble is painted with this color. The color can be changed by clicking on
rectangle.
• Visualize signs for mismatch. If the check-box is checked then color of caption
will depend on difference between calculated and historical values – color is red if
difference is negative, otherwise, color is blue.
6.7.1. Visualization settings 118

17.3
6.7.2. Bubble Map State

Set of bubble maps showing the state of development of field at each time step is in
Production Rate template by default. Under every bubble you will see the current oil rate
(orange), the current water rate (blue), and the current water injection rate (dark blue) for the
current time step (figure 65).
Figure 65. Bubble maps. The State Bubble Map.
6.7.2. Bubble Map State 119

17.3
6.7.3. Accumulated Bubble Map

Set of bubble maps showing the accumulated bubble map at each time step is in Production
Totals template by default. For each bubble, you will see the cumulative production of oil
(yellow) and of water (green), and the cumulative water injection (pink) for the calculation
period (figure 66).
Figure 66. Bubble maps. The Accumulated Bubble Map.
6.7.3. Accumulated Bubble Map 120

17.3
6.7.4. Correlation Coefficients

Select two parameters (First Function and Second Function) for which correlation coefficients
will be calculated. On figure 67 the First Function is Well Logs, RP (Loaded Well Log), the
Second Function is Totals, Oil total.
Figure 67. Correlation coefficients.
The center of a bubble is the well name. Next to the well name is the correlation
coefficient. The larger the radius (of the white bubble), the better the correlation.
6.7.4. Correlation Coefficients 121

17.3
6.7.5. Mismatch Map

To display a map of mismatches, select as follows (figure 68): type – Mismatch Map, Oil To-
tal (or another parameter). Relative mismatches can be shown via checking the corresponding
box.
Figure 68. Mismatches bubble maps.
Red color of the circle means that the historical value of parameter is greater than the
calculated one. Blue color means that the historical value is less than the calculated one.
6.7.5. Mismatch Map 122

17.3
6.7.6. Custom
You can set bubble map colors in tNavigator’s Visualization Settings. Bubble maps are
displayed as double bubbles: Bubble Map 1 and Bubble Map 2. It is more convenient to
use only one bubble and select None and None for the other bubble.
From the pop-down menu, you can select one of the following maps:
• Historical (historical values of the parameter);
• Calculated (calculated values of the parameter);
• Historical+Calculated (historical values of the first selected parameter, and calculated

values of the second selected parameter);
• Mismatch (historical values minus the calculated values of the parameter). Checking
Show Mismatch Sign helps you to see whether the calculated value is larger or smaller
than the historical value;
• Relative Mismatch (the difference between the historical value and the calculated
value normalized to the historical value).
Figure 69 shows the calculated bubble maps for total production of water (yellow) and
oil (green). The captions near the bubble are the values of the relevant parameters.
Figure 69. Bubble maps. Custom map.
You can generate bubble maps for:

• Water rate;
6.7.6. Custom 123

17.3
• Oil rate;
• Liquid rate;
• Gas rate;
• Water injected rate;
• Liquid injected rate;
• Gas injected rate;
• Water total;
• Oil total;
• Liquid total;
• Gas total;
• Water injected total;
• Liquid injected total;
• Gas injected total;
• Bottom hole pressure;
• Tubing-head pressure;
• Pressure on equivalent radius.
To display Historical+Calculated values, select the parameters as follows (figure 70):

Bubble map 1: Water rate (or other parameter whose calculated and historical values
you need displayed), water rate (select the same parameter as the previous one), type:
Historical+Calculated. This will help you compare the historical and calculated values of
the same parameter. Bubble map 2: None, None.
6.7.6. Custom 124

17.3
Figure 70. Historical+Calculated bubble maps.
A double-bubbles diagram. In the figure 71: Bubble Map 1: a historical correlation of

total production of oil and water (red and blue). Bubble Map 2: a calculated correlation of
cumulative production of oil and water (violet and turquoise).
Figure 71. Bubble maps. Two circles.
6.7.6. Custom 125

17.3
6.8. Network visualization

The example of this functionality is described in the training tutorial 1.11 How to use NET-
WORK.
Visualization properties for surface network in 2D:
• Show Network Nodes. If network is set in the model (the keyword NETWORK,
see 12.1.87), then its nodes will be visualized (figure 72). For better visualization it is
possible to move network nodes around the map holding left mouse button (settings
are saved if the model is reloaded). It is allowed to visualize groups or network nodes.
• Show connecting lines. Show / hide connecting lines between parent and child objects.
• Show lines to wells. Show / hide connecting lines between parent objects to wells.
• Node names. Show / hide node names.
Figure 72. Network nodes.
Objects having child objects have options for quick group and network filters tuning:
• Remove from filter. The object will not be visible in 2D.
6.8. Network visualization 126

17.3
Only the selected network nodes and branches can be visualized (see section Surface
network filter). The menu is available via right mouse click on network node.
Bubble maps can be visualized for network nodes Bubble maps (for example: node pressure,
gas rate and other).
6.8. Network visualization 127

17.3
6.9. Histogram
A histogram shows the values of the selected formation property as a single-color diagram
(a histogram is accessible when viewing any property from Grid Properties). Height of a
histogram column reflects the number of blocks with values of the parameter in this range.
Figure 73. Vertical Histogram of type Values.
Figure 74. Export a Histogram.
Histogram Parameters.
6.9. Histogram 128

17.3
The Bins box sets the number of bins into which the parameter’s value range along the
X axis is divided. The more bins, the more detailed the histogram. You can activate (check)
a logarithmic X-axis and a logarithmic Y-axis.
Histogram view options:
• Orientation: Vertical or Horizontal;
• Show: Values (the height of the bar will reflect the number of blocks with the parame-
ter’s values in this range) or Percents (the height of the bar will reflect the percentages
of blocks with the parameter’s values in this range).
• Cumulative (in this case each column k of cumulative histogram is a sum of all
columns from 1 to k − 1 of normal histogram).
Export of Histogram.
If you click Export on the right panel, the histogram will be exported into a text file. One
data line in the file contains the data: the number of the bin (the value range), the parameter’s
minimum and maximum in this range, and the number of blocks with the parameter values
within this range. An example is shown on figure 74.
6.9. Histogram 129

17.3
6.10. Export of grid properties

Use right mouse click on any grid property to export it in 3D or 2D standard formats.
Figure 75. Save Property dialog.
Common parameters of properties export:
• Inactive Block Placeholder – a number which specifies that property value in respec-
tive block is absent;
• Separate Layers by Comment – each layer in the file will be headed by its number.
1. Save 3D.
File type: Array of the property values (tNavigator format).
File format – .map.
Data description: values of parameter are written to the file for all grid blocks. The
coordinates of blocks ascending by X, Y, Z.
6.10. Export of grid properties 130

17.3
Example of this file format
--Map: Depth
--Time step: 0
Depth
-- Layer 1 --
+2.748260e+003 +2.742420e+003 +2.742420e+003 +2.737400e+003
+2.737400e+003 +2.733930e+003 +2.733930e+003 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
2. Save 3D to ACTNUM
File type: the array of active (corresponding 1 value) and inactive blocks (correspond-
ing 0 value) is saved.
File format – .inc.
Data description: values 1 and 0 are written to the file for all grid blocks. The coordi-
nates of blocks ascending by X, Y, Z. Syntax corresponds to the keyword ACTNUM.
-- Map: Map
-- Time step: 0
ACTNUM
-- Layer 1 --
+0 +0 +0 +0 +0 +0
+0 +0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 +0 +1
+1 +1 +1 0 0 0
+1 +1 +1 +1 +1
+1 +1 +1 +1 +1 +1
3. Save 3D to .grd
File type: Binary file.
The following parameters have to be set:
• Property. Indicates the property which will be exported;

17.3
• File Name. Full path to the folder in which the property will be exported;
• Keyword. Specify the keyword corresponding to the exported property;
• Title. Title of the property which will appear in the header of the file.
4. Save 3D to AQUANCON (#1)

File type: array of aquifer connection is saved. Syntax corresponds to the keyword
AQUANCON.
Data description: According to AQUANCON syntax coordinates of start and end of
cube connected to aquifer are written to the file. Block faces connected with aquifer
are chosen the following way: all blocks that bordering with the inner blocks. The
following faces are possible: I+ face in direction parallel to X axis, I- face in direction
opposite to X axis direction, J+ face in direction parallel to Y axis, J- face in direction
opposite to Y axis direction, K+ face in direction parallel to Z axis, K- face in direction
opposite to Z axis direction (axis Z is directed down). This option can be used to export
blocks to connect aquifer to the blocks insede the reservoir. But after this export one
need to set 11 parameter of AQUANCON (see 12.16.11) equal to YES (for default it
is NO). To do this one can add in the exported AQUANCON keyword to each line 2*
YES /.
-- Map: Cut
-- Time step: 0
AQUANCON
1 1 1 65 65 1 1 J- /
1 2 2 65 65 1 1 J- /
1 3 3 65 65 1 1 J- /
1 4 4 65 65 1 1 J- /
1 5 5 65 65 1 1 J- /

AQUANCON.
Data description: Data description: According to AQUANCON syntax coordinates of
start and end of cube connected to aquifer are written to the file. Block faces connected
with aquifer are chosen the following way: all boundary blocks. The following faces
are possible: I+ face in direction parallel to X axis, I- face in direction opposite to X
axis direction, J+ face in direction parallel to Y axis, J- face in direction opposite to Y

17.3
axis direction, K+ face in direction parallel to Z axis, K- face in direction opposite to

Z axis direction (axis Z is directed down).
-- Map: Cut
-- Time step: 0
AQUANCON
1 1 1 65 65 1 1 I- /
1 1 1 65 65 1 1 J+ /
1 1 1 65 65 1 1 K+ /
1 1 1 65 65 1 1 K- /
1 2 2 65 65 1 1 J+ /
1 2 2 65 65 1 1 K+ /
1 2 2 65 65 1 1 K- /
1 3 3 65 65 1 1 J+ /
1 3 3 65 65 1 1 K+ /
1 3 3 65 65 1 1 K- /
1 4 4 65 65 1 1 J+ /
1 4 4 65 65 1 1 K+ /
1 4 4 65 65 1 1 K- /
1 5 5 65 65 1 1 J+ /
1 5 5 65 65 1 1 K+ /
1 5 5 65 65 1 1 K- /

AQUANCON.
Data description: Data description: According to AQUANCON syntax coordinates of
start and end of cube connected to aquifer are written to the file. Block faces connected
with aquifer are chosen the following way: all boundary blocks in user-specified direc-
tion. The following faces are possible: I+ face in direction parallel to X axis, I- face
in direction opposite to X axis direction, J+ face in direction parallel to Y axis, J- face
in direction opposite to Y axis direction, K+ face in direction parallel to Z axis, K-
face in direction opposite to Z axis direction (axis Z is directed down). One also can
specify whether connections from faces, connected with active blocks, are allowed.

17.3
-- Map: Cut
-- Time step: 0
AQUANCON
1 1 1 65 65 1 1 J+ * * NO /
1 2 2 65 65 1 1 J+ * * NO /
1 3 3 65 65 1 1 J+ * * NO /
1 4 4 65 65 1 1 J+ * * NO /
1 5 5 65 65 1 1 J+ * * NO /
7. Save 3D to Wellpics
Based on Current Cut. Export data for blocks which satisfy a user cut condition.
Apply Well Filter. Export data for wells satisfying well filter.
Object:
• Connections. Export data for blocks with connections.

• Trajectory. Export data for blocks through which wells’ trajectories go.
Export Value:
• Values Along Well. All property values along well are exported. If the field Ap-
ply function (below in the dialog) is active then the value of respective function
of these numbers is calculated and exported.
• First Intersection Point Value. Block value of the first connection is exported.
If the field Get Value from Map (below in the dialog) is active, then value of
respective 2D map is exported.
File type: IJK data.

File format – no format is specified.
Data description: Text file with the following data: well name, IJK coordinates of block
with connection, value of parameter in this block.

17.3
’102’ 1 4 1 0.175400
’102’ 1 4 2 0.175400
’102’ 1 4 3 0.175400
’103’ 7 4 1 0.176300
’103’ 7 4 2 0.176300
’103’ 7 4 3 0.176300
File type: Block center data.

File format – no format is specified.
Data description: Text file with the following data: well name, XYZ (meters) of center
of block with connection, value of parameter in this block.
’102’ 0.000000 300.000000 2735.030000 0.175400

’102’ 0.000000 300.000000 2740.030000 0.175400
’102’ 0.000000 300.000000 2745.030000 0.175400
’103’ 600.000000 300.000000 2719.000000 0.176300
’103’ 600.000000 300.000000 2724.000000 0.176300
’103’ 600.000000 300.000000 2729.000000 0.176300
8. Save 2D to .grd (Surfer)

Data description: Text file for the program Surfer.

17.3
DSAA
40 65
-50 3950
-50 6450
30.2647 564.92
+57.4933 +58.4596 +59.4258 +60.392 +61.3583 +62.4282
+65.0649 +69.8945 +75.5536 +81.2801 +87.2017 +94.5382
+110.626 +124.216 +126.598 +123.544 +120.511 +117.151
+108.631 +98.4625 +87.8773 +79.3242 +73.3193 +67.9514
9. Save 2D to .xyz
File type: XY data. Save 2D map in .xyz format.
File format – .xyz.
Data description: X coordinate of the block (meters), Y coordinate of the block (me-
ters), value of the parameter in this block.
0.000000e+000 0.000000e+000 5.749330e+001

1.000000e+002 0.000000e+000 5.845960e+001
2.000000e+002 0.000000e+000 5.942580e+001
3.000000e+002 0.000000e+000 6.039200e+001
4.000000e+002 0.000000e+000 6.135830e+001
5.000000e+002 0.000000e+000 6.242820e+001
6.000000e+002 0.000000e+000 6.506490e+001
File type: IJ data. Save 2D map in .xyz format.

File format – .xyz.
Data description: block numbers along X, Y axes, value of the parameter in this block.

17.3
1 1 5.749330e+001
2 1 5.845960e+001
3 1 5.942580e+001
4 1 6.039200e+001
5 1 6.135830e+001
6 1 6.242820e+001
7 1 6.506490e+001
8 1 6.989450e+001
10. Save 2D to .cps (CPS-3 ASCII)

File format – .cps.
Data description: To save 2D map in this format one can specify number of values
along the axes X and Y, ascending or descending order of blocks on the axes. The
resulting data array can be transposed (reflected relatively the main diagonal).
FSASCI 0 1 COMPUTED 0 1.000000e+030

FSATTR 0 0
FSLIMI -33.3333 3933.3333 -33.3333 6433.3333 30.2647 564.9200
FSNROW 195 120
FSXINC 33.333333 33.333333
-> generated by tNavigator
259.6710000 259.6710000 259.6710000 267.4820000 267.4820000
267.4820000 271.0630000 271.0630000 271.0630000 271.8970000
271.8970000 271.8970000 271.9130000 271.9130000 271.9130000
271.7910000 271.7910000 271.7910000 271.6340000 271.6340000

17.3
7. Graphs. General principles

tNavigator provides a convenient tool to work with graphs – Graph Templates. It allows to
create graph templates and then use created graph templates.
A general view of the tNavigator’s graphs window is shown in the figure 76. On the left
side of the window, there is a list of tabs of the graphs (see below). On the right, there is a
panel of buttons to operate with the graphs. In addition to the graph the values of parameters
are also shown as a table.
Figure 76. tNavigator window with graphs: a general view.
Point the mouse at the curve’s point to see the value in this point below the graph.
At the top of the window, select the subject items for which graphs are to be created: wells,
groups, connections (perforated intervals), nodes of surface network; at the bottom, select the
parameters: rates, injection rates, water-cut, etc. The parameters required should be checked.
Graph tabs:
• Rates;
• Totals;
• Fluid-in-place;
• Analytics;
• Pressure;
• Flow between FIPs;

17.3
• Run Statistics;
• Crossplots;
• Well Profile;
• Well Section;
• User Arithmetics;
• Block Info;
• Profile Info;
• Pressure/Temperature Slices;
• Hist vs Calc (Calculated and Historical);
• Unified History Matching Results;
• Comparison of Results;
• Well RFT Mismatch Table;
• User Selection;
• Aquifer;
• Tracers.

17.3
7.1. Graphs Right Panel Buttons

This section describes main buttons to work with the most type of graphs. Some tabs of
graphs have different right-panel buttons: Cross-Plots; Well Profile; Well Section, Unified
History Matching Results; Comparison of Results. Additional right-panel buttons for such
graphs are described in the sections concerning these graphs.
• Views and Presentation Params.

Restores the default view of a graph. Hot buttons: Ctrl+0 or simultaneous left and
right mouse click.
• Export.
Exports all the data shown in the current tab to a text file (.txt) – figure 77. To export
data to a file, type the file name and the file path. To export data to an Excel file, type
.xls at the file’s name end.
Figure 77. Graph Data Export.
7.1. Graphs Right Panel Buttons 140

17.3
• Export All.
Exports all computation data to a (.txt) file. By default all the data for all the data
items in all the graph tabs will be exported.
To export data, type the file name, the file path, and the following parameters: the time
step range and the data items (wells, groups, an entire formation) for which data are
to be exported, the data category to be exported (historical, calculated, cumulative, a
group of rates, and other production characteristics). By default all the data for all the
data items in all the graph tabs will be exported. To export to Excel, type .xls at the
end of file’s name.
• Create a Screenshot.
See the detailed description in the section Create Screenshot.
• Use Well Filter.

See the detailed description in the section Well Filter. Stream Line Filter.
• Graphs preferences.
Figure 78. Graphs preferences.
Date format: the date or the number of days since the first step of the computation.
Show Data Since / Till: specifies the start / end step of the period for which data and
graphs are to be shown.
Show graphs up to last step.
Show previously calculated values (graphs and tables).
Show Legend (for lines in the graph – figure 79).
Show Well Status. When you select a well as a data item, a bar with the well’s statuses
changing over time will be displayed at the bottom of the graph’s window. If there are

17.3
Figure 79. Graph Legend.
historical production data, the bar will be a double one. The top bar will describe the
status of the well at the time of the current computation. The bottom bar will describe
the historical statuses of the well. Each status will have a dedicated color. A detailed
status color legend is here.
When you put your cursor on a color, a status hint will pop up (figure 80).
Figure 80. Well status bar. Status hint.
Show Well Events. Small squares above the well status bar will mark well events.

17.3
Putting the cursor on a square will show the pop-up hint describing the events that
occurred in the well at the time.
The screen also displays changes in permeability, effective Kh, effective radius, and
skin factor, and indicates whether the connections were open or closed.
Hide Unavailable time steps. Do not show the time steps which results for graphs are
not recorded. Setting steps for which results are recorded or not recorded.
X-axis points performs the detailisation of X axis (for all dates, months or years). For
rates graphs the following parameters can be selected:
– month:
∗ Average – average daily rate over a month. For example, (Total (1 Feb
2015)) - Total (1 Jan 2015))/31;
∗ Total – total production over a month. For example, Total (1 Feb 2015) -
Total (1 Jan 2015);
∗ Last – last value in this month. For example, Rate(1 Feb 2015).
– year:
∗ Average – average daily rate over a year. For example, (Total(1 Jan 2016) -
Total(1 Jan 2015))/365;
∗ Total – total production over a year. For example, Total(1 Jan 2016) -
Total(1 Jan 2015);
∗ Last – last value in this year. For example, Rate(1 Jan 2015).
Numerical parameters (average, total, last) for totals graphs are coincide. For these
graphs the same time parameters can be selected:
– month:
∗ last – last value in this month. For example, Total(1 Feb 2015);
– year:
∗ last – last value in this year. For example, Total(1 Jan 2015).
• Graph Tab Options. Performs settings of color, view, and trend line for Cross-
Plots. Sets X axis detail (years or months).
• Load Well Graphs.

This button is only available for the tab Pressure.
This loads well bottom hole pressure measurement or group pressure measure-
ment. These examples are presented in the training tutorial 1.3 How To Import
Export Data Reports.
Select the pressure reading file in the format as described here below: Item name
(well number, group name), date of pressure measurement, pressure measurement (bar).
Pressure measurement dates should match the report steps.

17.3
Example of the measurement of well bottom hole pressure:

*Object Date Bottom Hole Pressure
9 29.04.2009 +2.48168777e+002
9 30.04.2009 +2.48113651e+002
9 01.05.2009 +2.48057152e+002
9 05.05.2009 +1.99594067e+002
9 06.05.2009 +1.97851325e+002
9 07.05.2009 +1.96604516e+002
9 08.05.2009 +1.95625151e+002
9 09.05.2009 +1.94810988e+002
9 13.05.2009 +1.92416138e+002
9 14.05.2009 +1.91943196e+002
9 15.05.2009 +1.91502193e+002
Example of the measurement of the field pressure:

FIELD 29.04.2009 245.19
FIELD 13.05.2009 250.5
FIELD 18.05.2009 250.48
FIELD 23.05.2009 245.98
FIELD 26.05.2009 240.39
FIELD 03.06.2009 235.93
FIELD 28.06.2009 230.93
Pressure readings should be loaded ONLY ONCE, because the readings are copied to
the RESULTS folder of the Draft Model.

17.3
7.2. Select Object and Parameter

At the top of the window, there are object items for you to select (see figure 81):
• Well;
• Well connection (perforated interval). To select a well connection (perforated interval),

click a well and a list of all its connections (perforated intervals) will pop up;
• Group of wells;
• FIELD;
• FIP region (FIPNUM and other specified FIP regions);
• Networks (if network is set (see the keyword NETWORK, see 12.1.87), then its structure
and graphs will be showed);
• Well Segment (if multisegment wells are set – see the detailed description in the section
Multisegment well in tNavigator’s User Manual (document tNavUserManualEnglish));
• Well Filter (wells which are selected by well filter).
Select a parameter (rate, water-cut, gas-oil ratio, etc.) by checking it.

Clear button under the list of parameters will uncheck all the parameters.
Note.
Historical values of oil rates, water rates, etc. for well connection (perforated interval) are
calculated via the following formula:
C f (connx ) · F(well)
F(connx ) = ,
∑ C f (conni )
i
where:
F(connx ) is a historical value for the well connection connx .
C f (connx ) is the connection factor for the well connection connx .
F(well) is the historical value of a parameter (oil rate, water rate, etc.) for a well.
Computation of historical values of oil rates, water rates, etc. for well connections (perfo-
rated intervals) commences with the time step in which the historical value of the parameter
in question is other than zero.
7.2. Select Object and Parameter 145

17.3
Figure 81. Graphs: object selection.
7.2. Select Object and Parameter 146

17.3
7.2.1. Search well in a list

Button Search well in a list allows you to find a well by typing symbols from the well’s
name (not necessarily from the beginning). Wells with the typed symbols will be highlighted
in blue and moved to the top of the list. When only one well remains that matches the
symbols entered, graphs for that well only will be displayed.
Figure 82. Well search.
In the figure 82, the search for symbols ”P10” found the well P10 and moved the well to
the top of the list.
7.2.1. Search well in a list 147

17.3
7.2.2. Sort wells in a list

By default wells in a list are sorted by name. It is possible to change a sorting order: press
right mouse button on a well and select Sort by... (figure 83). Select necessary parameter
(figure 84). Check sorting order: Ascending or Descending.
Figure 83. Sort wells in a list.
Figure 84. Sort settings.
7.2.2. Sort wells in a list 148

17.3
7.3. Well Status

When a single well is selected as a object item, a bar of the well’s statuses changing over
time will be shown at the bottom of the graph’s window. Relevant signs are shown near the
well name in a list. Well statuses:
• Producer;
• Injector;
• Shut;
• Stopped;
• Injector converted from producer.
The button under the list of parameters is a switcher between historical and calculated data:
Show Historical or Calculated Well Statuses.
The bar will be dual if historical production data are available. The top bar shows the
well’s current status (at the time of the current computation). The bottom bar shows its his-
torical statuses. Each status will have a dedicated color.
You can change colors by right-clicking on the status line. To come back to the default
colors, right-click on the line and select Set Default Colors – see figure 85.
Figure 85. Changing colors of the well status line.
7.3. Well Status 149

17.3
There are the following statuses:
• I-PFVR means an injector currently monitored for quantity of fluid under reservoir
conditions (such monitoring is set by the keyword WCONINJP (see 12.18.40): the
injector’s injection volume equals the sum of production volumes (or portions thereof)
from the producers connected with the injector times a pre-set factor);
• I-BHP means an injector currently monitored for bottom hole pressure;
• I-RATE means an injector monitored for injection volumes;
• STOP – means a stopped well;
• SHUT – means a shut well;
• P-LRAP means a producer currently monitored for fluid rates;
• P-BHP means a producer currently monitored for bottom hole pressure;
• P-WRAT means a producer currently monitored for water production rates;
• P-ORAT means a producer currently monitored for oil rates;
• P-GRAT means a producer currently monitored for gas rates;
• I-RESV means an injector currently monitored for injection volumes under reservoir
conditions;
• I-THP means an injector currently monitored for tubing head pressure;
• P-RESV means a producer currently monitored for production volumes under reservoir
conditions;
• P-THP means a producer currently monitored for tubing head pressure;
• P-DRAW means a producer currently monitored for the difference between well pres-
sure and reservoir pressure;
• GRUP – means group monitoring.
7.3. Well Status 150

17.3
7.4. Graph View

7.4.1. Scaling along X and Y Axes
You can change the scale by rotating the mouse wheel. Pressing both mouse buttons simul-
taneously will restore the original view of the graph.
7.4.2. Expanding Graph Regions

Press and hold the mouse’s left button to highlight a graph region by moving the mouse from
left to right or from right to left. Pressing both mouse buttons simultaneously will restore the
original view of the graph.
7.4.3. Dragging
Press and hold the right button of the mouse to drag the graph over the screen.
7.4.4. Time Display in the Graph and in the Table

The current computational time (the one specified by the time slider position) will be marked
by a red vertical line for all graphs, except for cross-plots. In cross-plots, the current time
will be marked by a crossing of a vertical red line and a horizontal red line. In a table the
current time step is highlighted in blue.
7.4.5. Graph View. Change Graph Color and Line

The default setting are the following: the historical production curves are shown as dotted
lines; calculated production curves are solid lines.
You can change any graph’s settings (color and type of line):
1. Right-click on the graph’s name.
2. Select Graph Settings.
3. In the Graph Options dialog (figure 86), select the preferred graph color, line thick-
ness, and Graph Icon (graph icons will designate the lines of a graph when other
models’ results are added to the model being used).
4. Click OK.
7.4. Graph View 151

17.3
Figure 86. Graph options.
7.4.5. Graph View. Change Graph Color and Line 152

17.3
7.5. Trend line

You can draw a trend line for any graph. A trend line is a straight line the distance between
which and the graph is minimum. A trend line is drawn as follows:
1. Right-click on a graph’s name. Select Graph Preferences.
2. Check Draw Trend in the Graph Preferences dialog;
3. Set the required parameters :
• Step one (a trend will be drawn from step 1 specified till the end of the compu-
tation period): the default setting is the first step of the computation.
• To draw a trend up to a date, check Up to Date and set a date after the model’s
computation period. The trend will be extended to that date, and the graph will
be scaled accordingly. A trend up to a set date is shown on figure 87.
• To draw a trend up to a value, check Up to Value and set the value. The trend will
be extended to the value (the trend may extend beyond the model’s computation
period into the future).
Figure 87. Draw Trend up to a date.
4. Trend for Cross-Plots: Click the button Graph Parameters on the right-hand
panel. To draw a trend to certain values (along X and Y axes), check the Values field
7.5. Trend line 153

17.3
and set the values. The trend will be extended to such values and the graph will be
scaled accordingly.
7.5. Trend line 154

17.3
7.6. Auto sync

This will synchronize viewing of a well’s graphs of various tabs in the windows open. For
example, you can have two windows with view of the same model opened at the same time
( Open New Window or create a graph window by pressing Ctrl+N) to view different
graphs for the same well. You should check Auto Sync in both windows. After that, you can
select a different well in one of the windows, and that well will be automatically selected in
the other window, with a graph shown for that well.
figure 88 shows a Oil Total production graph (tab Totals (Accumulative Rates) for well
P48 in one window, and a bottom hole pressure graph for the same well in another window
(tab Pressure).
Figure 88. Different graph tabs for the same well in different windows.
7.6. Auto sync 155

17.3
7.7. Coordinate Axes. Multiple Coordinate Systems in the Same Win-

dow
Left and right of a graph Y-axes 1, 2, and 3 are normally displayed. If you select many
parameters to draw in a graph, additional coordinate axes will be added (for each unit of
measurement). If you click on an axis in the Parameters dialog, the parameters corresponding
to that axis will be highlighted in light-gray.
For example, for graphs of the tab Rates: figure 89. Multiple Coordinate Systems for
Graph in the Same Window shows 3 Y-axes. The first axis (Liquid Rate) on the left is
selected (not highlighted in gray), so the parameters in the list are highlighted in gray. But
the Surface Gas Volume and the Weighted rate (under reservoir conditions) are highlighted
in gray. To have them highlighted, you should click different Y-axes.
Figure 89. Multiple Coordinate Systems for Graph in the Same Window.
7.7. Coordinate Axes. Multiple Coordinate Systems in the Same Window 156
17.3
7.8. Setting Minimum and Maximum Values for Graph Axes

You can set custom minimum and maximum values for X and Y axes. To do that, right-click
the Y-axis and select Select Y-axis Min and Max (figure 90), then click the X-axis and
select X-axis Min and Max. You can also copy the current min and max values for pasting
into a different graph (select Copy Min and Max).
Figure 90. Select Y-axis minimum and maximum.
In the pop-down dialog, set the minimum and maximum values required for the axis
selected. For graphs on figure 90, for instance, shows the setting of a new maximum. The
new-max graph is shown on figure 91.
To go back to the automatic setting of the minimum and maximum values, right-click the
Y-axis and select Auto Min and Max.
7.8. Setting Minimum and Maximum Values for Graph Axes 157
17.3
Figure 91. Graph min/max setting dialog.
Figure 92. Auto Min and Max.
7.8. Setting Minimum and Maximum Values for Graph Axes 158
17.3
7.9. Graph tables

All graphs are duplicated in a table at the right side.
To copy the table in text editor, Excel, e.g., click on top-left angle of the table to choose
it, then press Ctrl+C (copy) and Ctrl+V (paste).
Lists of Values. All graph data are shown in the list of values on the right. For the
Object Item type (see Graph Types): the columns show values of the parameters selected,
and the lines show the time steps. When you click Settings, you can set days from Step
1 or Date as a Y-axis format.
For the Parameter type, the columns show time steps, the lines show well names, and blocks
show parameter values.
For the Step type, the columns show the selected parameters, and the lines show well names.
The columns can be moved: click the column title and drag the column to a new location,
holding the left button of the mouse.
Sort the Values. You can sort the columns up or down. To activate the value sorting,
right-click any block in the table and select Sort in the pop-down menu. An arrow will
appear at the top of the table next to the column’s name (figure 93). If the arrow points up,
the values in the column are sorted up, if the arrow points down, the values are sorted down.
To sort a different column, click that column’s name at the top, and the arrow will move
there.
Figure 93. Table sorting.
7.9. Graph tables 159

17.3
7.10. Multiple Models’ Results Graphs in the Same Window

tNavigator allows to load other models’ results in the GUI and to compare the results in
graphical and/or tabular form. This feature can be used, for instance, for comparing various
development forecast cases. For all graphs you will see the graphs of the added model.
In the model window, click Document, Load Results, Load tNavigator Graphs (see
figure 94). You can load multiple models’ results at the same time. Results of Eclipse or
MORE calculation can also be loaded.
You can find more examples in the training tutorial 1.5 How To Load Maps And
Graphs.
Added models’ results will be superimposed on the base model ones (the one first
opened); if the reporting steps are not the same, the added models’ results will be inter-
polated to the base model’s steps; wells, which does not exist in the added model, will be
disregarded in the base model.
Figure 94. Loading other models’ results.
Comparing Results Graphs

The graphs will display a tree for each parameter, combining graphs of the same type of
various models.
In figure 94, for instance, the graphs of oil and water totals for two models are shown.
Selecting markers for multiple models’ graphs.
1. Right-click on the graph’s name. Select Graph Preferences.
7.10. Multiple Models’ Results Graphs in the Same Window 160

17.3
2. In the Graph Options dialog, click Icon – see figure 95.
3. In the Loaded Models dialog, right of the model name, you can see the marker, which
can be used to mark the model’s graphs and a pop-down menu of markers – figure 95.
Figure 95. Selecting markers.
Comparing Models’ Results in Tabular Form.

Graphs. Comparison of Results (a table of main cumulative parameter data for the se-
lected period of time).
7.10. Multiple Models’ Results Graphs in the Same Window 161

17.3
7.11. Graph Types (Object Item, Parameter, Step)

Object items (a well connection (perforated interval), a well, a group of wells, a FIELD, a
fluid-in-place region) can be selected in the top part of the panel, and parameters, in the
bottom part. Graph Types are switched at the bottom of the selection panel – see figure 96.
Figure 96. Selection of graph’s type.
• Object. An Object item can be the following objects: a connection (perforated interval),
a well, a group of wells, a FIP region, FIELD, a network node (if the keyword
NETWORK (see 12.1.87) is specified), a well segment (if multisegment wells are
specified – Multisegment well). For the selected object item (you can select only one!),
you can simultaneously draw graphs of various parameters as a function of time (the
time step number). You can select a connection (perforated interval) in a well by
clicking on the triangle left to the well name and select the required interval from the
appeared list of intervals.
7.11. Graph Types (Object Item, Parameter, Step) 162

17.3
• Parameters. A parameter can be one (just one!) of the following parameters: rates,
totals, pressure, well productivity, well group productivity, cross-flows between regions.
For the selected parameter, you can draw a graph of values for any number of wells
and connections (perforated intervals) as a function of time (the step number). You can
also draw a graph for the sum and the average of the selected objects.
• Step. For any time step, you can calculate any number of parameters for any number
of wells. To select the time set the time slider at the required time step. The data will
be shown as a table. To generate a table for different time steps set the time slider at
that time step.
Object.
In figure 97 oil rate and water rate graphs for the selected Object item, well P14, are
shown.
Figure 97. Object graph type.
Parameter.
In figure 98 Oil total (the parameter selected) graphs for wells P11, P16, P18 is shown.
A graph is generated for each of the object items selected. Each is selected in the pop-down
menu (inside the red square in the figure). The computation is done for 2016 (as per the time
slider and as highlighted in blue in the table).

17.3
Figure 98. Parameter graph type.
In figure 99 the graph of Oil Total sum for wells P11, P16, P18 is shown. Sum is selected
in the drop-down menu (at the bottom of the panel).
Figure 99. Parameters Graph: the Sum.
A similar procedure is used to generate graphs for the Average Value and for the Average
for Active Wells for the selected object items.
Graphs for the the Average Value and for the Average for Active Wells are generated
for the selected objects which are on one hierarchy level: e.g., if 2 groups are selected, then
graph of average of them will be generated; if one group is selected, then graph of average
value of one this group – i.e. graph of group parameter value – will be generated, but not

17.3
graph of average value of all the group objects. For the Average for Active Wells, the
average value is calculated for wells that were active during the time step. If the well was
stopped or was monitored for rates, but the rate was zero, the well is considered as inactive
during the time step.
If you need to select some perforations, useful functions are shown in figure 100. Click
right mouse button on the well name and select Select all Connections, Unselect all Con-
nections, Invert Selections of Connections (perforations Selected before will be unchecked,
and inverse, connections unselected before will be selected).
Figure 100. Parameter graph type. Select all connections or unselect them.
Step.
In the figure 100 shows a list of values for wells P11, P16, P18 for time step 92. The
parameters are: water-cut, water-oil ratio, and some other parameters.

17.3
Figure 101. Step graph type.
7.12. Graph templates

A graph template is the advanced tool to work with graphs. The template allows:
• make fast selection of graphs to view;
• show several sets of graphs in one view;
• build graphs of sums or average values for selected objects;
• set graph preferences (color, thickness, names, fonts and so on);
• export and import templates from one model to another.
For the detailed information see the training tutorial 1.7 Graph templates.
7.12. Graph templates 166

17.3
Figure 102. Graph templates.
Figure 103. Graph templates.
7.12. Graph templates 167

17.3
8. Graphs. Graphs list

8.1. Rates
For the object items connection (perforated interval), well, group, FIELD, Network you
can use this tab to view graphs of:
• Oil production rates:
– Oil rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: stb/day);

– Oil Mass rate (METRIC: t/day, FIELD: lb/day);
– Oil rate [WEFAC] (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: stb/day) (the daily oil rate adjusted
for the well’s efficiency factor, as set by the keyword WEFAC, see 12.18.70).
• Oil rate (H) – the historical daily oil rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: stb/day);
• Oil rate Input Limit (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: stb/day). This limit is visualized
according to input data (WCONPROD, see 12.18.36);
• Oil rate Calc Limit (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: stb/day). This limit is available only
when the time step is calculated. UDQ (see 12.18.143) and ACTION (see 12.18.136)
are taking into account when this limit is calculated;
• Free oil rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: stb/day);
• Vaporized rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: stb/day);
• Water production rates:
– Water rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: stb/day);

– Water Mass rate (METRIC: t/day, FIELD: lb/day);
– Water rate [WEFAC] (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: stb/day) (the daily water pro-
duction rate adjusted for the well’s efficiency factor, as set by the keyword WE-
FAC, see 12.18.70).
• Water rate (H) – the historical daily water production rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD:
stb/day);
• Water rate Input Limit (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: stb/day). This limit is visualized
• Water rate Calc Limit (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: stb/day). This limit is available only
• Reservoir volume production rate (METRIC: m 3 /day under reservoir conditions,

FIELD: b/day under reservoir conditions);
8. Graphs. Graphs list 168

17.3
• Reservoir volume injection rate (METRIC: m 3 /day under reservoir conditions, FIELD:
b/day under reservoir conditions);
• Liquid rate – fluid production rate under standard conditions:
– Liquid rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: stb/day);

– Liquid rate [WEFAC] (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: stb/day) (fluid rate adjusted
for the well’s efficiency factor, as set by the keyword WEFAC, see 12.18.70).
• Liquid rate (H) – historical fluid rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: stb/day);
• Liquid rate Input Limit (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: stb/day). This limit is visualized
• Liquid rate Calc Limit (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: stb/day). This limit is available only
• Gas production rate:
– Gas rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: Mscf/day);

– Gas mass rate (METRIC: t/day, FIELD: lb/day);
– Gas rate [WEFAC] (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: Mscf/day) (gas rate adjusted for
the well’s efficiency factor, as set by the keyword WEFAC, see 12.18.70).
• Gas rate (H) – historical gas rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: Mscf/day);
• Gas rate Input Limit (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: Mscf/day). This limit is visualized
• Gas rate Calc Limit (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: Mscf/day). This limit is available only
• Free gas rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: Mscf/day);
• Dissolved gas rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: Mscf/day);
• Gas rate to sale (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: Mscf/day) (see keyword GRUPSALE,
see 12.18.175);
• Fuel gas rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: Mscf/day) (see keyword GRUPFUEL,
see 12.18.177);
• Import gas rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: Mscf/day) (see keywords GCONSUMP
(see 12.18.83), GADVANCE, see 12.18.174);
8.1. Rates 169

17.3
• Consumption gas rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: Mscf/day) (see keyword GCON-
SUMP, see 12.18.83);
• Wet gas rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: Mscf/day);
• Water injection rate:
– Water injection rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: stb/day);

– Water injection mass rate (METRIC: t/day, FIELD: lb/day);
– Water injection rate [WEFAC] (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: stb/day) (water intake
rate adjusted for the well’s efficiency factor, as set by the keyword WEFAC,
see 12.18.70).
• Water injection rate (H) – historical water intake rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD:
stb/day);
• Water injection rate Input Limit (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: stb/day). This limit is
visualized according to input data (WCONINJE, see 12.18.38);
• Water injection rate Calc Limit (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: stb/day). This limit is
available only when the time step is calculated. UDQ (see 12.18.143) and ACTION
(see 12.18.136) are taking into account when this limit is calculated;
• Gas injection rate:
– Gas injection rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: Mscf/day);

– Gas injection rate [WEFAC] (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: Mscf/day) (gas intake
rate adjusted for the well’s efficiency factor, as set by the keyword WEFAC,
see 12.18.70).
• Gas injection rate (H) – historical gas intake rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: Mscf/-
day);
• Gas injection rate Input Limit (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: Mscf/day). This limit is
visualized according to input data (WCONINJE, see 12.18.38);
• Gas injection rate Calc Limit (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: Mscf/day). This limit is
available only when the time step is calculated. UDQ (see 12.18.143) and ACTION
(see 12.18.136) are taking into account when this limit is calculated;
• Gas lift rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: Mscf/day) (see the detailed description in the
section Gas Lift Optimization of tNav User Manual);
• Oil production potential (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: stb/day) (see the detailed descrip-
tion in the section Well potential calculations of tNav User Manual);
• Water production potential (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: stb/day);
8.1. Rates 170

17.3
• Gas production potential (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: Mscf/day);
• Oil injection potential (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: stb/day);
• Water injection potential (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: stb/day);
• Gas injection potential (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: Mscf/day);
• NGL rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: Mscf/day);
• NGL molar rate (METRIC: kg − mol/day, FIELD: lb − mol/day);
• Oil voidage production rate (METRIC: m 3 /day under reservoir conditions, FIELD:
• Gas voidage production rate (METRIC: m 3 /day under reservoir conditions, FIELD:
• Water voidage production rate (METRIC: m 3 /day under reservoir conditions, FIELD:
• Oil voidage injection rate (METRIC: m 3 /day under reservoir conditions, FIELD: b/day
under reservoir conditions);
• Gas voidage injection rate (METRIC: m 3 /day under reservoir conditions, FIELD: b/day
• Water voidage injection rate (METRIC: m 3 /day under reservoir conditions, FIELD:
b/day under reservoir conditions).
For compositional models also the following graphs for components are available:
• component mass rate (METRIC: t/day, FIELD: lb/day);
• component oil molar rate (METRIC: kg − mol/day, FIELD: lb − mol/day);
• component gas molar rate (METRIC: kg − mol/day, FIELD: lb − mol/day);
• component molar rate (METRIC: kg − mol/day, FIELD: lb − mol/day);
• separator stage oil rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: Mscf/day);
• separator stage gas rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: Mscf/day);
• component liquid mole fraction (dimensionless value);
• component vapor mole fraction (dimensionless value);
• component total mole fraction (dimensionless value);
8.1. Rates 171

17.3
If Eclipse or Tempest MORE results have been loaded (if available, Eclipse or Tempest
MORE results get loaded by default - tNavigator’s General Settings), Eclipse or Tempest
MORE results will also be accessible, with names designated as described above ([E] for
Eclipse and [M] for Tempest MORE). Example: oil rate [E] means the oil rate calculated
by Eclipse.
8.1. Rates 172

17.3
See figure 104. Oil Monthly Rate, Water Monthly Rate shows the production profile
graphs (with a selection tree expanded before the Oil Rate/Water Rate parameter).
Figure 104. Oil Monthly Rate and Water Monthly Rate.
In the figure 105 Oil Rate and Oil Rate [E] of Well PROD12 are presented, the param-
eters Oil Rate and Oil Rate [E] are checked. The values are shown in the list of values to
the right of the graph. You can see that the Eclipse and tNavigator results are almost the same.
To see the graphs for Connection (Perforated Interval) you should select the connection
(perforated interval) required in the Object Items dialog (clicking on the triangle left to a
well’s name will open a list of the well’s connections (perforated intervals)).
Also, tNavigator will can visualize a histogram of values (including rates) for each con-
nection (perforated interval) – see tabs Well Profile, Well Section.
8.1. Rates 173

17.3
Figure 105. Oil Rate and Oil Rate [E] of Well PROD12.
For the object item FIP Region (FIPNUM) – this tab will display the following graphs:
• Oil rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: stb/day);
• Oil rate (H) – historical daily oil rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: stb/day);
• Water rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: stb/day);
• Water rate (H) – historical daily water production rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD:
stb/day);
• Liquid rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: stb/day);
• Liquid rate (H) – historical daily fluid rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: stb/day);
• Reservoir Volume rate – daily fluid rate under reservoir conditions (METRIC: m 3 /day
under reservoir conditions, FIELD: b/day under reservoir conditions);
• Gas rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: Mscf/day);
• Gas rate (H) – historical daily gas rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: Mscf/day);
• Free gas rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: Mscf/day);
• Dissolved gas rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: Mscf/day);
8.1. Rates 174

17.3
• Water injection rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: stb/day);
• Water injection rate (H) – historical daily water intake rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD:
stb/day);
• Reservoir volume injection rate (RC) – daily fluid intake rate under reservoir conditions
(rm 3 /day- reservoir m 3 - m 3 per day under reservoir conditions);
• Gas injection rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: Mscf/day);
• Gas injection rate (H) – historical daily gas intake rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD:
Mscf/day);
• Water Flow Through boundary (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: stb/day);
• Water Flow Through boundary (RC) (METRIC: m 3 /day under reservoir conditions,
FIELD: b/day under reservoir conditions);
• Oil Flow Through boundary (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: stb/day);
• RC Oil Flow Through boundary (METRIC: m 3 /day under reservoir conditions, FIELD:
• Gas Flow Through boundary (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: Mscf/day);
• RC Gas Flow Through boundary (RC) ((METRIC: m 3 /day under reservoir conditions,
FIELD: Mscf/day under reservoir conditions);
• Aquifer Water flow (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: stb/day).
Every FIP region has a well tree comprising all the wells in the region (figure 106).
For Segment object the following graphs are available (figure 107):
• oil rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: stb/day);
• water rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: stb/day);
• liquid rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: stb/day);
• gas rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: Mscf/day);
8.1. Rates 175

17.3
Figure 106. Graphs. Rates for FIPNUM 7.
8.1. Rates 176

17.3
Figure 107. Rates of segment 115.
8.1. Rates 177

17.3
8.2. Totals
For the Object Items Well Connection, Well, Group of Wells, FIELD, Network or Seg-
ments you can use this tab to view the graphs listed below:
• Oil total – cumulative oil production (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: stb);
• Oil production mass total – cumulative mass oil production (METRIC: t, FIELD: lb);
• Oil total (H) – cumulative oil production (H) – historical cumulative oil production
(METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: stb);
• Free Oil total (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: stb);
• Vaporized Oil total (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: stb);
• Water total – cumulative water production (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: stb);
• Water Production Mass total – cumulative mass water production (METRIC: t, FIELD:
lb);
• Water total (H) – cumulative water production (H) – historical cumulative water pro-
duction (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: stb);
• Reservoir Vol. Liquid total – cumulative fluid production – cumulative fluid production
under reservoir conditions (METRIC: m 3 under reservoir conditions, FIELD: b under
reservoir conditions);
• Liquid total – cumulative fluid production – cumulative fluid production under standard
conditions (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: stb);
• Liquid total (H) – cumulative fluid production (H) – historical cumulative production
(METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: stb);
• Gas total – cumulative gas production (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: Mscf);
• Gas production Mass total – cumulative mass gas production (METRIC: t, FIELD: lb);
• Gas total (H) – cumulative gas production (H) – historical cumulative gas production
(METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: Mscf);
• Free Gas total – cumulative free gas production (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: Mscf);
• Dissolved Gas Total – cumulative dissolved gas production (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD:

Mscf);
• Sales gas total (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: Mscf);
• Fuel gas total (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: Mscf) (see keyword GRUPFUEL, see 12.18.177);
8.2. Totals 178

17.3
• Import gas total (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: Mscf) (see keywords GCONSUMP

(see 12.18.83), GADVANCE, see 12.18.174);
• Consumption gas total (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: Mscf);
• NGL total (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: lb);
• Water injection total – cumulative water injection (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: stb);
• Water injection Mass total – cumulative mass water injection (METRIC: t, FIELD: lb);
• Water injection total (H) – historical cumulative water injection (m 3 );
• Res. Vol. Injection total – (METRIC: m 3 under reservoir conditions, FIELD: b under
• Oil injection total – cumulative oil injection (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: stb);
• Oil injection total (H) – historical cumulative oil injection (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: stb);
• Gas Injection total – cumulative gas injection (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: Mscf);
• Gas Injection total (H) – historical cumulative gas injection (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD:
Mscf);
• Oil Voidage Production Total (METRIC: m 3 under reservoir conditions, FIELD: b

• Gas Voidage Production Total (METRIC: m 3 under reservoir conditions, FIELD: b

• Water Voidage Production Total (METRIC: m 3 under reservoir conditions, FIELD: b

• Oil Voidage Injection Total (METRIC: m 3 under reservoir conditions, FIELD: b under
• Gas Voidage Injection Total (METRIC: m 3 under reservoir conditions, FIELD: b under
• Water Voidage Injection Total (METRIC: m 3 under reservoir conditions, FIELD: b

under reservoir conditions).
For compositional models also the following graphs for components are available:
• component production mass total (METRIC: t , FIELD: lb);
• component production oil molar total (METRIC: kg-mol , FIELD: lb-mol );
• component production gas molar total (METRIC: kg-mol/day, FIELD: lb-mol/day);
8.2. Totals 179

17.3
• component production molar total (METRIC: kg-mol/day, FIELD: lb-mol/day);
• component molar injected total (METRIC: kg-mol/day, FIELD: lb-mol/day).
MORE results get loaded by default – tNavigator’s General Settings), Eclipse or Tempest
Eclipse and [M] for Tempest MORE). Example: oil rate [E] means the oil rate calculated
by Eclipse.
In the figure 108 cumulative oil rates for the object item Field is showed:
• Oil total – cumulative oil calculated by tNavigator;
• Oil total [M] – cumulative oil calculated by Tempest MORE.
8.2. Totals 180

17.3
Figure 108. Field’s Totals.
For the Object Item Well Connection, in order to visualize these graphs, you should
select the well’s connection (perforated interval) required in the Object Item selection dialog
(clicking left of a well name will open a list of that well’s connections).
Also, tNavigator visualizes a histogram of parameters (including cumulative values) for
each connection – go to the tabs Well Profile, Well Section.
For the Object Item FIPNUM, this tab will display the graphs listed below:
• Oil total (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: stb);
• Oil total (H) – historical cumulative oil (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: stb);
• Water total (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: stb);
• Water total (H) – historical cumulative water (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: stb);
• Liquid total – cumulative fluid under standard conditions (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: stb);
• Liquid total (H) – historical cumulative fluid (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: stb);
• Liquid total (RC) – cumulative fluid under reservoir (METRIC: m 3 under reservoir
conditions, FIELD: b under reservoir conditions);
• Gas total (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: Mscf);
• Gas total (H) – historical cumulative gas (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: Mscf);
• Free gas total (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: Mscf);
8.2. Totals 181

17.3
• Dissolved gas total (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: Mscf);
• Water injection total (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: stb);
• Reservoir volume injection total (METRIC: m 3 under reservoir conditions, FIELD: b

• Water injection total (H) – historical cumulative water injection (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD:
stb);
• Gas injection total (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: Mscf);
• Gas injection total (H) – historical cumulative gas injection (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD:
Mscf);
• Total Water Flow Through boundary (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: stb);
• RC Total Water Flow Through boundary (METRIC: m 3 under reservoir conditions,

FIELD: b under reservoir conditions);
• Total Oil Flow Through boundary (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: stb);
• RC Total Oil Flow Through boundary (METRIC: m 3 under reservoir conditions,

• Total Gas Flow Through boundary (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: Mscf);
• RC Total Gas Flow Through boundary (METRIC: m 3 under reservoir conditions,

• Total Aquifer Water flow (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: stb).
In the FIP Regions, there is a well tree for all wells in the region, as shown in the
figure 109.
8.2. Totals 182

17.3
Figure 109. Totals for region FIPNUM 8.
8.2. Totals 183

17.3
8.3. Fluid-in-place
For the Object Item FIP Region, this tab will display the following graphs:
• Current oil in place (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: stb);
• Current gas in place (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: Mscf);
• Current free gas in place (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: Mscf);
• Current dissolved gas in place (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: Mscf);
• Current water in place (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: stb);
• Pore volume in place (METRIC: m 3 under reservoir conditions, FIELD: b under

reservoir conditions) (pore volume at reference pressure). This values is Pore volume
KRB in .log file. Also this value is sum the map Initial Maps. Std pore volume:
sum(stdporv);
• Original oil in place (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: stb);
• Original water in place (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: stb);
• Current hydrocarbon in place (METRIC: m 3 under reservoir conditions, FIELD: b

• Original hydrocarbon in place (METRIC: m 3 under reservoir conditions, FIELD: b

• Current Displ. hydrocarbon in place (METRIC: m 3 under reservoir conditions, FIELD:

b under reservoir conditions). This is the current volume of recoverable hydrocarbons
in the formation, the sum of mobile oil and gas in the reservoir conditions. Is calculated
via the formula porv · max((soil + sgas − sowcr), 0);
• Original Displ. hydrocarbon in place (METRIC: m 3 under reservoir conditions, FIELD:

b under reservoir conditions);
• Original gas in place (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: Mscf);
• Mobile gas in place (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: Mscf);
• Mobile water in place (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: stb);
• Mobile oil vs Water in place (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: stb);
• Mobile oil vs Gas in place (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: stb);
• Mobile Dissolved gas vs Water in place (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: stb);
• Mobile Dissolved gas vs Gas in place (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: stb).

17.3
Figure 110. Graphs. Resources.
Mobile Oil in place under surface conditions (sm 3 ) vs Water or Gas.

If oil saturation in the block (soil) is below the critical oil saturation (sowcr – for vs water
or sogcr – for vs gas), the oil is considered immobile.
The map is calculated in the block as follows:
(soil − sowcr) · porv · ibo (for vs water)

(soil − sogcr) · porv · ibo (for vs gas)
• soil is oil saturation in the block;
• sowcr is residual oil saturation in the block after scaling of relative permeabilities;
• porv is the block’s pore volume under the current pressure in the block. It is calculated
depending on keyword used to set the rock properties: ROCK (see 12.5.17) (in Eclipse)
or CROC (see 14.4.13), REFE (see 14.4.14) (in MORE) or ROCKTAB (see 12.5.19) (in
Eclipse) or KVSP (see 14.2.8) (in MORE). For example, if the keyword used is ROCK
(see 12.5.17), the pore volume is calculated as follows:
2
2 (p − Pre f )

porv = 1 +C · (p − Pre f ) +C · ·V · PORO · NT G
2
where:
– p is pressure;
– C and P re f are set by the keyword ROCK (see 12.5.17);

17.3
– V is the geometric volume of the block (it does not equal DX · DY · DZ in a

non-uniform rectangular mesh);
– PORO and NTG are assigned by the relevant keywords.
• ibo is the reciprocal of the formation volume factor for oil.
A Mobile Oil in place Map is calculated for the vs water option.

17.3
8.4. Analytics
For the Object Items Group and FIELD, this tab will show the graphs listed below:
• Net present value (NPV) ($). See the detailed description in the section Setting Eco-
nomics Parameters. Net Present Value Graph;
• Ratios:
– Gas-oil ratio (METRIC: m 3 /m 3 , FIELD: Mscf/stb);

– Oil-gas ration (METRIC: m 3 /m 3 , FIELD: stb/Mscf);
– Gas-water ratio (METRIC: m 3 /m 3 , FIELD: Mscf/stb);
– Water-gas ratio (METRIC: m 3 /m 3 , FIELD: stb/Mscf);
– Water-oil ratio;
– Oil-water ratio;
– Liquid-gas ratio (METRIC: m 3 /m 3 , FIELD: stb/Mscf);
– Gas-liquid ratio (METRIC: m 3 /m 3 , FIELD: stb/Mscf);
– Watercut;
• Ratios (H) – historical values of ratios listed above;
• Voidage replacement coefficient (re-injection ratio under reservoir conditions) is cal-

culated as Reservoir Volume Injection Rate (rm 3 /day) divided by Reservoir Volume
Production Rate (rm 3 /day);
• Total voidage replacement coefficient (re-injection ratio under reservoir conditions) is

calculated as Reservoir Volume Injection Total (rm 3 ) divided by Reservoir Volume
Production Total (rm 3 );
• Number of new wells;
• Number of producers currently flowing;
• Number of injectors currently flowing;
• Number of open producers;
• Number of open injectors;
• Number of abandoned producers (wells that couldn’t meet their limits during simulation
and have been closed);
• Number of abandoned injectors (wells that couldn’t meet their limits during simulation
and have been closed);
8.4. Analytics 187

17.3
• Number of unused producers (wells that have been closed via keywords, for example
WELOPEN (see 12.18.112), WCONPROD (see 12.18.36) SHUT);
• Number of unused injectors (wells that have been closed via keywords, for example
WELOPEN (see 12.18.112), WCONPROD (see 12.18.36) SHUT);
• Total number of producers;
• Total number of injectors;
• Gefac multiplier (group efficiency multiplier, set via the keyword GEFAC,
see 12.18.71).
Gas-oil and oil-water ratio for the object item ”FIELD” is shown in the figure 111.
Figure 111. Reservoir Analytical Graphs.
For the Object Item Well, you can view the graphs listed below:
• Ratios:
– gas-oil ratio (METRIC: m 3 /m 3 , FIELD: Mscf/stb);

– oil-gas ration (METRIC: m 3 /m 3 , FIELD: stb/Mscf);
– gas-water ratio (METRIC: m 3 /m 3 , FIELD: Mscf/stb);
– water-gas ratio (METRIC: m 3 /m 3 , FIELD: stb/Mscf);
– water-oil ratio;
– oil-water ratio;
– liquid-gas ratio (METRIC: m 3 /m 3 , FIELD: stb/Mscf);
8.4. Analytics 188

17.3
– gas-liquid ratio (METRIC: m 3 /m 3 , FIELD: stb/Mscf);

– bottom hole gas-liquid ratio;
– watercut.
• watercut limit (to be set by the keyword WECON, see 12.18.63);
• gas-oil ratio limit (to be set by the keyword WECON, see 12.18.63);
• water-gas ratio limit (to be set by the keyword WECON, see 12.18.63);
• productivity index (METRIC: m 3 /day/Bars, FIELD: stb/day/Psi) (ratio of rate) (is cal-
culated as a rate of preferred phase for well divided by drawdown (preferred phase is
set via WELSPECS, see 12.18.3);
• water productivity index (METRIC: m 3 /day/Bars, FIELD: stb/day/Psi) (is calculated

as water rate divided by drawdown);
• oil productivity index (METRIC: m 3 /day/Bars, FIELD: stb/day/Psi) (is calculated as

oil rate divided by drawdown);
• gas productivity index (METRIC: m 3 /day/Bars, FIELD: Mscf/day/Psi) (is calculated

as gas rate divided by drawdown);
• well efficiency factor (to be set by the keyword WEFAC, see 12.18.70);
• working time on current time step (METRIC, FIELD: days);
• working time on the current time step (H) (METRIC, FIELD: days);
• working time from start to the current time step (METRIC, FIELD: days);
• working time from start to the current time step (H) (METRIC, FIELD: days);
• average density for the well (the density of the fluid in the well bore (METRIC: kg/m 3 ,
FIELD: lb/ft 3 ). The well’s BHP is automatically adjusted to take into account the dif-
ference between the reference depth BHP (the 5-th parameter of the word WELSPECS,
see 12.18.3) and the reference depth in the VFP-table (VFPPROD, see 12.18.58), with
the difference from the hydrostatic head pressure added or subtracted based on the
wellbore fluid’s density;
• tubing head temperature (METRIC: ◦ C, FIELD: ◦ F);
• economical oil rate limit (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: stb/day) (to be set by the keyword
WECON, see 12.18.63);
• economical watercut limit (to be set by the keyword WECON, see 12.18.63);
8.4. Analytics 189

17.3
• economical injection rate (METRIC: m 3 /day, FIELD: stb/day) (to be set by the key-
word WECONINJ, see 12.18.69);
Drainage Table Graphs:
• Liquid Injected (D) (METRIC: m 3 under reservoir conditions, FIELD: b under reser-
voir conditions) – water injected into a well during the time step period (for injectors
only). The graph is based on the data in the Drainage Table (instantaneous);
• Liquid Induced (D) (METRIC: m 3 under reservoir conditions, FIELD: b under reser-
voir conditions) – oil produced during the time step period from all the producers
connected with the injector in question by stream lines (for injectors only). The graph
is based on the data in the Drainage Table (instantaneous);
• Oil Induced (D) (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: stb) – fluid produced during the time step pe-
riod from all the producers connected with the injector in question by stream lines (for
injectors only). The graph is based on the data in the Drainage Table (instantaneous);
• Oil Induced / Liquid Injected (D) – oil produced from all the producers connected with
the injector by stream lines to cumulative injection into the injector (for injectors only).
The graph is based on the data in the Drainage Table (instantaneous).
Drainage graphs for Injector 36 is shown in figure 112: Liquid Injected (D), Oil Induced
(D) and Oil Induced/Liquid Injected.
Figure 112. Injector 36 Drainage Graphs.
For the Object Item Well Connection, you can view the graphs listed below:
• Ratios:
8.4. Analytics 190

17.3
– watercut;
– gas-liquid ratio (METRIC: m 3 /m 3 , FIELD: stb/Mscf).
• water productivity index (METRIC: m 3 /day/Bars, FIELD: stb/day/Psi) (is calculated

as water rate divided by drawdown);
• oil productivity index (METRIC: m 3 /day/Bars, FIELD: stb/day/Psi) (is calculated as

oil rate divided by drawdown);
• gas productivity index (METRIC: m 3 /day/Bars, FIELD: Mscf/day/Psi) (is calculated

as gas rate divided by drawdown);
• diameter (to be set by the keyword COMPDAT, see 12.18.6) (METRIC: m, FIELD: ft);
• effective R0 (to be set by the keyword COMPDAT, see 12.18.6) (METRIC: m, FIELD:
ft);
• skin factor (to be set by the keyword COMPDAT, see 12.18.6);
• PI Mult - productivity index multiplier (to be set by the keyword WPIMULT,

see 12.18.30);
• relative permeability (to be set by the keyword COMPINJK, see 12.18.27);
• Transmissibility factor (CF – connection factor) (to be set by the keyword COMPDAT,
see 12.18.6);
• effective Kh (production Permeability × Thickness × Net-to-gross) (to be set by the

keyword COMPDAT, see 12.18.6);
• generalized pseudo-pressure blocking factor (to be set by the 3-rd parameter of the
keyword PICOND, see 12.18.195);
• scale damage PI factor (current value of connection productivity index when the table
SCDATAB (see 12.18.235) is set; the keyword WSCTAB (see 12.18.236) should also
be specified);
8.4. Analytics 191

17.3
• D-factor (to be set by the keyword COMPDAT, see 12.18.6).

To visualize these graphs, select the well connection required in the Object Items dialog.
See figure 113. Well connection analytical graph highlights the well connection (perforated
interval) [81, 44, 3]. The figure 113 shows Watercut and Oil-Water ratio graphs.
Figure 113. Well connection analytical graphs.
For each well connection (perforated interval), tNavigator also visualize a histogram of
values (including values of analytical parameters) – see Well Profile.
For the object item FIP Region (FIPNUM), this tab will display the graphs listed below:
• Ratios:

– watercut;
– Voidage replacement coefficient (re-injection ratio under reservoir conditions) is
calculated as Reservoir Volume Injection Rate (rm 3 /day) divided by Reservoir
Volume Production Rate (rm 3 /day);
8.4. Analytics 192

17.3
– Total voidage replacement coefficient (re-injection ratio under reservoir condi-

tions) is calculated as Reservoir Volume Injection Total (rm 3 ) divided by Reser-
voir Volume Production Total (rm 3 );
• oil recovery factor (is calculated as initial oil-in-place minus current oil-in-place dev-
ided by initial oil-in-place) (%);
• number of producers currently flowing;
• number of injectors currently flowing;
• number of new wells;
• material balance error (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: stb);
• oil material balance error (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: stb);
• water material balance error (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: stb);
• gas material balance error (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: Mscf);
• Mass of water (METRIC: kg, FIELD: lb);
• Mass of oil (METRIC: kg, FIELD: lb);
• Mass of gas (METRIC: kg, FIELD: lb);
• Number of moles for water;
• Number of moles for oil;
• Number of moles for gas;
• water volume (METRIC: m 3 under reservoir conditions, FIELD: b under reservoir

conditions);
• oil volume (METRIC: m 3 under reservoir conditions, FIELD: b under reservoir con-
ditions);
• gas volume (METRIC: m 3 under reservoir conditions, FIELD: b under reservoir con-
ditions);
• compensation (a graph of production vs injection, in percentage points).
8.4. Analytics 193

17.3
Figure 114. FIPNUM 1 Analytical Graphs.
Figure 115. Well Tree.
In the figure 114 oil recovery factor and injection ratio graphs are checked. The graph
uses two scales. The left scale (highlighted in gray) is for the recovery factor, the right one,
for the material balance errors.
Every FIP region has a well tree comprising all the wells in the region (see figure 115).
In the Object Items selection dialog, the well name is followed by a number in parenthe-
8.4. Analytics 194

17.3
sis – the number of FIP regions in which this well is found. For example, Well A1 (1.000)
means that Well A1 is found in one FIP region; Well A2 (2.000) means that Well A2 is
found in two FIP regions.
Segments object.
A segment well structure allows to describe a flow more accurately. A well is split
into parts – segments, each segment has its own set of parameters. Links to the keywords
which specify multisegment wells are in the section Multisegment well of tNav User Manual.
The following graphs are available:

• Ratios:

– watercut;
• Water flow velocity (METRIC: m/s, FIELD: f t/s);
• Oil flow velocity (METRIC: m/s, FIELD: f t/s);
• Gas flow velocity (METRIC: m/s, FIELD: f t/s);
• Water holdup fraction;
• Oil holdup fraction;
• Gas holdup fraction;
• Segment THP Length (METRIC: ı̀; FIELD: ft);
• Segment BHP Depth (METRIC: ı̀; FIELD: ft);
• Segment Diameter (METRIC: ı̀; FIELD: ft);
• Segment Roughness (METRIC: ı̀; FIELD: ft);
• Segment Area (METRIC: ı̀ 2 ; FIELD: ft 2 );
• Segment Volume (METRIC: ı̀ 3 ; FIELD: ft 3 ).
8.4. Analytics 195

17.3
Figure 116. The Oil flow velocity in the segment.
The object Neworks (nodes of surface network).

See the detailed description in the section NETWORK option. Automatic chokes. Com-
pressors of UserManual.
• Ratios (gas-oil, watercut and other);
• ALQ (Artificial Lift Quantity);
• VFP table number.
8.4. Analytics 196

17.3
8.5. Pressure
For the object items Group and Field, this tab displays the graphs specified below:
• Average pressure (reservoir pressure) weighted by pore volume (METRIC: bar, FIELD:
psi);
• Network node pressure (see the keyword NETWORK, see 12.1.87) (METRIC: bar,
FIELD: psi);
• Loaded pressure (METRIC: bar, FIELD: psi). It can be loaded using the button on
the right panel, see the section 7.1
The pressure weighted by pore volume is calculated as follows: pressure in each block
is multiplied by the pore volume of the block. Then the products of all the blocks are
summarized, and the total is divided by the sum of all the blocks’ pore volumes (wpv -
Weighted by Pore Volume).
MORE results get loaded by default - tNavigator’s General Settings), Eclipse or Tempest
Eclipse and [M] for Tempest MORE). Example: Weighted Average Pressure [E] means the
weighted average pressure calculated by Eclipse.
Figure 117. Reservoir Average Pressure Graph.
For the object item Well, you can view the graphs listed below:
• Bottom hole pressure (METRIC: bar, FIELD: psi);
• Bottom hole pressure (H) – historical bottomhole pressure (METRIC: bar, FIELD: psi);
8.5. Pressure 197

17.3
• Bottom hole pressure target and history – assigned historical bottomhole pressure (pres-
sures set by the keyword WCONHIST (see 12.18.37) for producers and by the keyword
WCONINJH (see 12.18.41) for injectors) (METRIC: bar, FIELD: psi);
• Bottom hole pressure target – assigned bottomhole pressure (pressures set by the
keyword WCONPROD (see 12.18.36) for producers and by the keyword WCON-
INJE (see 12.18.38) for injectors, WELTARG, see 12.18.53) (METRIC: bar, FIELD:
psi);
• Tubing head pressure (METRIC: bar, FIELD: psi);
• Tubing head pressure target and history – assigned tubing-head pressure (pressures
set by the keyword WCONHIST (see 12.18.37) for producers and by the keyword
WCONINJH (see 12.18.41) for injectors) (METRIC: bar, FIELD: psi);
• Tubing head pressure (H) – historical tubing-head pressure (METRIC: bar, FIELD:
psi);
• Tubing hole pressure target (METRIC: bar, FIELD: psi);
• Pressure on equivalent radius (METRIC: bar, FIELD: psi) Pressure on equivalent ra-
dius is calculated the following way: for every connection the pressure on equivalent
radius is calculated using the corresponding formula, then the sum for connections
weighted by pore volume is calculated (formula for equivalent radius is in the section
of UserManual Pressure equivalent radius calculation);
• Drawdown (METRIC: bar, FIELD: psi).
This graph in graphical interface is calculated as W BP − W BHP. WBHP – bottom
hole pressure, WBP – average pressure in grid blocks containing connections adjusted
to reference depth (density in the well bore is used) and using por volume weighted
average (if something else in not set in keywords WPAVE (see 12.18.196), WPAVEDEP,
see 12.18.197).
Drawdown in WELDRAW (see 12.18.109) is calculated differently: liquid or gas rate
weighted average of productivity is used. Density in the well bore is not taken into
account in AVG calculations, as the difference (in block and in connection) is taken at
the same depth;
• WBP (METRIC: bar, FIELD: psi) (keywords WPAVE (see 12.18.196), WPAVEDEP,
see 12.18.197);
• WBP4 (METRIC: bar, FIELD: psi) (keywords WPAVE (see 12.18.196), WPAVEDEP,
see 12.18.197);
see 12.18.197);
see 12.18.197);
8.5. Pressure 198

17.3
• Loaded pressure (METRIC: bar, FIELD: psi) (loading procedure is described in Section
Load Well Graphs).
Pressure graphs for well I1 are shown in the figure 118.
For the Object Item Well Connection the following graphs are available:
• Connection pressure (METRIC: bar, FIELD: psi). The pressure inside a well bore
bhp + ρ · g · (ConnDepth −WellRe f erenceDepth)
where:
– bhp – bottom hole pressure;
– ConnDepth – connection depth;
– WellRe f erenceDepth – datum depth (specified by the keyword WELSPECS,
see 12.18.3).
• Bulk pressure (METRIC: bar, FIELD: psi) (in the block with connection).
This pressure is also visualized on the Calculated Map. Pressure;
• Drawdown (METRIC: bar, FIELD: psi);
• Connection Head Term (METRIC: bar, FIELD: psi) is calculated as a difference of
well bottom hole pressure and a pressure in the wellbore in this connection.
Figure 118. Well Pressure Graphs.
To visualise these graphs, you should select the well connection required in the Object
Items dialog (on figure 119 the well connection (perforated interval) [18, 20, 6]) is selected.
The figure shows graphs of pressure for the well connection and the block.
8.5. Pressure 199

17.3
Figure 119. Well connection pressure graph.
For the Object Item FIP Region (FIPNUM), this tab will display the graphs listed below
(figure 120):
• Avg. pressure (pressure weighted by hydrocarbons [whc]) (METRIC: bar, FIELD: psi);
• Phase potentials. The formulas for a calculation of potentials are described in the
section Phase potentials calculations of tNav User Manual.
– Avg. Gas Potential (calculated the way described in 31-parameter of OPTIONS
(see 12.18.225) keyword) (METRIC: bar, FIELD: psi);
– Avg. Oil Potential (calculated the way described in 31-parameter of OPTIONS
– Avg. Water Potential (calculated the way described in 31-parameter of OPTIONS
• Avg. pressure [wpv] (pressure weighted by pore volume [wpv]) (METRIC: bar, FIELD:
psi).
The pressure weighted by pore volume [wpv] is calculated as follows: the pressure in
each block is multiplied by the pore volume of the block. Then the products of all the
blocks are summed up, and the total is divided by the sum of all the blocks’ pore volumes.
The pressure weighted by hydrocarbons is calculated as follows: a pressure in each block is
multiplied by the block’s pore volume and by the sum of oil and gas content in the block.
Then the products of all the blocks are summed up, and the total is divided by the sum of all
the blocks’ pore volumes multiplied by the sum of oil content and gas content of the block
in question.
Segment object. A segment well structure allows to describe flow more accurately. A
well is split in to parts – segments, then each segment has its own set of parameters. Links
8.5. Pressure 200

17.3
Figure 120. Graphs of pressure for the FIP region.
to the keywords which specify multisegment wells are in the section Multisegment well of
tNav User Manual.
The main parameter – pressure drop in a segment. A pressure in each segment is equal
to sum of pressure in a segment above and a pressure drop. There are three types of pressure
lost: due to a hydrostatic, due to a friction and due to an acceleration of fluid.
• pressure (METRIC: bar, FIELD: psi);
• pressure drop (METRIC: bar, FIELD: psi);
• pressure drop due to hydrostatic (METRIC: bar, FIELD: psi);
• pressure drop due to friction (METRIC: bar, FIELD: psi);
• pressure drop due to acceleration (METRIC: bar, FIELD: psi).
8.5. Pressure 201

17.3
Figure 121. Segment’s pressure.
Network object.
See the detailed description in the section NETWORK option. Automatic chokes. Com-
pressors of tNavigator User Manual.
• Node pressure (METRIC: bar, FIELD: psi).
In the figure 122 the pressure in network’s node is shown.
8.5. Pressure 202

17.3
Figure 122. Node network pressure.
8.6. Flow Between FIPs

To view the detailed description of FIP Regions click on FIP Regions.
To visualize graphs of flow between FIPs, click the tab Enable FIP Flow Calculation before
running a computation (in the right bottom corner) or set in advance the keyword RPTMAPS
(see 12.15.51) parameter FIPFLOW.
The tab will visualize graphs of crossflows between FIP regions:
• water flow (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: stb);
• oil flow (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: stb);
• gas flow (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: Mscf);
• component flow (METRIC: kg-mol; FIELD: lb-mol).
FIP region 3 and FIP region 2 are set as follows: 3 <-> 2.

Figure 123 shows graphs of water, oil, and gas crossflows between the FIP region 3 and
the FIP region 2 [3 <-> 2]. The data are also shown in the table on the right side.
For FIP regions, you can visualize several types of graphs in the tabs Rates, Totals,
Analytics, Pressure. In the Object Items dialog, you should select the required FIP region
(FIPNUM).
8.6. Flow Between FIPs 203

17.3
Figure 123. Crossflows between FIP regions.
8.7. Run Statistics

Run statistics contains the following graphs:
• Instant material balance error;
• Accumulative material balance error;
• DP (the maximum pressure change per time step in all the blocks);
• DN water (the maximum change of water’s molar density per time step in all the
blocks);
• DN oil (the maximum change of oil’s molar density per time step in all the blocks);
• DN gas (the maximum change of gas’s molar density per time step in all the blocks);
• DV (the maximum change of pore volume per time step in all the blocks);
• Maximum time step duration (days);
• Minimum time step duration (days);
• Average time step duration (days);
• Number of time steps;
• Number of Newton iterations;
• Number of linear iterations;
8.7. Run Statistics 204

17.3
• Number of computational threads;
• Calculation time (the duration of each time step computation) (seconds);
• Total calculation time (from the start to now) (seconds);
• Total CPU time.
tNavigator run settings are set by the keyword RUNCTRL (see 12.18.124).
Run Statistics Graphs of current and cumulative material balance error are shown in the
figure 124.

17.3
Figure 124. Run Statistics Graphs.

17.3
8.8. Crossplots
Crossplots show the dependence of one parameter on another parameter. There are two types
of Crossplots: Crossplots and FIP region’s crossplots (so you should check the required
type): Arbitrary crossplots or FIP crossplots.
Crossplots.
To view a pop-down menu with graph parameters (cumulative fluid, oil rate, etc.):
1. Check the option Crossplots.
2. Go to one of the following graph types: Rates, Totals, Analysis, Pressure, Cross-
Flows between FIP Regions, Run Statistics.
3. Make sure that the graph type set is Object item.
4. Select the Object Item required from a list (well connection (perforated interval),
well, group, FIELD).
5. Right-click the graph of interest to view a pop-down menu in which you check Use
Graph to Crossplots.
If you select a well connection [35, 14, 11] (perforated interval) (as shown in the
figure 125) ”[35, 14, 11] – Oil rate” will be added to Crossplots.
Figure 125. Adding well connection [35, 14, 11] Oil total Graph to Crossplots.
6. Then go the tab Crossplots.
8.8. Crossplots 207

17.3
7. In the drop-down menu, all the previously selected parameters will be available for
you to select parameters along the X-axis and the Y-axis.
8. Select the required parameters from the list.
Figure 126. Well connection crossplots.
In the figure 126 a graph of Oil rate (in Y) versus Water rate (in X) in the well connection
[35, 14, 11] is shown.
FIP Region Crossplots

To visualize a graph (figure 127):
1. Check FIP Crossplots.
2. Select a FIP Region from the drop-down menu.
3. From the drop-down menu, select the required parameters:
• Oil Rate / Oil Total;

• Water-Oil Ratio / Oil total;
• Oil cut / Oil Total.
4. Select a Type:
• Calculated;
• Historical;
• Hist.+Cal. (to see historical and calculated graphs in one window).
8.8. Crossplots 208

17.3
Figure 127. FIP Region Crossplots.
In the figure 127 a graph of water-oil Ratio (in Y) versus Oil total (in X) for FIP
Region 1 is shown.
8.8. Crossplots 209

17.3
8.9. Well profile

We recommend to use more powerful tool to work with graphs for connections – Well
Section.
Figure 128. Well profile.
For each well connection (perforated interval), you can visualize not only graphs, but also
a histogram of parameter values (oil rate, water rate, cumulative water, etc.) – a well profile.
At the top of the window, you can select a well; parameters are selected at the bottom.
The button Edit perforations is located on the panel on the right. Click this button
to open the Well Properties dialog, in which you can open or squeeze connections along the
well path.
The historical values of parameters for well connections (perforated intervals), if available,
can also be incorporated into the well profile.
Calculation of historical values of parameters for connection is described here.
A general list of parameters available:
• Perforations (perforated blocks are line-tinted);
• Available for connections graphs of tab Rates;
• Available for connections graphs of tab Totals;
• Available for connections graphs of tab Analytics;
• Available for connections graphs of tab Pressure;
• Logs (if they were loaded into model as Document. Load well data);
• all initial maps;
8.9. Well profile 210

17.3
• all calculated maps;
• Mismatches of the following parameters: Water, oil, liquid, gas rates, water, oil, gas
injection rates, water, oil, liquid, gas totals, water, oil, gas injection rates, bottom
hole pressure, block pressure.
Depth Scale.
Under the well name on the left, there are coordinates of the formation blocks with
well connections(perforated intervals) (METRIC: m, FIELD: ft). Next to them, there are two
scales. By default, they are two measured depth scales (there is a uniform scale on the right).
Measured Depth (MD).

For the first well connection (perforated interval), the depth is assumed to be equal to the
depth of the block; after that the well depth is calculated as a pseudo-length of the well, i.e.
distances between blocks with well connections (perforated intervals) (along the well bore).
For a vertical well, such pseudo-length coincides with the depth in (METRIC: m, FIELD: ft).
For a vertical well, the dimensions of a block with a well connection (perforated interval) are
proportional to the actual dimensions of the block along the Z-axis in (METRIC: m, FIELD:
ft). For a horizontal well, the dimensions are proportional to the block’s dimensions along
the X-axis or the Y-axis (along which the well path runs).
Settings button (figure 129).

4 scales can be displayed:
• well measured depth;
• well measured depth (uniform scale);
• grid block numbers;
• grid block absolute depth.
Check the required scales. You can move a scale to a different location, by clicking on
the scale’s name and holding the mouse button and moving the scale to the required location
in the Settings dialog. To display all the connections (perforated intervals) of the same size,
check Equal Size of All Perforations.

17.3
Figure 129. Well Profile. Settings.
At the top you can see the names of the parameters selected. Each parameter is marked
by a dedicated color. If you put the cursor on a block, its depth and XYZ coordinates, the
parameters’ values and units of measurement will be shown at the bottom.
To save the profile data to file, right-click the image (figure 130). Select:
• Copy Value;
• Copy Column;
• Copy All.
Then paste (Ctrl+V) the data copied to the preferred file, for example, to an Excel file.
If you select Copy Value, only one number will be pasted. If you select Copy Column, all
the values in the column will be pasted. If you select Copy All, all the values of all the
parameters in all the connections (perforated intervals) will be pasted.
On figure 131 it shows all the data pasted to Excel (Copy All). The rows show the depths
and coordinates of the blocks with well connections (perforated intervals) in well P8. The
columns show the parameters selected: Oil total, Water total, Liquid total.

17.3
Figure 130. Copying Well Profile Data.
Figure 131. Well profile data copied to Excel.

17.3
8.10. Well section

This tab allows to visualize well logs, RFT (MDT), PLT measurements (loadable formats are
described in the section Well Logs), and all available well graphs.
Well Section allows you to analyze in one window different parameters: for example,
Logs, rates, watercut, logs, block pressure, block permeability and other.
Figure 132. Well Section.
The following buttons are on the right panel:
• Synchronize Scales;
• Align scales by grid bounds;
• Align scales by trajectory bounds;
• Align scales by first track;
• Show graph paper;
• Draw grid.
See the training tutorial 3.2 How To Add LAS Use Well Section for the detailed
information.
8.10. Well section 214

17.3
8.10.1. Visualization of RFT (MDT)

The loadable format of RFT (MDT) measurements is described in the section RFT (MDT)
data.
In order to load RFT data follow the steps (see 133):

• Go to Document menu;
• Select Load Well Data;
• In the appeared dialog select Well Logs and load the file containing the RFT data.
Figure 133. Loading the RFT data.
After loading RFT data should be set on the Well Section. Check the box Well Logs.
Right mouse click on RFT_PRESSURE and select RFT in the appeared dialog. You can see
the distribution of RFT pressure along selected well as shown in the 134.
In addition, RFT can be used for history matching in order to create an Objective Func-
tion. See the detailed description and examples in the training tutorial 8.1 How To Use RFT
in History Matching and Assisted History Matching User Guide.
If RFT data are loaded to a model the additional option Well RFT Mismatch Table will
appeare on the tab Graph.
8.10.2. Visualization of PLT

The description of loadable format of PLT data is described in the section PLT data.
After loading PLT data should be set on the Well Section. :

• Check the box Well Logs.
8.10.1. Visualization of RFT (MDT) 215

17.3
Figure 134. The distribution of RFT pressure along wells.
• Right mouse click on PLT name and choose the type PLT (Oil, Gas, Water, Liquid) in
the pop-up menu Well Log Configure.
• Choose conditions (reservoir of surface).
Figure 135. PLT data for well.
In addition, PLT can be used for history matching in order to create an Objective Function.
See the detailed description and examples in the Assisted History Matching User Guide.
If PLT data are loaded to a model the additional option Well PLT Oil Mismatch Table
will appear on the tab Graph.
8.10.2. Visualization of PLT 216

17.3
8.11. User Arithmetics

User Arithmetic features help you to create custom graphs:
• FIELD property graphs;
• well graphs.
Detailed description of tNavigator arithmetic functions is presented in the section User

Arithmetic.
Graph settings can be assigned before a computation, during a computation pause

or at the end of calculations. A graph is visualized on fly during a simulation (if requested
in advance) or during the time slider movement back on the time bar (if graphs are set at the
end of calculations).
General operating principles are similar to the Graphs option.
Creating a New Graph:
1. Open the Graphs option, User Arithmetics tab.
2. To create a new graph, click New.
3. In the box Graph Arithmetics Command Line, put the formula for the graph required.
4. In with mask box, write the expression to determine the blocks for which the graph
will be visualized.
5. Click Apply.
6. If you right-click the graph name, you can set the graph color.
7. To the next graph.
Reservoir Properties Graphs.

Example 1:
1. Graph 1: avg(porv*(Soil-swat)) with mask: pressure > avg(pressure);
2. Graph 2: avg(porv*(Soil-swat)) with mask: Cut3 > 0;
3. Graph 3: avg(porv*(Soil-swat)) with mask: grow (wmc ("*", orat > 0), 3).
This will visualize a graph of the average product of effective pore volume and the
difference of oil saturation and water saturation for blocks in which:
1. The pressure is higher than average;
2. The pressure is lower than average (for example, filter Cut3 can be set as pressure <
avg (pressure));
8.11. User Arithmetics 217

17.3
Figure 136. Reservoir property graphs.
3. There are three layers of blocks around wells with oil rates different from zero.
Well Graphs.
Example 2:
1. Graph 1: wm("*", avg, orat) with mask: 1;
2. Graph 2: w("Well63", orat) with mask: 1;
3. Graph 3: wm("Well*", avg, wrat) with mask: 1;
4. Graph 4: wb(soil > avg(soil), avg, wrat) with mask: 1.
This will create a graph of:
1. average oil rate for all wells;
2. the oil rate of WELL63;
3. the average water rate for all the wells with the name starts with WELL;
4. the average water rate for all the wells that run through the grid blocks with oil
saturation higher than the reservoir’s average oil saturation.

17.3
Figure 137. Well Graphs.

17.3
8.12. Block Info

Using this tab you can select the required grid block for which you want to see graphs of
parameters calculated over time (select the block’s XYZ coordinates). Check the graphs you
want to visualize.
A graph up to the current date will use the data of current calculation, a graph after the
current date use data from previous calculations (if the model has been calculated earlier). If
the model has not been calculated before, the graphs will be shown up to the current time
step. In the inactive blocks, all the graphs are zero. The list of graphs, which can be shown,
depends on the model’s type (water-oil, water-gas, three-phase, compositional) and the list of
properties calculated for this type of the model.
Graphs are updated after each time step.
• Pressure (METRIC: bar, FIELD: psia);
• Saturation of oil;
• Saturation of water;
• Saturation of gas;
• Bubble point pressure (METRIC: bar, FIELD: psia);
• Dew point pressure (METRIC: bar, FIELD: psia);
• 1/FVF for oil (METRIC: m 3 /rm 3 , FIELD: stb/rb);
• 1/FVF for water (METRIC: m 3 /rm 3 , FIELD: stb/rb);
• 1/FVF for gas (METRIC: m 3 /rm 3 , FIELD: Mscf/rb);
• Solubility of gas (METRIC: m 3 /m 3 , FIELD: Mscf/stb);
• 1/viscosity of oil (METRIC: 1/cP, FIELD: 1/cP);
• 1/viscosity of water (METRIC: 1/cP, FIELD: 1/cP);
• 1/viscosity of gas (METRIC: 1/cP, FIELD: 1/cP);
• Mass density of oil (METRIC: kg/m 3 , FIELD: lb/ft 3 );
• Mass density of water (METRIC: kg/m 3 , FIELD: lb/ft 3 );
• Mass density of gas (METRIC: kg/m 3 , FIELD: lb/ft 3 );
• Pore volume (METRIC: rm 3 , FIELD: rb);
In the figure 138 graphs of various parameters for the block [13, 20, 8] are shown.
8.12. Block Info 220

17.3
Figure 138. Block Info Graphs.
8.12.1. Request of distributions of relative permeabilities and capillary pressures

tNavigator allows to create graphs of the following parameters for each grid block:
• Relative permeability of oil;
• Relative permeability of water;
• Relative permeability of gas;
• Capillary pressure of oil-gas (METRIC: bar, FIELD: psia);
• Capillary pressure of water-oil (METRIC: bar, FIELD: psia).
If in the model there is no option affected relative permeabilities then graphs of above
indicated parameters are available on the tab Block Info.
However, in case of ASP model (see ASP model description) is considered or one of key-
words MISCIBLE (see 12.1.65), VELDEP (see 12.1.7), LOWSALT (see 12.1.59), WAGHYSTR
(see 12.8.34), DPCDT (see 12.1.127) is used in the model or parameter HYSTER of the key-
word SATOPTS (see 12.1.71) is defined then to request distributions of oil relative perme-
ability (KRO), gas relative permeability (KRG), water relative permeability (KRW), oil–water
capillary pressure (PCOW) and oil–gas capillary pressure (PCOG) you should use the key-
word RPTMAPS (see 12.15.51).

1. Prior to load a model, add the following lines to the model’s *.data file:
RPTMAPS
KRO KRG KRW PCOW PCOG /
8.12.1. Request of distributions of relative permeabilities and capillary pressures 221

17.3
2. After reloading the model (to read the changes in the *.data file) and runing a compu-
tation distributions of selected values will be visible on the tab Block Info.
8.12.1. Request of distributions of relative permeabilities and capillary pressures 222

17.3
8.13. Profile info

This tab allows to select a profile from previously created profiles (Create a Profile). As you
unfold the profile, you will see graphs for selected by parameter at the current time step. You
can select parameters from the Grid Properties option.
• Pressure (METRIC: bar, FIELD: psia);
• Saturation of oil;
• Saturation of water;
• Saturation of gas;
• Bubble point pressure (METRIC: bar, FIELD: psia);
• 1/FVF for oil (METRIC: m 3 /rm 3 , FIELD: stb/rb);
• 1/FVF for water (METRIC: m 3 /rm 3 , FIELD: stb/rb);
• 1/FVF for gas (METRIC: m 3 /rm 3 , FIELD: Mscf/rb);
• Solubility of gas (METRIC: m 3 /m 3 , FIELD: Mscf/stb);
• 1/viscosity of oil (METRIC: 1/cP, FIELD: 1/cP);
• 1/viscosity of water (METRIC: 1/cP, FIELD: 1/cP);
• 1/viscosity of gas (METRIC: 1/cP, FIELD: 1/cP);
• Mass density of oil (METRIC: kg/m 3 , FIELD: lb/ft 3 );
• Mass density of water (METRIC: kg/m 3 , FIELD: lb/ft 3 );
• Mass density of gas (METRIC: kg/m 3 , FIELD: lb/ft 3 );
• Relative permeability of oil;
• Relative permeability of water;
• Relative permeability of gas;
• Capillary pressure of oil-gas (METRIC: bar, FIELD: psia);
• Capillary pressure of water-oil (METRIC: bar, FIELD: psia);
• Pore volume (METRIC: rm 3 , FIELD: rb);
8.13. Profile info 223

17.3
The horizontal axis shows block numbers in the order of their location in the profile. The
vertical axis shows the parameter block’s average value (Z-axis), the sum of the parameter
blocks’ values (Z-axis) or parameter layer values (the layer number can be selected in the
pop-down menu). Sum, Average, or Layer is selected in the drop-down menu under the list
of parameters.
The graphs are updated after each time step.
In the figure 139 average pressure and oil saturation graphs for Profile 1 are shown. It
can be noticed that the lowest pressure value is near producer and the highest pressure value
is near injector.
Figure 139. Profile Info Graphs.
8.13. Profile info 224

17.3
8.14. Pressure/Temperature Slices

This tab is mainly used for program checkout. In addition to the major parameters listed
in the Graphs section, there is a Pressure/Temperature Slices tab in the Graphs option of
thermal models.
Pressure/Temperature Slices Tab (for compositional thermal models only).

The tab shows various parameters (oil saturation, water saturation, bubble-point pres-
sure, viscosity, relative permeabilities, capillary pressure, etc.) under various temperature and
pressure conditions for each grid block.
A first mouse click on the tab opens the window below.
Figure 140. Pressure/Temperature Slices Graphs.
If you go to another graph tab and click the Pressure/Temperature Slices tab again, this
window will not open automatically. To open it, click Graph Parameters on the right
panel.
In this dialog, you can set the following slice parameters:
• Pressure and Temperature. There are three options:
1. Fix pressure (Fix P) (define the pressure value in the Value field), the graph will
cover all temperatures from the minimum to the maximum within the range set;
2. Fix temperature (Fix T) (define the temperature value in the Value field); the
graph will cover all pressure values from the minimum to the maximum within
the range set;
8.14. Pressure/Temperature Slices 225

17.3
3. Fix pressure and temperature (Fix P and T) (define the pressure and the
temperature in the Value fields).
• Component Molar Densities. Drag the slider to set them.
• N points. The number of points into which the temperature/pressure range is subdi-
vided.
After setting the parameters required, click Apply. An example is shown in the figure 141:
the pressure is fixed at 200, the temperature varies from 10 to 100. The number of points is
101.
With the pressure (and/or temperature) fixed, you can review the values of various param-
eters (the required parameters should be checked) for any block. The pressure/temperature
range is subdivided into the specified number of points. Parameter values are shown in the
graphs and in the table on the right.
Figure 141. Slices for the block [14, 1, 4].
8.14. Pressure/Temperature Slices 226

17.3
8.15. Historical vs. Calculated (Hist vs Calc)

This tab compares historical versus calculated production and injection parameters. The X-
axis shows calculated values, the Y-axis shows historical values. There is a drop-down menu
in which you can select one of the graphs listed below:
• Oil rate;
• Water rate;
• Gas rate;
• Liquid rate;
• Water injected rate;
• Gas injected rate;
• Oil total;
• Water total;
• Gas total;
• Liquid total;
• Water injected total;
• Gas injected total;
• Oil injected total;
• Tubing-head pressure;
• Bottom hole pressure.

Graphs can be visualized for Wells or Groups (of wells) (depending on your selection from
the drop-down menu).
Legend.
The green line is the bisecting line of the angle. For wells on that line, historical values
equal the calculated ones.
The red lines show deviations from the bisector (by default, the deviations should be
at least 10 per cent (the tolerance level). Wells in the sector between the red lines (green
squares) are considered to have an acceptable difference between the calculated parameter
and the historical one. Wells outside that sector have major differences between the historical
parameter and the calculated one (red squares).
Wells inside the black rectangle are medium-productivity wells (not classified as key
producers – see below).
Wells inside the second black rectangle are low-productivity wells (with rates below the
minimum rate set – see below). Initially, there is no second black rectangle.
8.15. Historical vs. Calculated (Hist vs Calc) 227

17.3
Figure 142. Calculated and Historical Graphs.
Tables on the right. The green rows show history-matched wells (inside the red-line
sector), the red rows show non-history-matched wells (outside the red-line sector), the gray
rows are low-productivity wells.
Graph Settings.
Tolerance. You can set acceptable deviations of calculated parameters from historical ones
(tolerance level). The default deviation margin is 10 percent. The tolerance is set separately
for high-productivity and middle-productivity wells. In the figure 142 the tolerance is set
equal to 5% for high-productivity wells and 10% for medium-productivity wells. You can
see the difference in the red lines inside and outside the black rectangle.
Basic wells - Key producers (the default setting is 10% of the total well count). The
number of key producers is calculated as follows:
1. Sum up the calculated parameters of all the wells. For example, Oil total of well 1 is
A 1 , Oil total of well 2 is A 2 . The sum for all wells is: A 1 +A 2 +...+A N = A.
2. The number of key producers (B) is 10% of A. B = 0.1 · A.
3. Take the wells in the decreasing order of the parameter in question (e.g. Oil total). Add
Oil total parameters of well until you reach the volume of B. For example, you have
summed up the values A 3 , A 80 , A 30 , A 20 (Oil total values of wells 3, 80, 30 and 20
– in the descending order of Oil total).
4. The wells thus selected (well 3, 80, 30, and 20 in this example) are the key producers
and are high-productivity wells. Other wells are classified as medium-productivity
wells.

17.3
Middle rate. Calculate the average oil production rate for the medium-productivity wells.
Min rate. The default setting is zero. If you set a minimum higher than zero, all the
wells with oil rates smaller than the minimum set will be classified as low-productivity
wells (black squares) – see figure 142.
Hide matched. This will hide history-matched wells (the green squares between the red
lines).
Hide low-rate ones. This will hide low-productivity wells.
Color table rows. Green rows are history-matched wells (between the red lines), red
rows are wells not history-matched (outside the red lines).
Visualization options. You can set color, size and symbols to denote objects.
If you need to display only some of the wells (e.g., high-productivity wells only), create
a Well Filter. Then only filter-selected wells will be shown.

17.3
8.16. Unified History Matching Results

This tab contains a history-match results table for all wells and parameters:
• Oil total;
• Water total;
• Gas total;
• Liquid total;
• Oil rate;
• Gas rate;
• Water rate;
• Liquid rate;
• Water injection rate;
• Gas injection rate
• Water-cut total;
• Water injection total;
• Gas injection total;
• THP – tubing-head pressure;
• BHP – bottom hole pressure.
For each parameter of each well, the table displays calculated and historical values,
relative and absolute mismatches, and units are specified. The data are updated at every step
of a computation. After the computation is completed, you can drag the slider to the required
step and review the history-match table at that step.
Absolute Mismatch = Calculated Value – Historical Value.
Relative Mismatch = |Calculated Value – Historical Value| · 100%.

Historical Value
In the figure 143 a part of a summary history match table for Liquid Total is shown.
8.16. Unified History Matching Results 230

17.3
Figure 143. Unified History-Match Table.
If you want the summary history-match table to show data for the required wells, set a
Well Filter. The table will show wells covered by the filter.
You can sort data in the history-match table in the ascending or descending order of a
parameter. To sort, click the title of the column to be sorted (Calc., Hist., Rel. Res., Abs.
Res.). A triangle pointing up indicates that the data has been sorted ascending. If you want
to change the sorting to descending, click the column’s name again (you will see a triangle
pointing down) (figure 144).
Columns of Unified History Matching Table can be moved around.

You can change the order of the columns using the Preferences button on the
right panel. By holding the left button on the mouse, you can drag the column titles and
arrangement in the order preferred. This will change the arrangement of the columns in the
table accordingly.

17.3
Figure 144. History-match table sorted in the order of increasing relative mismatch.
Figure 145. Changing the arrangement of columns in the history-match table.
Search well in the history-match table.

Click the button Find a Well/conn. Start typing the well name, and the wells with names
matching with the typed symbols will be highlighted in blue and moved to the top of the list.
The table’s row with the selected well will be highlighted in blue – see figure 146.

17.3
Figure 146. Search P1 well in the history-match table.

17.3
8.17. Comparison of Results

You can use this tab, if results from a different model have been loaded in this model. The
table shows the main cumulative values of parameters for each model and their differences
from the original one.
Use the button Settings to select:
• Parameters:
– Oil total;
– Water total;
– Liquid total;
– Gas total;
– Injected water total;
– Average pressure.
• Differences from the base model:
– Absolute values;
– Relative values.
• Time steps:
– All;
– 1, 5, 15 years;
– First and last steps;
– Periodically (assign the period).
8.17. Comparison of Results 234

17.3
Figure 147. Comparison of results.
8.17. Comparison of Results 235

17.3
8.18. Well RFT Mismatch Table

This table shows the mismatch between calculated and measured RFT pressure data. This
tab is enable if RFT (MDT) measurement were loaded to the model.
See the detailed description and examples in the training tutorial 8.1 How To Use RFT in
History Matching.
If zones (ZONES, see 12.4.28) are specified this data will be calculated for zones. If
reservoirs are specified this data will be calculated for reservoirs as well (different zones can
be combined into reservoirs in ZONES keyword).
8.18. Well RFT Mismatch Table 236

17.3
8.19. Well PLT Oil Mismatch Table

This table shows the mismatch between calculated and measured PLT pressure data. This tab
is available if PLT data are loaded to the model.
8.19. Well PLT Oil Mismatch Table 237

17.3
8.20. Tracers
Tracer graphs are only available if tracers are set for the model (with the keywords TRACER
(see 12.7.1), WTRACER (see 12.18.154), TRACERS (see 12.1.44), TBLK (see 12.15.39),
TNUM (see 12.15.40), TVDP, see 12.15.41), or if there are lumped pseudocomponents and
their original components are monitored as tracers (keyword LUMPING, see 12.13.9), or if
any of these is specified via GUI. For more information see training courses 2.2 How To
Interactive Tracer Injection, 2.3 How To Use Tracers Via Keywords.
The parameters for each tracer:

• Tracer production rate (tracer production from this well during the time step) (METRIC:
m 3 /day, FIELD: stb/day);
• Tracer production concentration (tracer content in the fluid produced) (METRIC: kg/kg,
FIELD: lb/lb);
• Tracer injection rate (tracer injection into this well during the time step) (METRIC:
m 3 /day, FIELD: stb/day);
• Tracer injection concentration (tracer content in the injection stream (METRIC: kg/kg,
FIELD: lb/lb);
• Tracer production total (cumulative tracer production from this well) (METRIC: m 3 ,
FIELD: stb);
• Tracer injection total (cumulative tracer injection into this well) (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD:
stb).
Figure 148. Tracer Graphs.
8.20. Tracers 238

17.3
8.21. User selection

This tab contains user-selected graphs from other tabs (Rates, Totals, etc.). Initially the user
selection is empty.
To add a graph to the User Selection, right-click the graph’s title and select the feature
Add to User Selection (see figure 149).
Figure 149. Adding a graph to the User Selection.
Go to the User Selection tab, where all previously selected graphs are. In the figure 150,
there are three graphs in the User Selection: Oil rate, Water and Oil totals.
To remove a graph from the User Selection, right-click the graph’s name and select Re-
move (figure 151). Selecting Clear List will remove all the graphs from the User Selection.
A User Selection will be saved for the model, when the model is closed and re-opened.
8.21. User selection 239

17.3
Figure 150. User selection.
8.22. Aquifers
See the detailed description in the section Inflow from aquifer of tNav User Manual.
This tab displays the graphs listed below for each aquifer (if there are no aquifers in the
model, this tab will not be shown):
• Accumulative influx - cumulative water inflow (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: ft 3 );
• Instant influx - step water inflow (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: ft 3 );
• Instant influx rate - instantaneous water inflow (METRIC: m 3 , FIELD: ft 3 );
• Pressure (METRIC: bar, FIELD: psi).
8.22. Aquifers 240

17.3
Figure 151. Removing graphs from the User Selection.
8.22. Aquifers 241

17.3
Figure 152. Aquifer.
8.22. Aquifers 242

17.3
9. Load Well Data

In this section there is a description of well data that can loaded in graphical interface via
the menu Document. Load Well Data.
Well data can be loaded into the model from the text files using Schedule files dialog:
Layers, Trajectories, Groups, Events, History, History–FHF Format, Well Logs (LAS, RFT,
PLT and other formats).
See examples in the following training tutorials:
• 3.1 How To Update Schedule;
• 3.2 How To Add LAS Use Well Section;
• 3.3 How To Load Well Data From Scratch;
• 8.2 How To Use RFT in History Matching.
9.1. Layers
File type: Layers.
File format – .txt.
Data description: layer name; z1-z2 (numbers along Z, to which this layer corresponds).
’Layer_1’1-1
’Layer_2’2-2
’Layer_3’3-3
’Layer_4’4-4
9. Load Well Data 243

17.3
9.2. Trajectories
9.2.1. GWTD
File type: GWTD.
Data description: measured depth; x, y, z (negative).
Well name: WELL1

3335.08379542 50133.99849282 57365.78811816 -3331.36235500
3350.53042953 50131.05636316 57365.30935266 -3346.51853724
3356.13983138 50129.97016088 57365.15669689 -3352.01963798
3364.20096452 50128.40792386 57364.95680241 -3359.92539399
9.2.2. Trajectory
File type: Trajectory.
File format – .dat, .txt.
Data description: well name; X; Y; Z (absolute depth); MD (depth along the well bore).
Example 1.
welltrack ’WELL1’
100 110 2500.0 2500.000
100 110 2510 2510
100 110 2530 2540;
Example 2.
Load trajectory for multilateral well. First the data do the main branch goes. Then the data
for additional branches goes. Branch number is set after two-spot sign.
9.2. Trajectories 244

17.3
WELLTRACK ’WU20’
3467.0031 -1259.4248 0 0
3467.0031 -1259.4248 1430.9964 1430.9964
3470.4462 -1260.7414 1443.0729 1443.6230
3475.6100 -1262.7161 1454.4392 1456.2628
3473.8894 -1262.0579 1471.3463 1473.2700 /
/
WELLTRACK ’WU20:1’
3467.0031 -1259.4248 1430.9964 1430.9964
3317.2285-1202.1550 1440.6577 1591.6377
3124.4150 -1128.4284 1447.3353 1798.1739
2967.7541 -1068.5256 1450.3189 1965.9234
2795.5993 -1002.6983 1452.4500 2150.2466 /
/
9.2.3. LAS
File type: LAS.
File format – .las.
Data description: Standard las-format (X, Y, absolute depth, measured depth). The order of
the columns can be changed in the emerging dialogue.
9.2.3. LAS 245

17.3
~Version Information
#---------------------------------------------
VERS. 1.2:
WRAP. NO:
~Well Information
#--------------------------------------------
#MNEM.UNIT DATA INFORMATION
#--------- ------------------- -------------
STRT.M 10.00: Top Depth
STOP.M 2288.00: Bottom Depth
STEP.M 10.00: Increment
NULL. -999.25: Null Value
UWI. UNIQE WELL ID: 3070010341
WELL. Well: 107L
DATE. Date: 15022009
COMP. Company:
FLD. FIELD NAME:
LOC. LOCATION:
PROV. Province:
SRVC. Company:
~Other Information
#---------------------------------------------
~A
2500 100 110 2500
2510 100 110 2510
2540 100 110 2530
9.2.4. Generalized
File type: Generalized. File format – .dev.
Data description: Generalized GWTD format. Well names must begin with WELLNAME:
(any letters size). The order of the columns can be changed in the emerging dialogue. Values
Z are not negative. It is possible to check the box Reverse Z in the dialogue.
9.2.4. Generalized 246

17.3
WELLNAME: ’WELL1’
1.030384e+007 5733795 -135.7 -135.7
1.030384e+007 5733795 -110.7 -110.7
1.030384e+007 5733795 -85.7 -85.7
1.030384e+007 5733795 -60.7 -60.7
1.030384e+007 5733795 -35.7 -35.7
1.030384e+007 5733795 -10.7 -10.7
9.2.5. Dip-circle
File type: Dip-circle.
File format – .trj.
Data description: measured depth, angle (between Z-axis and well vector), azimuth (angle
between Y-axis and well vector in X direction). Well names must correspond to the file
names.
20 0.75 206.50
40 1.00 206.50
60 1.50 206.50
80 4.50 206.50
100 9.75 206.50
120 11.00 205.50
140 13.12 205.50
160 15.25 206.50
9.2.6. WellHead
File type: WellHead.
WellHead file must be loaded if Dip-circle file is loaded.
Data description: well name, altitude z0 and wellhead coordinates (x0, y0). Columns and
their order can be selected in the emerging dialogue.
9.2.5. Dip-circle 247

17.3
40R 57 33025.7 23427.2

3359 54.7 31384.3 20405.9
3405 57.3 30162.1 20212.8
3451 54.7 31386.8 20401.8
3452 61.5 30890.9 21500.9
9.2.6. WellHead 248

17.3
9.3. Groups
9.3.1. Well – Group
File type: Well – Group.
Data description: well name; group to which this well belongs.
’WELL1’ ’SAT-1’
9.3.2. Group – Wells

File type: Group – Wells.
Data description: group name; wells which belong to this group.
’GRUP1’ ’PROD1’ ’PROD2’ ’PROD8’ ’PROD9’

’GRUP2’ ’INJ1’ ’INJ2’ ’INJ3’ ’INJ4’ ’INJ5’
’GRUP3’ ’WPR1’ ’WPR9’ ’WPR17’
’GRUP4’ ’WELSEGM3’
9.3.3. Group – Parent Group

File type: Group – Parent Group.
Data description: group name; parent group name.
’GRUP1’ ’GRUP4’
9.3. Groups 249

17.3
9.4. Events
File type: Events – Table.
Data description: well name; branch, date; event; layer; lower depth; upper depth; radius;
diameter; skin; multiplier.
Columns that are in the file should be selected in the drop-down menu. Order of boxes can
be changed (in accordance with the data in the file).
Possible events:
• perf – open connections in all grid blocks where the trajectory intersects grid. Lower
depth and upper depth should be specified;
• sque – shut connections in all grid blocks where the trajectory intersects grid. Lower
depth and upper depth should be specified;
• plug – open connections in all grid blocks where the trajectory intersects grid. Upper
depth should be specified, lower depth is calculated as the end of the trajectory;
• bare – shut connections in all grid blocks where the trajectory intersects grid. Upper
depth should be specified, lower depth is calculated as the end of the trajectory.
Example 1.
WELL1 1.7.1997 perforation 3354.8 3358.8 0.2 -3

WELL1 1.7.1997 perforation 3383 3390.6 0.2 -3
Example 2.
Load perforations for multilateral wells. For the main well branch (first row) the default ranch
number is used 1∗; the next branch is set via number – 1. For each branch we set depth
for perforated interval. Please choose branch for the corresponding column in the graphical
interface.
’WU20’ 01.07.2012 1* 1440 1473 PERF 0.16

’WU20’ 01.07.2012 1 1430 2150 PERF 0.16
9.4. Events 250

17.3
Additional Settings.
• Replace missing values with zero. If this option is used, the parameters for the well
that are missing in the file on the specific date will be replaced with zeros.
• Data Filter. If Data Filter is used, then historical data will be loaded only in the
specified time period, including the First Date and the Last Date.
9.4. Events 251

17.3
9.5. Well History

9.5.1. History table
File type: Prod. history table.
Data description: well name; date; oil rate; water rate; gas rate; liquid rate; gas injection;
water injection; THP; BHP; well efficiency factor; polymer injection, enthalpy and other
parameters.
Columns that are in the file should be selected in the drop-down menu. Order of boxes can
be changed (in accordance with the data in the file).
Example 1. How loaded historical data is used.

--Well Date WOPRH WWPRH WWIR

WELL15 01.10.2014 19.6224 130.378 0
WELL15 01.11.2014 19.1517 130.848 0
WELL15 01.12.2014 18.7443 131.256 0
In this example we load historical data for WELL15: oil rate (column WOPRH), water
rate (column WWPRH) and water injection rate (column WWIR).
Loading the data in this format we consider that the well works in the following way:
• Oil rate 19.6224 sm3 /day and Water rate 130.378 sm3 /day, from 01.10.2014 to
01.11.2014;
• Oil rate 19.1517 sm3 /day and Water rate 130.848 sm3 /day, from 01.11.2014 to
01.12.2014;
• Oil rate 18.7443 sm3 /day and Water rate 131.256 sm3 /day, from the date 01.12.2014.
Two scenarios are possible:
• If the last date in the model is 01.12.2014, then the rates from the last line are
not taken into consideration in cumulative production calculation. Oil cumulative
production from 01.10.2014 is calculated as 19.6224 ∗ 31 + 19.1517 ∗ 30 (only Octo-
ber+November). To take December into account add the last date 01.01.2015 to
the model (DATES, see 12.18.110).
• If the last date in the model is 01.01.2015, then the rates from the last line are
taken into consideration in cumulative production calculation. Oil cumulative pro-
duction from 01.10.2014 is calculated as 19.6224 ∗ 31 + 19.1517 ∗ 30 + 18.7443 ∗ 31
(October+November+December).
Note. In graphical interface on the Graphs tab in the table on the right rates are visualized
with date shift, see the picture 153.
9.5. Well History 252

17.3
Figure 153. Load historical data
Example 2. Additional Settings.
--Well Date WOPRH WWPRH WWIR

WELL15 01.06.2014 26.2376 123.341 0
WELL15 01.07.2014 24.5654 0
WELL15 01.09.2014 20.1092 129.891 0
• Replace missing values with zero. If this option is used, the parameters for the well
that are missing in the file on the specific date will be replaced with zeros. In the
example above for the date 01.07.2014 water rate (column WWPRH) of the WELL15
is considered as zero. If this option is not used then water rate at this date is equal to
the value from previous time step (01.06.2014).
• Apply historical data to previous step. If this option is used all values will be shifted
to the previous time step.
• Assign zero values to model dates missing in historical data. In the example above
there is no historical data for the date 01.08.2014. If this date exists in the model and
this option is used then oil, water rate and water injection rate will be equal to zero at
9.5.1. History table 253

17.3
this date. If this option is not used then the rates at the date 01.08.2014 will be equal
to their values at the previous time step (01.07.2014).
• Data Filter. If Data Filter is used, then historical data will be loaded only in the
specified time period, including the First Date and the Last Date.
• WEFac Units. If well efficiency factor is set in Days then it is divided by number of
days in a month to convert to Relative.
• Time Units. If Month time units are used then day rates are calculated as:
monthrate
monthdays ∗W EFAC
where:
– monthrate – month rate;

– monthdays – number of days in a month;
– W EFAC – well efficiency factor.
9.5.1. History table 254

17.3
9.5.2. History – FHF Format

File type: Prod. and Pressure history.
File format – .fhf.
Data description: date; gas rate; oil rate; water rate; BHP.
2013 12 10
’4600 Production and Pressure’
2011 12 10
’YYYY/MM/DD’
4
’Oil Rate SC’ ’Gas Rate SC’ ’Water Rate SC’ ’Well BHP’
’bbl/day’ ’ft3/day’ ’bbl/day’ ’psi’
’E1’
2011/12/10 0 0 0 10362
2011/12/17 2999 4512234 0 10068
2011/12/18 8411 8117802 0 9694
2011/12/19 5140 3468024 0 9965
2011/12/20 2812 4490000 0 10148
2011/12/21 2825 4248000 0 10156
2011/12/22 2758 4358000 0 10154
2011/12/23 1261 1872542 0 10171
2011/12/26 2439 2163277 0 10197

2011/12/27 2471 3970000 0 10181
2011/12/28 2490 4180000 0 10174
2011/12/29 1676 2924000 0 10156
2011/12/30 4390 6100000 0 10011
2011/12/31 3032 5982000 0 10042
2012/01/01 6827 14256000 0 9776
2012/01/02 4547 8027000 0 9684
9.5.2. History – FHF Format 255

17.3
9.6. Well Logs

This tab can be used to load well logs (las, RFT (MDT), PLT data). Well trajectories should
be loaded in advance.
After loading data can be visualized on the Well Section.
9.6.1. Well Logs (LAS)

Well trajectories should be loaded in advance.
File type: Well Logs (LAS).

File format – .las.
Data description: Standard las-format.
9.6. Well Logs 256

17.3
# LAS format log file from PETREL

# Project units are specified as depth units
#===========================================
~Version information
VERS. 2.0:
WRAP. NO:
#===========================================
~Well
STRT .m 1570.2999268 :
STOP .m 1791.7999268 :
STEP .m 0.00000000 :
NULL . -999.250000 :
COMP. : COMPANY
WELL. 1 : WELL
FLD. : FIELD
LOC. : LOCATION
SRVC. : SERVICE COMPANY
DATE. Friday, April 01 2011 11:47:28 : DATE
PROV. : PROVINCE
UWI. OR__1 : UNIQUE WELL ID
API. : API NUMBER
#===========================================
~Curve
DEPT .m : DEPTH
Facies_west . : Facies_west
KINT_west .mD : KINT_west
PHIE_west .m3/m3 : PHIE_west
SW_west . : SW_west
SW1_west . : SW1_west
~Parameter
#===========================================
~Ascii
1570.29992 -999.25 -999.250000 -999.250000 -999.25 -999.25
1570.30993 1.00000 0.5490000248 0.1199999973 -999.25 -999.25
1570.31994 1.00000 0.5490000248 0.1199999973 -999.25 -999.25
1570.32995 1.00000 0.5490000248 0.1199999973 -999.25 -999.25
1570.33996 1.00000 0.5490000248 0.1199999973 -999.25 -999.25
1570.34997 1.00000 0.5490000248 0.1199999973 -999.25 -999.25
9.6.1. Well Logs (LAS) 257

17.3
9.6.2. RFT (MDT) data

RFT – repeat formation tester. Pressure distribution along the well bore.

File type: RFT (MDT) pressure measurement.

Data description: well name, measured depth, pressure on this depth, date.
If RFT measurement date is before 0 time step then tNavigator assigns RFT data to zero
time step.
Wellname Depth Pressure Date

WELL10 1709.59 157.293 15.12.2008
WELL10 1712.43 157.48 15.12.2008
WELL10 1714.55 157.307 15.12.2008
WELL10 1719.20 150.262 15.12.2008
WELL10 1720.58 150.075 15.12.2008
9.6.2. RFT (MDT) data 258

17.3
9.6.3. PLT data

File type: PLT measurement.

Data description: well name, measured depth, PLT on this depth, date.
Date Well MD PLT Data

01.10.2012 WELL10 1612.47 182.4967882
01.10.2012 WELL10 1615.26 180.4104282
01.10.2012 WELL10 1617.35 177.7306382
01.10.2012 WELL10 1621.83 177.5707322
01.10.2012 WELL10 1623.19 176.9214752
01.10.2012 WELL10 1624.89 176.8391723
01.10.2012 WELL10 1626.58 176.2527893
01.10.2012 WELL10 1628.28 162.8627893
01.10.2012 WELL10 1629.63 146.1421893
01.10.2012 WELL10 1630.65 132.9121893
01.10.2012 WELL10 1630.99 130.2158993
01.10.2012 WELL10 1631.59 127.6786893
01.10.2012 WELL10 1632.8 122.5945993
01.10.2012 WELL10 1634.23 98.9491993
01.10.2012 WELL10 1636.63 80.3085993
01.10.2012 WELL10 1638.54 76.0046793
01.10.2012 WELL10 1641.41 75.0228463
01.10.2012 WELL10 1646.16 74.9250529
01.10.2012 WELL10 1649.52 74.83493
01.10.2012 WELL10 1652.32 73.1231
01.10.2012 WELL10 1655.68 41.3397
01.10.2012 WELL10 1657.36 28.1997
01.10.2012 WELL10 1658.48 14.3562
PLT (Production Logging Tools) is a set of tools: for temperature and GR measurements,
spinner, etc. However, some other logging tools can provide similar information, which can
be used for matching as well. Actually, Production Technologists often use PLT to calculate
a split ratio between reservoirs.
Notice that it is possible to work only with interpreted PLT data. Usually, PLT has many
measurements (passes). Each pass contains few spinner measurements since conventional PLT
9.6.3. PLT data 259

17.3
set has at least two spinners. Interpreted PLT log is rate per meter (ft) m3/d/m. Sometimes it
calls Production Profile.
Production profile can be cumulative from bottom to top for time of measurement, and
be at reservoir or surface conditions.
Moreover, typical the PLT report contains three different production profiles for three
different regimes (surface rates). Sometimes, they can be significantly different. You have to
use one, which regime is closer to real well rate. The matching will be more accurate, if
model contains more realistic rates. Therefore, it will be better using daily production rates
instead of calendar rates. In this case, model has to have a well’s efficiency coefficient.
It is no required to have absolute matching of PLT data. We should care about ratio
between layers only.
The most effective way using the PLT matching is commingled wells, where a production
from each reservoir is unknown.
9.6.3. PLT data 260

17.3
10. Waterflood
The Waterflood option provides the following possibility for estimation of waterflood and
optimization of injection:
• drainage table (for each producer there is a list of all injectors connected with it and
flow from the injectors to the producers; for each injector there is a list of all producer
connected with it and a flow);
• drainage graph (it shows the injection volume for each injector and the oil produced
as a result of such injection from all the producers connected with the injector through
stream lines; for each producer, it shows the volume of oil produced from it due to
influence from all the injectors connected with the injector through stream lines);
• drainage matrix (the interaction of pairs of production and injection wells, the volume
of flows between them).
Drainage table, graph and matrix are constructed based on streamlines. Streamlines are
mathematical abstraction depending on the defined density of streamlines. So the drainage
table, graph and matrix are more qualitative then quantitative estimation of efficiency of the
injection system. It allows to estimate the direction of the pressure support in the reservoir
(implicit picture of waterflood).
A drainage matrix, graph and/or table can be calculated from any time step to any
other time step. They can be calculated for a previously calculated model or during a model
computation. A drainage matrix, graph, and/or table can be cumulative (with cumulative data
from any step to any other step) or instantaneous (for a single time step).
If you need to calculate a drainage matrix, graphs, or table for the required period, put
the time slider at the time step from which you need to calculate, check Up to Step and
select the number of the final time step. Click Calculate button below the drainage matrix.
This will create an instantaneous drainage, graphs, and/or table for any time step.
Additional features:
• balancing (water injection optimization);
• compensation (water injection optimization through balancing of average reservoir
pressure).
For effective work we recommend to combine explicit and implicit methods of water-
flood analysis:
1. explicit approach – tracer analysis. This method allows to mark all injected water via
tracers. This method gives a possibility to analyze in which directions water spreads
and in which producers there is a water breakthrough. The following keywords can
be used TRACER (see 12.7.1), TRACERM (see 12.7.2), TRACEROPTS (see 12.7.3),
TRMMULTT (see 12.7.12), TRMTEMP (see 12.7.13), TRDCY (see 12.7.14), TRADS
(see 12.7.15);
10. Waterflood 261

17.3
2. implicit approach – streamlines, drainage table, graph, matrix that dive the information
about directions of field pressure support in general.
10. Waterflood 262

17.3
10.1. Stream Lines. Stream Line Settings

Streamlines are mathematical abstraction depending on the defined density of streamlines.
Streamlines are calculated based on the computed pressure potential using the particle track-
ing method. To get more detailed picture it is necessary to decrease the density of streamlines.
The specifics of the present approach are the following:
• The discrete number of lines will be constructed for the defined rate.
For example, let’s consider the case when 1 streamline corresponds to 5 cubic meters
(i.e. density). For the well with a rate equals to 14 cubic meters 2 streamlines will be
created. The rest 4 cubic meters (14 − 2 × 5) will be considered as corresponding to
the reservoir. This can be seen in a drainage table.
• Tracking based on the pressure potential does not take into account a compound chang-
ing along stream lines.
Stream lines can be displayed in 2D or 3D. To visualize streamlines, check Stream
Lines on the visualization settings panel. Stream lines can be turned on before or during a
computation or on a computation pause. During a computation, you can see the stream lines
changing.
To see stream lines in 3D, it is necessary to tick off Show Grid.
Figure 154. Stream lines.
Stream lines can have different color in accordance with wells. Stream lines can be vi-
sualized only for wells which selected by stream line filter. See examples in the training
tutorial 2.1 How To Manage Waterflood.
10.1. Stream Lines. Stream Line Settings 263

17.3
Creating a Stream Line.

The movement of particle (e.g. a molecule) of fluid phase (e.g., oil, water, or gas) is
observed during a period of time. The particle’s positions are recorded at time moments and
connected with straight lines. If you start drawing a stream line from an injection well, the
movement of the particle should be observed during a future period. If streamline starts from
an injection well then the movement of the particle will be observed during a future period
of time. If streamline starts from a production well then the movement of the particle will
be observed during a prior (past) period of time (before the particle reaches a producer’s
perforated interval).
A drainage matrix, a drainage graph, or a drainage table (drainage efficiency) are gener-
ated based on stream lines.
Stream lines settings. To change settings click on or on the top panel open Doc-
ument. Preferences and select the Stream Lines tab. After setting the required parameters
click Apply, OK.
Figure 155. Stream Lines Setting.
Main Parameters.
• Line width is set by the number pixels.
• Density defines the number of stream lines go from the well (in m 3 per stream line).
The number of stream lines through the facet of block with a connection is calculated
10.1. Stream Lines. Stream Line Settings 264

17.3
by dividing the fluid flow through the facet by the density. (You can estimate the
number of stream lines by dividing the well’s rate by the density). The increase in the
density leads to the decrease in the shown number of streamlines.
• Trace from – start drawing a stream line with a producer or an injector.
• Phases – set the phases (oil, water, gas) for which the stream lines are to be drawn.
• Checking Show All Stream Lines on 2D Map will allow you to view stream lines in
all the layers of the 2D visualization type Layer simultaneously.
For Sum, Average, RMS 2D types all lines of each layer are white.
For Layer type parts of lines, which go through this layer, are shown white, through
layers above – red and through layers below – blue.
• Apply Cut to stream lines. If you apply a cut, the model will only show stream lines
for the area selected by the Cut. To use this feature:
1. Create a Cut (Maps. Cuts);

2. Uncheck Show Grid;
3. Check Stream Lines;
4. Use the Cut (check Use Cut and select Cut in the drop-down menu);
5. In the Stream Lines Settings check Apply Cut to Stream Lines. Only the
stream lines for the area selected by the Cut will be shown.
Advanced settings:
• Flux tolerance. This field is used as follows: if the stream volume flowing through a
face of a block is smaller than the density to the error quotient, there is no stream line
running through the face.
• Max time of flight – this sets the maximum time of a point’s movement.
• Max points per streamline is the maximum number of a point’s positions recorded
for plotting a trajectory.
• Max nodes per block is the maximum number of a point’s positions within one block
that are recorded for plotting a trajectory.
Recommendation. If stream lines are not long enough (e.g., if a stream line starts from
an injector but does not reach a producer), you can increase the stream line’s life time and the
maximum number of points. In some cases (especially if the well has high-productivity and
many connection holes), these parameters should be increased by several orders of magnitude
in order to have full stream lines.
10.2. Well drainage zone 265

17.3
Figure 156. Create Cut – Well drainage zone.
10.2. Well drainage zone

tNavigator allows to mark wells’ drainage zones and edit properties in these zones. Drainage
zone is a dynamic filter.
To mark well drainage zone do the following:
1. Tick Stream Lines;
2. Select Cut;
3. Select any type of 2D visualization;
4. Stop calculations;
5. Enter 0 in Arithmetic Command Line, then press Apply;
6. Click right mouse button by Cut, select Edit;
7. Select Streamlines in the list of Property Editing dialog (see figure 10.2);
8. Tick Accumulative and Autoupdate to automatic update of zones on each time step;
9. Click left mouse button on wells for which you need to get drainage zone. Names of
selected wells are displaying in Map editor window;

17.3
10. Press Apply;
11. Run calculations;
12. Turn on Cut to display drainage zone in 2D or 3D (tick Use Cut, then select Cut) –
157.
Figure 157. Well drainage zone.
Editing properties in drainage zone.
In well drainage zone the following properties, for example, can be edited:
• MULTX (see 12.2.15) (permeability multiplier for margins between blocks in X direc-
tion);
• MULTY (see 12.2.17) (permeability multiplier for margins between blocks in Y direc-
tion);
• MULTZ (see 12.2.19) (permeability multiplier for margins between blocks in Z direc-
tion).
Algorithm of editing properties:
1. Click right mouse button on Initial maps. Permeability along X;

17.3
2. Select Edit;
3. Select tab Arithmetics in the appeared Property Editing dialog;
4. Write cut > 0 in Box field (i.e. drainage zone, because it specified by Cut. A descrip-
tion of well drainage zone creation is described above);
5. Write expression for editing the selected property in Arithmetic Command Line. For
example, multx ∗ 10 (in selected zone this multiplier will be increased 10 times);
6. Press Apply.
Figure 158. Editing properties in the drainage zone.

17.3
10.3. Drainage matrix, graph, table, network

Drainage matrix, graph, table, network allow to estimate efficiency of waterflood system.
This option described in the training tutorial 2.1 Waterflood. In this section information
completing the training tutorial 2.1 Waterflood is presented.
Figure 159. Drainage table.
Parameters affected a calculation of drainage table, graph, matrix.

The calculation of drainage table (graph, matrix) depends on several parameters:
• Streamline density.
Each streamline corresponds to the specified fluid volume, this value is its density.
The default streamline density is 5.0 rm3 for one streamline. The reasonable decrease
in the density increases the accuracy of their construction and the time of calculation
as well. The best settings should be selected depending on the well rates: the smaller
well rate, the smaller the density of streamlines should be chosen to obtain an accurate
picture.
• The wells to trace streamlines from (producers or injectors).

The streamlines can start from producers or injectors. The resulting pictures can be
different depends on starting point. However, if producers are the starting points for
the streamlines, they more accurately reflect the flow behaviour in the vicinity of the
producers. If the starting points are injectors the flow near injectors are more accurate.
This option should be selected on the basis of data to be used: in the analysis of
producers — trace from producers, in the analysis of injectors — trace from injectors.
• Phases taken into account in the calculation of streamlines.

In the settings you can specify a set of phases, which are used in streamline calculations.
10.3. Drainage matrix, graph, table, network 269

17.3
It can be any combination of water, oil and gas. For the waterflood it is recommended
to use the default settings (water and oil). For example, if you select only one of the
phases the streamline will stop if it enters the block with the saturation of this phase
equal to the residual saturation (minimal saturation).
Drainage matrix, graph and table can be computed from any step to any step. They
can be computed only for the model calculated before or they can be calculated along with a
calculation of model. Drainage matrix, graph and table can be accumulated (from any time
step to any step) or instantaneous (for one step).
To compute matrix, graph, table for specified time period it is necessary follow the steps:
set time slider at initial time step, tick To step and set number of final time step. Then press
Compute button under drainage matrix. So you can get, for example, instantaneous drainage
matrix, graph, table at any time step.
For an injection well based on the instantaneous drainage matrix the following graphs can
be created (option Graphs, tab Analytics, select injection well and tick parameters below):
• Liquid injected (D) (m 3 ) – liquid injected by selected injection well for a step;
• Liquid induced (D) (m 3 ) – liquid induced by all production wells which connected
with the selected injection one by stream lines;
• Oil induced (D) (m 3 ) – oil induced by all production wells which connected with
selected injection by a stream line;
• Oil induced / Liquid injected (D) – ratio of oil induced by all production wells which
connected with the selected injection one by a stream lines to the liquid injected by the
selected injection well.
10.3. Drainage matrix, graph, table, network 270

17.3
Injector Responding producers

Well Liquid Oil Well Liquid Oil
rm3 sm3 rm3 sm3
Reservoir 720.0 203.0 101 204.0 80.0
102 516.0 123.0
201 323.0 124.0 Reservoir 117.0
102 193.0 120.0
103 13.0 4.0
Table 13. Drainage table, grouped by Injectors
10.3.1. Drainage Table

There is a description of the table form below. The table can be grouped by Producers or
Injectors. Let’s start with the table, grouped by Injectors (table 13).
Columns:
• «Liquid (injector)» — liquid, injected by injector. In the table 13:
– The well 201 injected 323.0 rm3 of liquid (in reservoir conditions).
• «Oil (injector)» — the volume of oil produced from the responding producers due to
the injection of this injector. In the table 13:
– The value 124.0 sm3 is the volume of oil, produced due to the injection of well
201.
• «Liquid (responding producer)» — liquid volume, produced by this producer due to

injection of this injector. In the table 13:
– The well 102 produced 193.0 rm3 (in reservoir conditions) due to injection of the
well 201.
• «Oil (responding producer)» — oil volume, produced by this producer due to injection
of this injector. In the table 13:
– The value 120.0 sm3 is the volume of oil, produced by the well 102 due to
injection of the well 201.
• If the reservoir is set as the injector, then the fluid produced will equal the fluid
produced from the reservoir without injectors’ influence. In the table 13:
– Total fluid production is 720.0 rm3 (in reservoir conditions) without injectors’
influence.
10.3.1. Drainage Table 271

17.3
– Total oil production is 203.0 sm3 ı̀3 without injectors’ influence.

– The well 101 produced 204.0 rm3 (in reservoir conditions) without injectors’
influence.
– The well 101 produced 80.0 sm3 of oil without injectors’ influence.
• If the reservoir is set as the producer, then the liquid volume will equal the volume of
water that has been injected by the well but not influenced the producers’ production
volumes. In the table 13:
– The well 201 injected 117.0 rm3 (in reservoir conditions), that not influenced the
producers’ production volumes.
Note, that the values in the left columns are equal to the sum of the values in the right
columns. In the table 13:
• For the reservoir:
– Liquid: 720.0 = 204.0 + 516.0

– Oil: 203.0 = 80.0 + 123.0
• For the well 201:
– Liquid: 323.0 = 117.0 + 193.0 + 13.0

– Oil: 124.0 = 120.0 + 4.0
You can also get a drainage table relative form: values in the right columns are represented
as percentages of the corresponding values in the left columns.
The table can be sorted by the column «Oil (injector)». In this case we have on the top
of the table the most effective injection wells, excluding economy, because the amount of
injected water is not taken into account. Most effective wells (economically) are those with
the lowest ratio of injected water to the produced oil, therefore it is necessary to consider the
second column. At the bottom of the table at this sorting there are the least effective wells.
To the right of them we can see the producers that are affected by shutting of ineffective
injectors.
Below there is a description of the Drainage table grouped be producers. The table 14
corresponds to the same drainage matrix as the table 13, but it has different grouping.
Columns:
• «Liquid (producer)» — fluid volume, produced by this producer. In the table 14:
– The well 102 produced 709.0 rm3 (in reservoir conditions).
• «Oil (producer)» — oil volume, produced by this producer. In the table 14:
– The well 102 produced 243.0 sm3 of oil.

17.3
Producer Injector’s influence

Well Liquid Oil Well Liquid Oil
rm3 sm3 rm3 sm3
Reservoir 117.0 201 117.0
101 204.0 80.0 Reservoir 204.0 80.0
102 709.0 243.0 Reservoir 516.0 123.0
201 193.0 120.0
103 13.0 4.0 Reservoir 0.0 0.0
201 13.0 4.0
Table 14. Drainage table, grouped by Producers
• «Liquid (Injector’s influence)» — fluid volume, produced by this producer due to

– The well 102 produced 193.0 rm3 (in reservoir conditions) due to injection of the
well 201.
• «Oil (Injector’s influence)» — the volume of oil produced by this producer due to the
– The value 120.0 sm3 is the volume of oil, produced by the well 102 due to the
injection of the well 201.
• If the reservoir is set as the injector„ the fluid volume will equal the volume of fluid
produced without the injectors’ influence. In the table 14:
– The well 102 produced 516.0 rm3 (in reservoir conditions) without the injectors’
influence.
– The well 102 produced 123.0 sm3 of oil without the injectors’ influence.
• If the reservoir is set as the producer, then the liquid volume will equal the volume of
water that has been injected by this well but not influenced the producers’ production
volumes. In the table 14:
– The well 201 injected 117.0 rm3 (in reservoir conditions), that not influenced the
producers’ production volumes.
Note, that the values in the left columns are equal to the sum of the values in the right
columns. In the table 14:
• For the reservoir:

17.3
– Liquid: 117.0 = 117.0
– Liquid: 204.0 = 204.0

– Oil: 80.0 = 80.0
– Liquid: 709.0 = 516.0 + 193.0

– Oil: 243.0 = 123.0 + 120.0
– Liquid: 13.0 = 13.0

– Oil: 4.0 = 4.0
You can also get a drainage table relative form: values in the right columns are represented
as percentages of the corresponding values in the left columns.
The table can be sorted by the column «Oil (producer)». In this case we have on the
top of the table the most effective producers. At the right part of the table there are wells
that provide reservoir pressure support for the selected producer. The the bottom of the table
there are wells that can be candidates to switch for injection.

17.3
10.3.2. Drainage Graph

A drainage graph (injection efficiency graph) shows the volume of water injected into each
injector and the total oil (or fluid) production from all the producers connected to that injector
with stream lines (Graph Type: Injectors).
A drainage graph (injection efficiency graph) shows the volume of oil (or fluid) pro-
duced from each producer and the volume of water received by such producers from all the
injectors connected to it with stream lines (Graph Type: Producers).
The Y-axis of the drainage graph (select in the pop-down menu):
• Produced liquid;
• Produced oil;
• Spec. injection efficiency is ratio of oil induced by all production wells which con-
nected with selected injection by a stream line to liquid injected by selected injection
well.
Synchronizing a drainage graph with well rate graphs.
• For an Accumulated drainage graph: double-click a well (a square on the graph) to go

to the option of Graphs. Totals for that well.
• For an instantaneous drainage graph: double-click a well (a square on the graph) to

go to the option of Graphs. Rates for that well.
Graph: Injectors (Y-axis: Liquid Production).
A drainage graph for injectors is shown on figure 160. The dots of various colors are
injectors. The dot color matches the legend color, showing how many producers are connected
with the injector by stream lines. The X-axis shows water intake (rm 3 - reservoir m 3 - m 3
under reservoir conditions), the Y-axis shows liquid production induced by the injection (sm 3
- surface m 3 - m 3 under surface conditions) (the total for all the producers connected to the
injector by stream lines).
The green line (corresponds to the Target box) is the average production and injection
for injectors.
The yellow line (Deviation) is the rms for injectors. So the wells below the yellow line
(red squares) inject lots of water, but induce little production from connected producers.
Plotting the Lines. For each injector i, the graph computes the ratio γ[i] of liquid
production to water injection. M is the average of all the γ[i] values (the green line), D is
the rms of all the γ[i] values (the yellow line).
You can modify the positions of the yellow line using the (Deviation box) and the green
line using the (Target box). Check the required box and type the new value.
10.3.2. Drainage Graph 275

17.3
Figure 160. Drainage graph – liquid induced.
10.3.2. Drainage Graph 276

17.3
10.3.3. Drainage matrix
Figure 161. Drainage matrix.
Drainage matrix description:
• Injectors in X-direction, producers in Y-direction. Each cell shows connection between

injector and producer.
• When mouse pointer is on the table cell, names of producer and injector wells and
flow volume (rm 3 /day- reservoir m 3 ) between them is shown below table;
• The first matrix column shows liquid volume which was produced without injectors
(i.e., producers’ stream lines ends in grid blocks);
• Top line of matrix is liquid volume which was injected, but was not produced (i.e.,
injectors’ stream lines ends in grid blocks).
10.3.3. Drainage matrix 277

17.3
10.3.4. Drainage network

Pairs of injection and producing wells, between which crossflow exists, are defined based on
the stream lines. Each line in the drainage network connects one injector and one producer,
if there is one or more stream line between them.
Drainage network is calculated for the same period of time, for which a drainage table is
calculated. Thus, if you need to compute a drainage network for another period, you need to
calculate the drainage matrix for that period.
Figure 162. Drainage network.
Preferences of drainage network (figure 163):
• Show values. Show a flow volume value between wells;
• Phase. Show a network for this phase;
• Min. Flux. Flows, which volume is less than specified, will not be shown;
• Line width. Set minimal and maximal width of shown lines;
• Rotate text;
• Line color:
– One color for all lines;
10.3.4. Drainage network 278

17.3
– Producer color. Color of lines between two wells is align with color of producing
well of this pair;
– Injector color. Color of lines between two wells is align with color of injection
well of this pair;
• Line shape:
– Stream line with minimum time of life (TOF). Shape of network line will align
with shape of stream line with minimum time of life. Stream line with minimum
time of life is a stream line, via which fluid entered into production well faster
than via other lines;
– Spline. Shape of network line is a spline, which constructed some way by all
stream line between each pair of wells.
• Font. Set font preferences: type, style, size and so on.
Figure 163. Preferences of a drainage network.
10.3.4. Drainage network 279

17.3
10.4. Balancing
You can use the tNavigator to optimize water injection at every time step.
Figure 164. Balancing is turned on.
To optimize a water injection through balancing:

1. Select Waterflood;
2. Check Drainage Matrix;
3. Check Balancing;
4. Set the required values of Sigma-, Sigma+, Epsilon, Degree, Alpha, Beta, Comp.
5. Run a computation and wait for it to be completed.
6. The modified injection parameters will be saved to the User file as follows. In the
model folder, a USER sub-folder will be created (see the details about USER subfolder
in tNavigator User Manual). The file with the modified well schedule will be saved in
the USER folder.
Balancing Region. The balancing region includes two sectors (deviation in two sides
from center line on drainage graphs; see 165):
1. Between green and blue lines (M , M + D · Sigma+);
10.4. Balancing 280

17.3
2. Between yellow and green lines (M − D · Sigma−, M ).
A water injection will be balanced for wells within the sectors, wells outside the sectors
will be disregarded. By default: Sigma– = 1, Sigma+ = 1, the balancing region is limited
by the blue line and the yellow line. To change the balancing region, you need to change the
values of Sigma– and Sigma+.
Figure 165. Balancing regions.
Plotting the Lines is on the 165.

For each injector i, the graph computes the ratio γ[i] of liquid production to water in-
jection. M is the average of all the γ[i] values (the green line), D is the rms of all the γ[i]
values (yellow and blue lines).
Notice. The blue line is not visualized in the tNavigator graphical interface. In the figure
165 the blue line is added to show balancing regions.
You can modify the positions of yellow (Deviation) and green lines (Target) by checking the
relevant box and typing the new value. But this modification will not affect the Balancing
Region for water optimization.
The idea of Balancing (165):
1. A water injection will only be balanced for wells within the sectors, wells outside the
sectors will be disregarded.
10.4. Balancing 281

17.3
2. For any well within sector (M , M + D · Sigma+) water injection will be increased so
as to bring the well closer to the green mean line.
3. For any well within sector (M − D · Sigma−, M ), a water injection will be reduced so
as to bring the well closer to the green mean line.
Balancing Formula.
In every subsequent step, a water injection volume will be multiplied by the following
WEFAC (see 12.18.70) for each i-well:
• For wells in the sector (M , M + D · Sigma+) with Al pha multiplier between green and
blue lines:
Degree
Al pha · (γ[i] − M)
W EFACi = 1 + E psilon +
maxγ[i] − M
• For wells in the sector (M − D · Sigma−, M ) with Beta multiplier between green and
yellow lines:
Degree
Beta · (M − γ[i])
W EFACi = 1 + E psilon +
M − minγ[i]
An epsilon is used to increase a water injection volume.
Recommendations.
The value of parameter Al pha should not be large (this can cause a large watercut of
producers corresponding to injectors in the sector (M , M + D · Sigma+)). Parameter Beta
can be large to make the injectors in the sector (M − D · Sigma−, M ) inject water a little.
Parameter Comp is used for compensation. If Comp is not zero, then:
• For wells in the sector (M , M + D · Sigma+) with Al pha multiplier between green and
blue lines:
Degree
Al pha · (γ[i] − M)
W EFACi = 1 + E psilon + Form ·
maxγ[i] − M
• For wells in the sector (M − D · Sigma−, M ) with Beta multiplier between green and
yellow lines:
Degree
Beta · (M − γ[i])
W EFACi = 1 + E psilon + Form ·
M − minγ[i]
where Form = ∆Q Q · Comp, ∆Q is the change of water injection volume in the current
step, Q is the total water injection volume in the current step.
10.4. Balancing 282

17.3
10.5. Waterflood compensation

You can use tNavigator to optimize water injection at each time step.
To optimize water injection through compensation of average reservoir pressure:
1. Select Waterflood;
2. Check Drainage Matrix;
3. Check Compensation;
4. In the pop-down menu, select Average Reservoir Pressure;
5. Run a computation and wait for it to be completed.
6. The modified injection parameters will be saved to the User file as follows. In the
model folder, a USER sub-folder will be created (see details about USER subfolder
in tNavigator User Manual) to which the file with the modified well schedule will be
saved (see keyword COMPENSATION, see 12.18.106).
Compensation of Average Reservoir Pressure.

Set the value of Multiplier. In every subsequent step, injection will be computed as
follows:
• Injection volume (under reservoir conditions) = Production volume (under reservoir

conditions) × Multiplier.
• If the Multiplier is 1, the production volume under reservoir conditions will equal
the injection volume under reservoir conditions (as can be seen in graphs of fluid
production and injection under reservoir conditions). The average reservoir pressure
shows insignificant changes (as seen in the pressure graph).
Injection is uniformly distributed among the wells, this option will not work with group
control.
10.5. Waterflood compensation 283

17.3
11. 2D Histogram. Crossplot

Using the tab 2D Histogram it is possible to visualize:
• 2D Histogram;
• X Histogram;
• Y Histogram;
• Crossplot.
Using the simplest one-dimensional histogram (see figure 166) it is easy to understand the
number of blocks corresponding to the high and law porosity. For example, as can be seen
in figure 166 for the considered field the most part of the blocks has a porosity around 0.1.
Figure 166. One-dimensional histogram.
11.1. 2D Histogram
A two-dimensional (2D) histogram is a method of color visualization of a distribution of
values of arbitrary two functions through grid blocks. Here is one simple example.
A 2D histogram shows how many higher-porosity blocks (or low-porosity blocks) have
high permeability and how many of them have a low-permeability – see figure 167.
11. 2D Histogram. Crossplot 284

17.3
Figure 167. 2D histogram.
Creating a 2D Histogram.
Two selected functions (e.g., f 1 = poro (porosity), f 2 = log(permx + 0.1) (log of X-axis
permeability)) are shown along two axes - X and Y. The value of each of these functions is
calculated for each block. Then the X and Y axes are divided into sections:
[X min , X min + dx, X min + 2dx, ..., X max ] = [X 1 , X 2 , ..., X Xbins+1 ];
[Y min , Y min + dy, Y min + 2dy, ..., Y max ] = [Y 1 , Y 2 , ..., Y Y bins+1 ].
X min and Y min are the minimum values of the f 1 and f 2 functions in the grid blocks;
X max and Y max are the maximum values of the functions in the grid. The number of sections
(X bins , Y bins ) can be adjusted (the number is set in X bins or Y bins fields).
For each bin of the X-axis [X i , X i+1 ] and for each bin of the Y-axis [Y j , Y j+1 ] the
number of blocks having the values f1 , f2 in this range (i.e. X i 6f 1 < X i+1 , Y i 6f 2 <
Y i+1 ). When you put the cursor on a histogram cell, you will see the range and the number
of blocks in the status bar. For example, in the model in the figure 167 752 blocks have
porosities in the range [0.106, 0.113] and permeabilities in the range [1.99, 2.27]. So for each
square [X i , X i+1 ]×[Y j , Y j+1 ], the blocks of the original grid with the function values
within this range have a certain color in the 2D histogram.
It can be seen that blocks with the lowest permeabilities (dark-blue on figure 167) can
have different values of porosity, for blocks with average permeabilities a porosity is related
to the log of permeability. Low-permeability blocks have a low-porosity; high-permeability
blocks (in the top-left part on figure 167) have a high-porosity.
When you activate a User Cut (check Use Cut), blocks not included in the filter will be
11.1. 2D Histogram 285

17.3
disregarded in the histogram.

You can also use additional parameters, such as Weight and Type.
Weight.
If you specify the Weight different from 1, for each square X i+1 ]×[Y j , Y j+1 ] the model
will sum up the weights – and not the number – of the blocks in which X i 6f 1 < X i+1 ,
Y i 6f 2 < Y i+1 . For example, if you select a weight that is the function f 3 = Soil*porv, the
model will sum up the value of f 3 (the volume of oil in the reservoir) for all the blocks in
which X i 6f 1 < X i+1 , Y i 6f 2 < Y i+1 .
Type.
The Type of histogram indicates how the blocks within the range to be handled. If the
type is Sum, the blocks’ weights will be summed up. If the type Average is selected, the
model will calculate the average weight of the blocks within the range. If the type is RMS,
the model will calculate the RMS of the weights of the blocks within the range.
Another 2D Histogram Example.
Input boxes at the bottom of the image: Õ is the function reviewed along the X-axis
(designated f 1 ). Y is the function reviewed along the Y-axis (designated f 2 ). Weight is the
weight function for histogram computations (f 3 ).
If on figure 168:
• f1 = I;
• f2 = J;
• f3 = Soil.
Figure 168. Weighted 2D histogram.

17.3
Parameter values (the right panel):

X bins – the number of bins into which the X-axis is split (Xbins). Y bins – the number
of bins into which the Y-axis is split (Ybins).
The default values are equal (40, 30). In this example, the number of bins equals the
number of blocks in the model.
Range.
If you check Auto Min-Max, the boundaries of the square will be determined automat-
ically as the minimum value and the maximum value of the functions set along the X-axis
and the Y-axis (the functions will be calculated for each grid block). X min = the minimum
value of f 1 , X max = the maximum value of f 1 , Y min = the minimum value of f 2 , Y max =
the maximum value of f 2 . If you uncheck this feature, you can set your own minimum and
maximum values.
Type. The Type options are:
• Sum;
• Average;
• RMS.
The histogram will only use data of the grid blocks covered by the filter, with the f 1 and
f 2 values within the following ranges: X min 6f 1 6 X max , Y min 6 f 2 6Y max .
The X-axis and the Y-axis are split into bins with the lengths of dx and dy, where:
Xmax −Xmin
• dx = Xbins ;
Ymax −Ymin
• dy = Ybins .
So the X-axis and the Y-axis are divided as follows:

[X min , X min + dx, X min + 2dx, ..., X max ] = [X 1 , X 2 , ..., X Xbins+1 ];
[Y min , Y min + dy, Y min + 2dy, ..., Y max ] = [Y 1 , Y 2 , ..., Y Y bins+1 ].
For this axis split, 2D histogram grid (as opposed to the model grid) is created. The 2D
histogram grid, the block of [X i+1 ]×[Y j , Y j+1 ] will display a value that will be, depending
on the histogram type:
• A sum.
The value will be equal to the sum of the values of the weighted function f 3 in the
grid blocks for which X i 6f 1 < X i+1 , Y i 6f 2 < Y i+1 ;
• An average.
The value will equal the average value of the weighted function f 3 of the grid blocks
for which X i 6f 1 < X i+1 , Y i 6f 2 < Y i+1 .

17.3
• An rms.
The value will equal the rms of the weighted function f3 of the grid blocks for which
X i 6f 1 < X i+1 , Y i 6f 2 < Y i+1 .
The values generated will be color-designated in the histogram.
2D Histogram’s Matches with Calculated Maps.

If parameters are set as described here below:
• the number of X bins (X bins ) = the number of the most active X block;
• the number of Y bins (Y bins ) = the number of the most active Y block;
• f 1 (x) = I (the block’s i-coordinate will be displayed on the X-axis);
• f 2 (x) = J (the block’s j-coordinate will be displayed on the Y-axis);
• Weight = the property’s title (e.g., Soil – oil saturation).

The 2D histogram created will match with the calculated oil saturation property, with the
z-coordinates summed up.
The number of the most active blocks along the X-axis and the Y-axis can be determined
as described below:
1. in any initial property (of the type Sum, Average, or RMS), place the cursor on the
any most remote X-axis and Y-axis block. With the cursor on the remote X-axis block,
the caption in square brackets at the bottom of the image, e.g. [190, 98, 0], means that
the X-axis number of the most active block is 190; the caption [13, 179, 0] means that
the Y-axis number of the most active block is 179.
2. the maximum number of active blocks will match X max and Y max calculated automat-
ically if Auto Min Max is checked.
NB. You can uncheck Auto Min Max and set the X max and the Y max one unit greater. In
that case, the property will not change, but the function’s value ranges will exactly match the
block numbers, which will facilitate analysis and visual perception of the histogram.
11.2. X/Y Histogram

X- and Y-histograms are the X- and Y-components of the 2D histogram, respectively.
For the X-histogram (with the Sum type selected), the model calculates the sum of values
in the vertical column of the 2D histogram’s blocks corresponding to the bin, and display the
sum in blue.
For the Average histogram, the arithmetic average will be calculated, for the RMS
histogram, the rms of the block column values.
For an X-histogram, the blocks’ range [X min , X max ] and the X bins will be saved.
11.2. X/Y Histogram 288

17.3
For the Y-histogram, the model calculates for each bin [Y i , Y i+1 ] the sum (or the average
or the rms, depending on the histogram type) of values in the horizontal column of the 2D
histogram’s blocks corresponding to the bin, and display the sum in blue.
For an X-histogram, the blocks’ range [Y min , Y max ] and the Y bins will be saved.
Also, an X-histogram will display:
• the number of bins [X i , X i+1 ] with at least one active block (the total amount);
• the sum of values of a parameters in all the blocks (Sum);
• the block’s average value of a parameter (Average);
• the rms (of a parameter) (RMS).
X- and Y-histograms can be vertical or horizontal.
An example of a Y-histogram’s application: layer distribution of mass oil-in place.
The parameters are set as follows:
• Y-histogram;
• X-bins (X bins ) = 1;
• Y-bins (Y bins ) = the number of layers in the models along the Z-axis;
• X function f 1 (x) = 1 (only one X–bin);
• Y function f 2 (x) = K (the Y-axis will display the block’s k-coordinate, ie the layer
number);
• Weight = property title (e.g., moip – mass oil in place);
• Type = Sum.
The created Y-histogram shows the distribution of the current oil in place by layer of the
model. You can also make the histogram horizontal; you should remember that the upper
layers have smaller numbers, so they will appear in the bottom.
In the figure 169 distribution of mass oil in place among the 9 layers of the field’s model
is shown (9 Y-bins).

17.3
Figure 169. Y-Histogram: Distribution of moip (mass oil in place) by layers.
You can have resources displayed for certain layers only. For that purpose:
1. Create a Cut to select the layers of interest. For example: the Cut (k==2) | (k== 4)
will select layers 2 and 4 only.
2. In the Y-histogram, check Use Cut. The histogram will display the moip of layers 2
and 4 only – see figure 170
Figure 170. moip in layers 2 and 4.

17.3
11.3. Crossplot
A crossplot allows to estimate a depenance of one parameter on another. Each value of PX
parameter defined along X axis, correspond to one or several values of PY parameter defined
along Y axis. To create a crossplot define in the fields located at the bottom of the graph
window the required parameters:
• X – parameter defined for X axis, e.g. porosity;
• Y – parameter defined for X axis, e.g. premiability;
• Weight – weight function.
A crossplot is a variety of points with (PX , PY ) coordinates, a color of each point

corresponds to a value of parameter (or a value) defined in the field Weight. Palette shown
in the figure of crossplot (see the figure 171) sets the correspondence between colors and the
values of the parameter defined in the field Weight.
Figure 171. Crossplot for premiability vs. porosity.
The variety of points with (poro, permx) coordinates is shown in the figure 171. It can
be seen that poro value equal to 0.25 corresponds to three values of permeability 50, 100
and 170. Furthermore, a color of each point shows the value of saturation of water (swat)
corresponding to point’s coordinates, i.e. (poro, permx) values. For example, the value of
porosity equal to 0.1939 and the value of premiability equal to 62.91 correspond to the
saturation of water equal to 0.26.
11.3. Crossplot 291

17.3
In order to see a trend for the created dependence of porosity on premiability check the
check-box Trend lines. Show. The following trend lines are available:
• Logarithmic trend line;
• Exponential trend line;
• Power trend line;
• Linear trend line;
• Square polynomial trend line;
• Cubic polynomial trend line.
In order to see an analytical formula corresponding to the created trend line check the
box Show formula. The box with the formula and a correlation coefficient will appear in
the crossplot graphic. If the correlation coefficient is close to the unity then the dependence
between parameters is close to the linear.
It is possible to visualize a crossplot only in the regions satisfied to the Cut filter. Follow
the steps:
1. Create a Cut filter selecting the required regions, e.g. FIPNUM, region 3.
2. On the tab Crossplot check the check-box Use Cut. Select FIPNUM from the drop-
down menu. The crossplot corresponding to the 3rd FIPNUM region will be shown,
see the figure 172.
Figure 172. The crossplot for the 3rd FIPNUM region.
11.3. Crossplot 292

17.3
12. Fluid Properties

The option Properties shows oil-gas-water graphs and tables for different regions.
The following properties are presented (tabs in the Properties option):

• RP Water-Oil: Water-Oil relative permeability and a capillary pressure (for two-phase
and three-phase models).
Note: Capillary pressure are shown relative to oil and can be either positive or negative
depending on the wettable phase (hydrophilic/hydrophobic collector is).
• COREYWO props: Water-Oil relative permeability which is specified via Corey cor-
relation (see the detailed description in the section Corey correlation of User Manual
and keyword COREYWO, see 12.6.3);
• LETWO props: Water-Oil relative permeability which is specified via LET correlation
(see the detailed description in the section LET correlation of User Manual and keyword
LETWO, see 12.6.8);
• RP Oil-Gas: Oil-Gas relative permeability and capillary pressure (for three-phase mod-
els);
• COREYGO props: Oil-Gas relative permeability which is specified via Corey corre-
lation (see the detailed description in the section Corey correlation of User Manual and
keyword COREYGO, see 12.6.4);
• LETGO props: Oil-Gas relative permeability which is specified via LET correlation
(see the detailed description in the section LET correlation of User Manual and keyword
LETGO, see 12.6.9);
• PVT water;
• PVT oil;
• PVT gas;
• PVT water with salt. If the keyword PVTWSALT (see 12.7.16) is used, then two it’s
records Record 1 and Record 2 of data are visualized:
– Record 1 contains reference pressure (bar) and reference salt concentration in

water in surface conditions (kg/m 3 ).
– record 2 contains table and graph. Salt concentration (kg/m 3 ), for given reference
concentration value: water formation volume factor, water compressibility, water
viscosity at reference depth, water viscosibility.
• Rock;
• Density;

17.3
• SRP Oil-Water (scaled relative permeability of the water-oil system);
• SRP Gas-Oil (scaled relative permeability of the gas-oil system) (for three-phase mod-
els);
• Component properties (for compositional models only);
• Components’ interaction (for compositional models only);
• Equilibrium (a table associated with the keyword EQUIL, see 12.15.2);
• Rates vs SWAT;
• Flow functions. The graph is available only if flow functions are assigned for hydrofrac
and bottomhole treatment jobs in the model’s data file. Also, the graph can be assigned
in this tab in the GUI.
• Proppants (proppant penetration vs. pressure). The graph is available, if proppant pene-
tration vs. pressure is assigned in the model’s data file. Also, the graph can be assigned
in this tab in the GUI.
• Chemical Properties;
• VFP tables for producers;
• VFP tables for injectors;
• STANDO props – oil PVT properties, which are set via Standing correlation (see
the detailed description in the section Oil Standing’s correlations of User Manual and
keyword STANDO, see 12.5.11);
• STANDG props – gas PVT properties, which are set via Standing correlation (see
the detailed description in the section Gas Standing’s correlations of User Manual and
keyword STANDG, see 12.5.12);
• Molar component fracture vs. depth, the keyword ZMFVD (see 12.13.17) (only for
thermal models);
• Temperature vs. depth, the keyword TEMPVD (see 12.14.77) (only for thermal mod-
els);
• Gas viscosity vs Temperature, the keyword GASVISCT (see 12.14.53) (only for
thermal models);
• Oil viscosity vs Temperature, the keyword OILVISCT (see 12.14.49) (only for thermal
models).
Before a computation run, the model’s properties can be edited – see section Properties
editing.

17.3
12.1. Properties editing

Before running a computation, the model’s properties can be edited. If model is calculated
before, then you need to close and open it again. Otherwise, properties editing will be un-
available.
Properties editing does not change files of an initial model, tNavigator just writes a
new data to the USER folder (see details about USER subfolder in tNavigator User Man-
ual). Files MODEL_NAME_rp.inc or MODEL_NAME_pvt.inc etc. with new values in the
corresponding keywords. These files are read after initial model files. The model will be
visualized and calculated with properties and well data from the USER folder. The keywords
in the USER folder can be edited manually or deleted.
Features of properties editing, which set via tables (keywords SWOF (see 12.6.1), SGOF
(see 12.6.2), SWFN (see 12.6.13) and so on):
• Hold Shift and move any graph point, values will be changed automatically in the
table at right.
In USER folder will be created file with corresponding keyword and new keywords’
parameters values – <name>_rp.inc, <name>_pvt.inc.
• Double click on table cell allows edit value in this cell. Corresponding curve will be
recalculated automatically.
In USER folder a file will be created with corresponding keyword and new keywords’
parameters values – <name>_rp.inc, <name>_pvt.inc.
• Conversion of RP to Corey correlation.

Formulas are presented in the section Corey correlation of UserManual.
In the top horizontal menu (figure 173) select Document, Approximate RP, Convert
to Corey Correlation.
Note. Dotted curves are current RP curves (figure 174). Solid curves are RP curves
after Corey correlation. You can edit RP points and a curvature via changing corre-
sponding values in table on the right. Curves will be rebuilt automatically.
Then press Create Corey keywords.

In USER folder a file <name>_rp.inc will be created with corresponding keyword
COREYWO (see 12.6.3), COREYGO (see 12.6.4).
• Conversion of RP to LET correlation.

(formulae are represented in the section LET correlation of tNav UserManual).
In top menu (figure 173) select Document, Approximate RP, Convert to LET
Correlation.
12.1. Properties editing 295

17.3
Figure 173. Conversion to Corey or LET correlation.
Dotted curves are current RP curves (see figure 174). Solid curves are RP curves after
LET correlation. RP points and a curvature can be modified by changing corresponding
values in the table on the right. The curves will be rebuilt automatically.
Then press Create LET keywords.
In the USER folder a file <name>_rp.inc will be created with corresponding key-
word LETWO (see 12.6.8), LETGO (see 12.6.9).
Features of editing properties, which set via Corey or LET correlations (keywords
COREYWO (see 12.6.3), COREYGO (see 12.6.4), LETWO (see 12.6.8), LETGO, see 12.6.9):
• Double click on table cell allows edit value in this cell. Corresponding curve will be
recalculated automatically.
In USER folder a file will be created with corresponding keyword and new param-
eters values of keywords COREYWO (see 12.6.3), COREYGO (see 12.6.4), LETWO
(see 12.6.8), LETGO (see 12.6.9) – <name>_rp.inc, <name>_pvt.inc.
12.1. Properties editing 296

17.3
Figure 174. Conversion to Corey correlation.
12.2. Properties. Right Panel Buttons

• Show default view. Restores the default view of the graph. Simultaneous click
of left and right mouse buttons do the same.
• Export. Exports data of pvt (pvt - properties) and rp (relative phase perme-
abilities) to text file (.txt). To export data, type the file name and the file path.
Files <name>_rp.txt, <name>_pvt.txt with the relevant keywords (PVTW
(see 12.5.5), PVDG (see 12.5.7), ROCK (see 12.5.17), DENSITY (see 12.5.25), SWOF
(see 12.6.1), SGOF (see 12.6.2) and so on) will be saved.
• Create screenshot. See the detailed description in the section Create Screenshot
12.2. Properties. Right Panel Buttons 297

17.3
Figure 175. Corey correlation for RP in the system water-oil.
12.3. SRP (Scaled Relative Permeability Parameters)

This tab is a tool for computing and displaying permeability graphs for each block. If hys-
teresis option is used, then corresponding curves will be visualized – see section Hysteresis
visualization.
To compute permeability for block do the following:
1. In the Block box, assign block coordinates [I, J, K].
2. Click Compute.
In the figure 176 Scaled Relative Permeability Parameters for the block [3, 26, 5] are
shown.
A block can be selected in 2D or 3D view. Press right mouse button on block, then select
SRP Oil-Water or SRP Gas-Oil.
12.3. SRP (Scaled Relative Permeability Parameters) 298

17.3
Figure 176. Scaled Relative Permeability Parameters.
12.4. Hysteresis visualization

If RP hysteresis is used in the model – see the detailed description in the section Hysteresis
of tNavigator User Manual (option HYSTER of the keyword SATOPTS, see 12.1.71), – then
for RP of water, oil, gas and capillary pressure 3 curves will be visualized:
• curve of drainage process [drainage] – dotted line;
• curve of imbibition process [imbibition] – firm thin line;
• curve, which is currently used [scanning curve] – firm thick line.
Imbibition, drainage and equilibrium regions for blocks are visualized in 3D via Regions.
12.4. Hysteresis visualization 299

17.3
Figure 177. Hysteresis visualization.
12.5. Rates vs. SWAT

This tab is a tool for sensitivity analysis to establish at what SWAT values oil and water
are produced. At each time step, the tool reviews all the blocks with all the connections and
generates a histogram of oil and water volumes produced from the blocks at certain SWAT
values.
To view production distribution in a computed model:
1. Place the time slider on the latest step;
2. Properties, Rates vs SWAT;
3. Click Calculate.
Graph on figure 178 shows that a large portion of the water and oil was produced at
SWAT value 0.4.
12.5. Rates vs. SWAT 300

17.3
Figure 178. Rates vs. SWAT.
12.6. Flow Function

A flow function can be used to define a proppant washout and fracture clogging (during a
hydrofrac job). A proppant washout and fracture sealing (a flow function) can be define in
the GUI and/or in a text file using the keywords FLOWFUNC (see 12.8.4) or FLOWFTAB
(see 12.8.7) (by a list of values). The flow function’s name can be specified as you assign a
frac job (in the GUI or by the keywords WFRACP (see 12.18.129), WFRAC (see 12.18.127),
COMPFRAC, see 12.18.131).
An algorithm to set a flow function in GUI is presented in the training tutorial 5.1 How
To Add Fracs. The description of model of hydrofrac is presented in the sections Hydraulic
fracture data and Hydraulic fractures of tNav User Manual.
An example: a flow function (proppant washout) is defined by keywords.
For each function you should assign the name, the type, and the k and a coefficients.
• A linear function is assigned as (LIN) F1(s) = max{1 + (k − 1) · a · s, 0};
• An exponential function is assigned as (EXP) F2(s) = k + (1 − k) · e−as .
————————
FLOWFUNC
'F1' LIN 0.9 0.9 /
'F2' EXP 0.1 0.1 /
/
————————
Two functions have been thus assigned:

• a linear one: (LIN) F1(s) = max{1 − 0, 09s, 0};
• an exponential one: (EXP) F2(s) = 0, 1 − 0, 9e−0,1s .
The functions F1 and F2 are shown in the graph (figure 179). Option Properties, tab Flow
Functions.
12.6. Flow Function 301

17.3
Figure 179. Flow functions Flowfunc1 and Flowfunc2 assigned by the keyword FLOW-
FUNC.
If flow functions are assigned by a list of values, you should specify the number of
the flow functions thus assigned (NFLOWFTB, see 12.8.5), the names of flow functions
(FLOWFNAMES, see 12.8.6), and the list of values (FLOWFTAB, see 12.8.7).
Example: Flow functions assigned by a list of values. Two functions are assigned –
F3 and F4.
———————–
NFLOWFTB
2
/
FLOWFNAMES
’F3’ ’F4’ /
FLOWFTAB
0 1 1
1 0.5 *
2 * 0.5
3 0.1 0.1
/
———————–
12.6. Flow Function 302

17.3
12.7. Propants
An algorithm to set a proppant (a table of permeability vs. pressure) in GUI is presented in
the training tutorial 5.1 How To Add Fracs.
You can assign proppant properties in the GUI (as described above) or in a text file
using the keywords NPROPANTS (see 12.8.1) (the number of proppant types in the model),
PROPANTNAMES (see 12.8.2) (proppant names), or PROPANTTABLE (see 12.8.3) (a table
of proppant penetration vs. pressure). You can assign the proppant name when you assign a
hydrofrac job parameters (in the GUI or with keywords WFRACP (see 12.18.129), WFRAC
(see 12.18.127), COMPFRAC, see 12.18.131).
Description of the mathematical model of hydrofrac is represented in the sections Hy-
draulic fracture data and Hydraulic fractures of tNav User Manual.
Assigning proppant properties by keywords.
———————
NPROPANTS
1/
/
PROPANTNAMES
’propant1’ /
PROPANTTABLE
100 100
200 80
400 20
800 10
1000 0
/
——————–
You can assign an arbitrary number of proppants. In the example below, two proppants
are assigned: Proppant 12/18 and Proppant 16/20. For each proppant the penetration values at
pressures from 100 to 3000 bars are specified. The Proppant Penetration vs. Pressure graph
can be viewed in the option Fluid Properties, tab Proppants. On the right you can see a
table of pressure and proppant penetration values. ——————-
NPROPANTS
2/
PROPANTNAMES
’proppant 12/18’ ’proppant 16/20’ /
PROPANTTABLE
12.7. Propants 303

17.3
30 1000 3000
50 900 2500
100 800 2000
150 700 1500
200 600 1300
250 500 1100
300 400 1000
350 300 900
400 200 700
800 100 100
1000 10 * /
——————-
12.7. Propants 304

17.3
Figure 180. Graphs of proppants: proppant penetration vs. pressure.
12.7. Propants 305

17.3
12.8. Chemical Properties

In addition to the principal properties described in this Section, a thermal model includes
Chemical Properties in the option Fluid Properties. The chemical properties are shown in
the tabular form (if the model addresses chemical reactions).
For each chemical reaction (figure 181 shows 4 chemical reactions), there is a table in
which the rows are model components and the columns are: reactant coefficients, product
coefficients, components’ interaction, and critical concentration.
Figure 181. Chemical reactions.
If a component is not a reactant (or product), the value in the cell is 0. In the figure 181
the reactants in the Reaction 1 are ’HEAVY’ and ’O2’, and the product is ’CO2’ and ’H2O’.
A component interaction is set by the chemical reaction rate’s dependence on reactant
concentration (for example, 1 is a linear dependence).
The critical concentration of component means that if component’s concentration is below
the critical concentration value, the chemical reaction’s rate will have a linear dependence on
such concentration.
12.8. Chemical Properties 306

17.3
12.9. VFP tables

The description and algorithm how to set VFP tables for producers an injectors is presented
in the description of the keywords VFPPROD (see 12.18.58) and VFPINJ (see 12.18.57)
correspondingly. Also VFP tables can be calculated via correlation, which specified by the
keyword VFPCORR (see 12.18.62).
Select an axis to visualize, then move sliders to see a set of curves of selected parameters.
Figure 182. VFP table for producers.
12.9. VFP tables 307

17.3
13. Economical parameters

13.1. Setting Economics Parameters
Setting economics parameters:
1. In the top panel: click Document, select Economics Preferences – figure 183.
2. Select the tab Economics. Set economics parameters.
Figure 183. Preferences. Economics.
Setting Economics Parameters by keywords.
Economics parameters values can be set via keywords ECINIT (see 12.1.108), ECDATES
(see 12.1.109) and ECVAL (see 12.1.110).
By specified values Net Present Value Graph will be built.
13. Economical parameters 308

17.3
13.2. Net Present Value Graph

To plot a Net Present Value (NPV) graph in the course of a computation run, you should
assign economics parameters (otherwise default parameters will be used).
To view an NPV graph:
1. Select the option Graphs.
2. Select the tab Analytics.
3. Check Net Present Value.
Figure 184. Net Present Value graph.
NPV Formula.
N
CFt
NPV = −IC + ∑ t
t=1 (1 + i)
where:
• CF – Cash Flow. CF t – cash flow in t time steps (t = 1,...,N);
• IC – Invested Capital (Initial Capital) at initial time moment IC = −CF 0 (at 0 time
step)
• i – discount rate. It is used for the allocation of future cash flow into a single present
value amount.
• Discount starting step – the time step in which the discount begins to be applied.
13.2. Net Present Value Graph 309

17.3
CF t = FI − CAPEX, where:
• FI - Finance income (income from sales). Income includes income from the sale
of both domestic and foreign markets (tab Oil and Gas prices – figure 185). FI is
considered as the difference between profit before tax and profit tax.
Oil and Gas prices can increase by a given percentage each time step automatically.
Specify the percent and press Apply – figure 185. To decrease price by a given percent
you need to specify negative percentage value.
• CAPEX – capital expenditures. Includes the cost of drilling new wells, sidetracks.
Specify cost of new well, cost of vertical, horizontal, deviated parts of the wellbore per
meter – tab Wells, figure 186.
PBT – profit before tax: PBT = GP - TAX - OPEX, where:
• GP – gross profit (sales profit).
• TAX – VAT (value-added tax), export duty, transport cost for export – figure 187
(tab Taxes).
OPEX – operating expenditures.

OPEX = Current expenditures + Taxes and Charges.
Current expenditures include:
• Maintenance of producers (tab Wells, figure 186);
• Maintenance of injectors (tab Wells, figure 186);
• Cost of oil, gas production, water injection (tab Prod. expenses, figure 188).
Taxes and Charges (tab Taxes, figure 187):
• Salary, Insure;
• MET (the tax on mining);
• Payments for land.

17.3
Figure 185. Oil and gas prices.
Figure 186. Economics parameters. Wells.

17.3
Figure 187. Economics parameters. Taxes.
Figure 188. Economics parameters. Production expenses.

17.3
14. User Arithmetic

User arithmetic is used for making User Cuts, User Maps, User Graphs and for editing model
data files (MODEL_NAME.data).
Arithmetic is used differently in different sections of data file and in graphical interface.
Two options are possible:
1. GRID arithmetic is used for:
• ARITHMETIC (see 12.3.2) keyword before SCHEDULE section.
2. MESH arithmetic is used for:
• ARITHMETIC (see 12.3.2) keyword in SCHEDULE section;

• graphic user interface.
See also the description of the following keywords in the tNavUserManual:
• ARITHMETIC (see 12.3.2) – facilitating work with large data arrays and their modifi-
cation;
• IF (see 12.3.7), IF-THEN-ELSE-ENDIF (see 12.3.8) – expressions and conditions;
• ARR (see 12.3.5) – user arrays;
• INTERPOLATE (see 12.3.13) – interpolation;
• BLOCK (see 12.3.9) – can be used to prepare source data for interpolation;
• STORE (see 12.3.11) – saving of array into specified file during model reading;
• SYSTEM (see 12.3.12) – allows to run external script (for example, python’s, perl’s,
bash’s or C++’s one) during model reading.
14. User Arithmetic 313

17.3
14.1. Available User Maps and Operations

Note 1. Property values can’t be used earlier than in sections, in which the property is de-
fined. If the property is not specified explicitly in the form of a keyword, but it is calculated
by tNavigator, then it can only be used only after the section where it is calculated (for
example, depth can be used after the GRID) section.
Note 2. If you need to use the data before the section where it is defined (for example in
GRID section use the properties for regions), these arrays can be included as user arrays ARR.
These arrays are temporary, they can be used before SCHEDULE section (see the keyword
ARR, see 12.3.5).
The properties that may be used in arithmetic are listed below (in both GRID and MESH-
arithmetic).
box (integer) specifies a part of map

actnum (integer) active blocks
dx sizes of model cells in X direction
dy sizes of model cells in Y direction
dz sizes of model cell in Z direction
multx transmissibility factor for faces between cells in X-axis
direction
multy transmissibility factor for faces between cells in Y-axis
direction
multz transmissibility factor for faces between cells in Z-axis
direction
multxm transmissibility factor for faces corresponds the key-
word MULTX-
multym transmissibility factor for faces corresponds the key-
word MULTY-
multzm transmissibility factor for faces corresponds the key-
word MULTZ-)
multxgrd transmissibility factor for faces between cells in X-axis
direction, specified in GRID section
multygrd transmissibility factor for faces between cells in Y-axis
multzgrd transmissibility factor for faces between cells in Z-axis
permx absolute permeability in X-axis direction
14.1. Available User Maps and Operations 314

17.3
permy absolute permeability in Y-axis direction

permz absolute permeability in Z-axis direction
tranx conductivity in Õ direction
trany conductivity in Y direction
tranz conductivity in Z direction
tops depth of occurrence of the top layer of cells
depth depth
pressure pressure
soil oil saturation
swat water saturation
sgas gas saturation
ntg net to gross
pbub bubble pressure
poro porosity
stdporv initial pore volume at reference pressure
porv effective pore volume
arr* should be entered in data files
bndnum (integer) type of boundary conditions on vertical outside surfaces
of reservoir
eqlnum (integer) equilibrium area property
satnum (integer) filtration area property
pvtnum (integer) PVT area property
fipnum and other fip* regions (inte- fluid-in-place regions and other region property
ger)
i (integer) i-coordinate: block number on the X axis
j (integer) j-coordinate: block number on the Y axis
k (integer) k-coordinate: block number on the Z axis
grid_id (integer) number of local grid if there are several local grid spec-
ified in the model. grid_id of global grid is equal to
1
x block X-coordinates (can be used only in GUI)
y block Y-coordinates (can be used only in GUI)

17.3
z block Z-coordinates (can be used only in GUI)

vol geometric volume of the block
Maps Available Only for GRID Arithmetic:
multpv pore volume multiplying factor
Maps Available Only for MESH Arithmetic:
rv oil-in-gas content
rs gas content
bw water-formation volume factor
bo oil-formation volume factor
bg gas-formation volume factor
ibw 1/bw – the reciprocal of water-formation volume factor
ibo 1/bo – the reciprocal of oil-formation volume factor
ibg 1/bg – the reciprocal of gas-formation volume factor
muw water viscosity
muo oil viscosity
mug gas viscosity
imuw 1/muo – the reciprocal of water viscosity
imuo 1/mug – the reciprocal of oil viscosity
imug 1/mug – the reciprocal of gas viscosity
flowo cumulative interblock flows of oil phase
floww cumulative interblock flows of water phase
flowg cumulative interblock flows of gas phase
flowoz cumulative interblock flows of oil phase in vertical di-
rection
flowwz cumulative interblock flows of oil phase in vertical di-
rection
flowgz cumulative interblock flows of oil phase in vertical di-
rection
oip oil in place
moip mobile oil in place

17.3
oipm oil in place (mass)

moipm mobile oil in place (mass)
gip gas in place
mgip mobile gas in place
trpormult porosity multiplier, calculated in polymer waterflood
model
trpermmult permeability multiplier, calculated in polymer water-
flood model
rocksalt mass of reservoir salt
tracer_NAME NAME - tracer name
tracer_NAME_avlt average lifetime of tracer with name NAME
alkaline alkaline concentration
alkaline_max alkaline maximal concentration
alkaline_ads alkaline adsorption
surfactant surfactant concentration
surfactant_max surfactant maximal concentration
surfactant_ads surfactant adsorption
surfactant_capn surfactant capillary number
polymer polymer concentration
polymer_max polymer maximal concentration
polymer_ads polymer adsorption
aquiferN N - analytic aquifer number
numaqu numerical aquifers
temperature temperature
aqflow water influx from aquifer
oil_den oil density
wat_den water density
gas_den gas density
boil oil molar density
bwat water molar density
bgas gas molar density

17.3
kroil oil relative permeability

krwater water relative permeability
krgas gas relative permeability
xmfN oil molar fraction for component N
ymfN gas molar fraction for component N
mlscN molar density for hydrocarbon component N
energy energy density, for thermal run
hwat water enthalpy, for thermal run
hoil oil enthalpy, for thermal run
hgas gas enthalpy, for thermal run
v vapour molar fraction
cpn number of convergence problems

17.3
14.2. Scaling User Properties

Scaling properties available for MESH arithmetic (depending on scaling settings):
swcr critical water saturation of cells used for scaling of sat-

uration end points
swu maximum water saturation of cells used for scaling of
saturation end points
sowcr critical water-relative oil saturation used for scaling of
swl minimum water saturation used for scaling of saturation
end points
pcw maximum oil-water capillary pressure used for scaling
of saturation end points
pcws è pcgs (only for MORE models) amendments of the capillary
pressure, these properties are calculated if the keyword
PCSH is specified
krw maximum water relative permeability used for scaling
of saturation end points
krwr maximum water relative permeability with critical satu-
ration of displacing phase used for scaling of saturation
end points
krorw maximum oil-relative permeability with critical satura-
tion of displacing water used for scaling of saturation
end points
sgcr critical gas saturation of cells used for scaling of satu-
ration end points
sgu maximum gas saturation of cells used for scaling of
sogcr critical gas-relative oil saturation used for scaling of
sgl minimum gas saturation used for scaling of saturation
end points
pcg maximum oil-gas capillary pressure used for scaling of
krg maximum gas relative permeability used for scaling of
14.2. Scaling User Properties 319

17.3
krgr maximum gas relative permeability with critical satura-

tion of displacing phase used for scaling of saturation
end points
krorg maximum oil-relative permeability with critical satura-
tion of displacing gas used for scaling of saturation end
points
swatinit initial water saturation of cells used for scaling of satu-
ration end points
kro maximum oil relative permeability used for scaling of
14.2. Scaling User Properties 320

17.3
14.3. Arithmetic operations

Making and editing properties may be helped by application of standard mathematical
operations:
1. +, - (operations with one property)
2. and binary operation +, -, * and / (binary means operations with two properties).
When building a final property these operations will be applied element-by-element
(i.e. specified arithmetic expression from properties and constants will be calculated
for each block of the grid).
Logical operations:
1. unary operations: ! (negation);
2. binary operations: (with two properties):
< less than

> more than
<= less or equal
>= more of equal
== equal, as comparison of value of expression to the left and value of ex-
pression to the right from this sign
!= non equal
| logical operator OR. Is an operator used for making whole properties.
Value of the logical operator equals 1 in case if it is executed (true), and
0 when it is not executed (false).
& logical operator AND. Is an operator used for making whole properties.
Value of the logical operator equals 1 in case if it is executed (true), and
0 when it is not executed (false).
% residue of division
ˆ raise to the power
Application of a scalar value.

Any scalar (constant) may be used in the expression. When the scalar is used, it is
automatically converted into a property, where a value in each cell is equal to this number.
The following nominal scalars are available and may be used in arithmetic expression:
NX number of block on X axis

NY number of block on Y axis
14.3. Arithmetic operations 321

17.3
NZ number of block on Z axis

PI pi character
E e character
14.3. Arithmetic operations 322

17.3
14.4. Difference in arithmetic usage in interface and in files

Note 1. Usage of arithmetic in model files and in the interface in User Maps Arithmetic
Command Line is different. When making User Maps and User Cuts in the graphical inter-
face (in arithmetic line for properties or in Expression box of the Property Editing) arithmetic
expression should not contain = sign, only usage of == operator is possible (equal in the
meaning of comparison between value of the expression to the left with the same to the right
from the sign).
Note 2. All arithmetic expressions in files can be used only inside the keyword ARITH-
METIC (see 12.3.2).
Example for graphical interface. In arithmetic command line the following expression
can be used:
• soil + swat
User property will be equal to the sum of water saturation and oil saturation.
• pvtnum == 2
User property equals to 1 in cells where pvt region number equals to 2, and zero in the
rest.
Example for model files. The expressions above should be used in the following form:
• sgas = soil + swat

Sgas property is assigned the sum of water saturation and oil saturation.
• satnum = (pvtnum == 2)
satnum property equals to 1 in cells, where pvt region number equals to 2, and zero in
the rest.
14.4. Difference in arithmetic usage in interface and in files 323

17.3
14.5. Examples
14.5.1. Unary and Binary operations
Example 1. For model files:
sgas = -swat (unary minus, i.e. minus in front of property)
sgas = sgas + 1 (binary plus)
Application of these two lines makes gas saturation equal to 1 – water saturation, i.e.
equivalent to sgas = -swat (binary minus, i.e. minus between two properties).
Example 2. For graphical interface. In Arithmetic Command Line the following ex-
pression can be used:
-swat
(unary minus, i.e. minus in front of property), the result will be the property of water satura-
tion with -.
sgas + 1
(binary plus), the result will be the property of the gas saturation plus 1.
14.5.2. Logical operators

Examples of application of logical operators are shown below (forms of notation when
editing model data files. In graphical interface these forms cannot be used in Arithmetic
Command Line. In User Cuts and User Maps in the graphical interface only the right part
of expressions below can be used (without =).
• PERMX = 12*EXP(5*PORO)
In this example permeability is calculated via the formula from porosity.
• PERMX = (ARRSAT==1)*(12*EXP(5*PORO))+(ARRSAT==2)*(8*EXP(10*PORO))
In this example permeability is calculated via the formula from porosity. In the blocks
where the values of ARRSAT array is 1, the first formula is used (12*EXP(5*PORO)),
in the blocks where the values of ARRSAT array is 2 the second formula is used
(8*EXP(10*PORO)).
• satnum = 1*(pvtnum!=3) + 2*(pvtnum==3)

As the result of execution of this line, number of saturation region for cells from pvt
regions not equal to 3 will be equal to 1, for cells from pvt region 3 saturation region
is assigned 2.
• satnum = 1*(pvtnum<3) + 2*(pvtnum==3) + 3*(pvtnum>3)

As the result of execution of this line, number of saturation region for cells from pvt
regions 1, 2 will be equal to 1, for cells from pvt region 3 saturation region is assigned
2, and for pvt regions higher than 3 saturation regions will be equal to 3.
14.5. Examples 324

17.3
• pvtnum = 1*((pressure<200)|(soil==0)) + 2*((pressure>200)&(soil>0))

As the result of execution of this line, number of pvt region will be equal to 1 in
blocks where pressure is not higher than 200 or where oil saturation is zero, and 2 in
the blocks where pressure is higher than 200 and oil saturation is above 0; thus, in
the first region there will be all cells without oil and all with low pressure, and in the
second – only cells with oil and high pressure at the same time.
14.5.3. Local changes in internal areas of a property

Graphical interface allows editing properties in whole for making user cuts or in part by
means of Arithmetics, Block, Cylinder, Well, Flow line, Profile of a property editing. The
detailed description of this functionality is in the tNavUserGuide section Property Editing.
Smoothing. Interpolation.
Similar arithmetic expressions were used for setting and editing properties in the model
data file. Editing for local changes in internal area of properties is done by means of the
following expressions:
map(x1:x2, y1:y2, z1:z2) = expression
(where map is the edited property, expression is the acceptable arithmetic expression from
constants and properties, x1:x2, y1:y2, z1:z2 is the range, x1 is the minimum value of X,
x2 is the maximum value of X, between which the property should be changed, y1:y2, z1:z2
are ranges for Y and Z axes, respectively.
If posting misses a certain interval, then the missed variable is assigned complete interval
set for the model. For example, in case:
map(x1:x2, , z1:z2) = expression
Y direction will be taken completely.
Examples (forms of notation when editing model data files):
• sgas(1:10, 2:5, 3:4) = 0

Gas saturation with X from 1 to 10, with Y from 2 to 5 which lie in 3rd and 4th layers
of the model will be assigned 0.
• pressure(, , 4:5) = 120

Pressure in layers 4 and 5 will be assigned 120.
• multx(1:20,3,4:7) = 0
Permeability factor in the cells of the specified range will be assumed as zero (vertical
fault 20 cells long on X, along Y = 3, and deep from 4th to 7th layers.
14.5.3. Local changes in internal areas of a property 325

17.3
14.5.4. Examples for user properties (maps)

• soil + swat
Visualizes a property of summation of water saturation and oil saturation.
• dx * dy * dz * poro
Visualizes a property of product of sizes of each cell and its porosity.
• porv * (soil / boil + sgas / bgas * rv)

Visualizes a property of oil reserves modified to surface conditions.
• porv * soil / boil

Visualizes the same property but with no account for oil in gas form.
14.5.5. Examples for user cuts

• pressure > 300
Visualizes cells where pressure is above 300.
• (pvtnum == 1) & (satnum < 3)

Visualizes cells from first PVT for which filtration area number is less than 3.
14.5.4. Examples for user properties (maps) 326

17.3
14.6. Functions for User Maps

Functions without arguments (may be used without brackets):
rand produces scalar from 0 to 1 (this value will be assigned to all blocks)
arand produces random values from 0 to 1 for each block
Functions of one argument:
abs module
exp exponent
log natural logarithm
log10 logarithm to the base 10
sqrt square root
sin sine
cos cosine
tan tangent
min (at the output gives scalar) minimum
max (at the output gives scalar) maximum
sum (at the output gives scalar) sum
avg (at the output gives scalar) average
min_2d (aggregating columns operator) generates at the output cylinder property:
a value in each block of the vertical column is equal to the minimum of
this column (it can only be used in GUI)
max_2d (aggregating columns operator) generates at the output cylinder property:
a value in each block of the vertical column is equal to the maximum of
this column (it can only be used in GUI)
sum_2d (aggregating columns operator) generates at the output cylinder property:
a value in each block of the vertical column is equal to the sum of this
column (it can only be used in GUI)
avg_2d (aggregating columns operator) generates at the output cylinder property:
a value in each block of the vertical column is equal to the average of this
column (it can only be used in GUI)
rnd(n) (at the output gives a property containing not more than n 1 in random
blocks on the property, the rest assume zero) for MESH only
grow (property > displays surroundings of the set property with the radius of 1 block (for
0,n) MESH only)
14.6. Functions for User Maps 327

17.3
round rounds a property parameter value
Functions of two arguments:
min
max
grow (map > 0, n) displays surroundings of the set property with the radius
of n blocks (for MESH only)
Functions of three arguments:
if(condition, expr1, expr2) returns expr1 if condition is nonzero, expr2 if condition

=0
IF-THEN-ELSEIF-ELSE-ENDIF can be used to specify complex expression. If-then-else.
In one expression ELSEIF, THEN can be used several
times.
Function box (set the specific area of property, examples are below).
14.6.1. Examples
Using User Maps it is possible to create the property:
• map = max (soil, swat) (form of posting for editing a model data file) or max (soil,
swat) (form of posting in the Arithmetic Command Line for User Map and in
Expression field of Property Editing)
Visualizes a property in which maximum value between oil saturation and water satu-
ration will be assigned to each cell.
• round (pressure)
Visualizes a property, where the pressure value in each cell is rounded to the nearest
whole number.
• abs (soil - swat)

Visualizes a property of absolute value (module) of difference of oil saturation and
water saturation.
• sqrt (poro)
Visualizes a property of square root of porosity value.
For user cuts (form of posting for editing a data file):
14.6.1. Examples 328

17.3
• box = i < 3 & j > 5 & k == 7

Defines the following area: Cells with numbers less than 3 on X, more than 5 on Y,
and equal to 7 on Z. This posting is equivalent to the posting below i < 3 & j > 5 &
k == 7 (in arithmetic line for a User Map or User Cut Expression Field of property
editing)
• box = pressure > avg (pressure)

Defines area where pressure is above the average pressure. This posting is equivalent
to the posting below pressure > avg (pressure) (in the Arithmetic Command Line
for a User Map or in Expression field of Property editing).
14.6.1. Examples 329

17.3
14.7. Functions for Wells

Available parameters:
hwrat historical water rate

horat historical oil rate
hlrat historical liquid rate
hgrat historical gas rate
hwinj historical water injection
hoinj historical oil injection
hlinj historical liquid injection
hginj historical gas injection
hawrat historical accumulated water rate
haorat historical accumulated oil rate
halrat historical accumulated liquid rate
hagrat historical accumulated gas rate
hawinj historical accumulated water injection
haoinj historical accumulated oil injection
halinj historical accumulated liquid injection
haginj historical accumulated gas injection
hbhp historical bottom hole pressure
hthp historical tubing head pressure
hbulkp historical bulk pressure
wrat water rate
orat oil rate
lrat liquid rate
grat gas rate
winj water injection
oinj oil injection
linj liquid injection
ginj gas injection
awrat accumulated water rate
aorat accumulated oil rate
14.7. Functions for Wells 330

17.3
alrat accumulated liquid rate

agrat accumulated gas rate
awinj accumulated water injection
aoinj accumulated oil injection
alinj accumulated liquid injection
aginj accumulated gas injection
bhp bottom hole pressure
thp tubing head pressure
bulkp bulk pressure
hwcut historical water cut
wcut water cut
hgor historical gas-oil ratio
gor gas-oil ratio
wpi well production index
Below the following notations are used:

• well expression – mathematical expression where well parameters are used. For exam-
ple: orat+wrat, or avg(bhp). The list of available well parameters is in the table above
in this section;
• block expression – mathematical expression where grid parameters (property arrays)
are used. For example: permx*dz*ntg;
• condition for well – condition where well parameters are used. Condition can be true
of false. For example: orat>50, or avg(bhp)<60. The list of available well parameters
is in the table above in this section;
• condition for block – condition where grid parameters (property arrays) are used.
Condition can be true of false. For example: soil>0.7.
14.7.1. Functions for Single Wells

Allows to get the graph for one well using its calculated and historical parameters.
Syntax: w("well_name", well expression)
Examples for User Graphs:
• w("PROD1", wcut)
Builds a water cut graph for PROD1 well.
14.7.1. Functions for Single Wells 331

17.3
• w("INJ2", orat + wrat)

Builds a graph of water rate and oil rate summation for PROD2 well.
• w("216", orat)
Builds a graph of oil rate for well 216.
• w("314", bhp)
Builds a graph of bottom hole pressure for well 314.
14.7.2. Combining wells under common mask

Allows making a graph from calculated and historical parameters of wells combined by a
common mask.
Syntax: wm("well_mask", operation, well expression)
"well mask"– expression setting a certain group of wells. "well mask" may be set by a
name of one well.
Mask examples:
• * – sets all wells of the model;
• 12* – sets wells with a number starting with 12;
• BA[5-8] – sets wells BA5, BA6, BA7, BA8.
Supported operations:
• sum
• avg
• min
• max
• wm("P*", sum, orat)
Builds a graph of sum of oil rates of all the wells which names start with P.
• wm("PROD[4-7]", avg, orat)
Builds a graph of an average oil rate for wells PROD4, PROD5, PROD6, PROD7.
• wm("PROD*", max, abs(orat-horat))
Calculates module of difference of calculated and historical oil rates for each well
which name starts with PROD; then a graph of the graphs’ maximum builds, i.e. a
graph showing maximum discrepancy between calculated and historical oil rates for
these wells which names start with PROD.
14.7.2. Combining wells under common mask 332

17.3
14.7.3. Functions for wells

Syntax:
• wa("well_name", operation, block expression)
• wma("well_mask", operation, block expression)
Description:
• wa (produces scalar value)
Calculates the value of block expression for each block with well connection and
applies operation to produce scalar value.
• wma (produces scalar value)
Calculates the value of block expression for each block that has well connection for
wells selected by mask and applies operation to produce scalar value.
• wa("W1", sum, permx*dz*ntg)
Builds a graph of sum of products of permeability and net thickness for blocks through
which perforations of W1 well go.
• wa("W1", avg, swat)
Builds a graph of average water saturation for blocks through which perforations of
W1 well go.
• wma("P*", avg, pressure)
Builds a graph of average pressure for all the blocks through which perforations of
wells with names starting with P go.
14.7.4. Functions for blocks

Calculations for all wells that have perforations in blocks, that satisfies the defined
condition. Allows making a graph of sum/average/minimum/maximum of expression for
blocks through which perforations satisfying a condition go.
Syntax:
• wb(condition for block, operation, well expression)
• wba(condition for block, operation, block expression)
Description:
• wb (produces scalar value)
Gets all wells that have connections in cut condition for block, calculates well expres-
sion for each well and applies operation.
14.7.3. Functions for wells 333

17.3
• wba (produces scalar value)

Gets all wells that have connections in cut condition for block, calculates block ex-
pression for each block that has well connection of selected well set and applies
operation.
• wb(soil > 0.75, max, orat)
Builds a graph of maximum oil rate for all wells having perforations in blocks with oil
saturation above 0.75.
• wb(pressure < 50, sum, orat)
Builds a graph of sum oil rate for all wells having perforations in blocks with pressure
below 50.
• wba(soil > 0.75, min, pressure)
Builds a graph of minimum pressure for all perforation blocks of wells having perfo-
rations in blocks with oil saturation above 0.75.
14.7.5. Filters for well data

Allow to build a property that visualizes:
• Blocks that contain wells’ connections satisfying a specified condition. The property
will be equal to 1 in blocks where there are wells’ connections and to zero in other
blocks. The function wmc.
• Blocks with virtual connections that are generated during hydraulic fractures simulation.
Function wmvc.
• Blocks through which the well trajectory goes. Function wmtc.
Syntax: wmc ("well_mask", condition for well)
A block is selected, if:

1. There is a well in a group of wells (distinguished by wells masks), which has perfora-
tion in a given block.
2. Condition for well is true for this well
Property is produced at the output.
Syntax of a similar function that allows to select blocks virtual connections (that are
generated during hydraulic fractures simulation):
Syntax: wmvc ("well_mask", condition for well)
Block is selected, if:
14.7.5. Filters for well data 334

17.3
1. There is a well in a group of wells (distinguished by wells masks), which has virtual
connection in a given block.
2. Condition for well is true for this well.
Syntax of the function to select blocks with the well trajectory:

wmtc ("well_mask", condition for well)
Block is selected, if:
1. There is a well in a group of wells (distinguished by wells masks), which trajectory

goes through this block.
2. Condition for well is true for this well.
Examples for User Cuts:
• wmc ("*", 1)
Displays all blocks with well connections.
• wmvc ("*", 1)
Displays all blocks with well virtual connections.
• wmc("*",1) + 2*wmvc("*",1)
Displays all blocks with well standard connections and virtual connections with differ-
ent color.
• grow (wmc ("*", 1), 3)

Displays 3 blocks adjacent to the blocks with connections.
• wmc ("P*", abs (orat - horat) / horat > 0.25)

Displays all connections of the wells which names start with P and which oil rate and
historical oil rate are connected by abs correlation (orat - horat) / horat > 0.25.
• wmtc ("*", 1)
All blocks with well trajectories will be selected.
• wmtc ("*", 1) & (soil > 0.7)

The blocks with well trajectories will be selected if oil saturation in them is greater
than 0.7.
14.7.5. Filters for well data 335

17.3
15. Property editing. Smoothing. Interpolation

In this section there is a description of possibilities to edit properties via User Cuts and User
Maps.
The detailed description of tNavigator arithmetic functions is presented in the section

User Arithmetic.
Via user arithmetic any number of user Cuts and Maps can be created. User Map (Cut)
can be exported to the file via Export option. The description of file formats is in the section
Export of grid properties.
If Map (Cut) is created in graphical interface and we close the model and open it again
the following behavior is applied:
• if Map (Cut) was edited via arithmetic, then the Map (Cut) itself is not saved (to save
the space on the disk). Only arithmetic expression is saved. When model is reloaded
Map (Cut) is recalculated according to this formula;
• when the model is reloaded all Maps (Cuts) are loaded in the order as they are created.
For example, if in the formula for Map we use Map1 and Map2, then Map is not
recalculated and is equal to zero. However the formula is saved in arithmetic line, so
you can recalculate Map after model opening by pressing Apply to Map;
• if the last operation with Map (Cut) was not arithmetic – for example Brush, then the
Map (Cut) values are saved.
Also see the training tutorials:
• 4.1 How To Edit Rel Perm MULT;
• 4.2 How To Use Arithmetic;
• 4.3 How To Use Smoothing;
• 4.4 How To Use Interpolation;
• 4.5 User Arithmetic (How To Make Filters Via Arithmetic);
• 4.6 How To Use Voronoi Diagrams.
15. Property editing. Smoothing. Interpolation 336

17.3
15.1. Calculator for User Cuts and User Maps

A button – shows Calculator (to the left of User Maps Arithmetic Command Line).
The calculator can be used to construct User Cuts and User Maps. Click on properties,
operations, constants you want to use in your arithmetic expression. The symbol of this
property (or operation, ...) will appear in the User Maps Arithmetic Command Line.
For example: search in the list Calculated Properties. Saturation of Oil. Click on it –
SOIL will be printed in the Arithmetic Command Line – figure 189. Then press Apply
(Enter).
Figure 189. Calculator.
The detailed description of tNavigator arithmetic’s functions is presented in the section

User Arithmetic.
15.1. Calculator for User Cuts and User Maps 337

17.3
15.2. Region Brush

Create region with brush.
You can create a region of an arbitrary form in 2D using the Region Brush – figure 190:
1. Select User Cuts or User Maps.
2. 2D View. Select any Type of visualization you like (Roof in the figure).
3. Press Create region with brush.
4. Select radius (in pixels).
5. Select a value (this value will be assigned to all blocks selected with the brush).
6. Select Affected Layers:
• Affect to Current Layer (if the Layer type is selected as 2D visualization);

• Apply to All Layers;
• Apply to Layers in the Specified Interval.
Figure 190. Brush.
This property can be exported using the Export button as a region indicating the keywords
FIPNUM (see 12.4.10), SATNUM (see 12.4.3), PVTNUM (see 12.4.2), etc. Further, you can
use this region as an initial region if you include it using the keyword INCLUDE in the
section REGIONS.
15.2. Region Brush 338

17.3
15.3. User Cuts

You can use User Arithmetics to create and save any number of User Cuts. A Cut is an
expression of criteria satisfied or not in model’s blocks. Blocks, satisfied the Cut, are blocks
in which the given expression of Cut is satisfied.
Blocks, satisfied the cut, are shown in red and each blocks are assigned with the value 1.
Blocks, not satisfied the cut are shown in blue and the Blocks’ value is 0.
User maps and cuts enable a more thorough analysis of a field, displaying reservoir
portions that are particularly relevant to the current analysis. The detailed description of
tNavigator arithmetic functions is presented in the section User Arithmetic.
For example, figure 191 shows a cut selects blocks where X value is larger than 1000.
In the figure 192 Use Cut checked, so the figure only shows the blocks selected by the Cut.
The detailed instruction of cut creation is described below.
Figure 191. User cut.
15.3. User Cuts 339

17.3
Figure 192. Use cut.
Another example: the expression ”pressure > avg(pressure)” is true for blocks with
pressure higher than the average pressure of all the blocks – see figure 193.
Figure 193. Cut: pressure > avg(pressure).
15.3. User Cuts 340

17.3
How to Create a New Cut. Arithmetics Command Line for Cuts.
1. Select the option Cuts. (The viewing options for 2D, 3D visualizations and histograms
are similar to those for properties).
2. In the Arithmetics command line for cuts, enter the new cut expression for plotting a
property in terms of User Arithmetics. Example: X>1000 (see figure 191). Calculator
button (near Map Arithmetic Command Line) helps you to create arithmetic
expressions using available properties, operations, etc.
3. You can edit the cut in the Arithmetics command line or in the Property Editing dialog.
Right-click on the Cut’s name and select Edit.
4. Click Apply in the right of the Arithmetics command line. Blocks, satisfied by the cut,
are highlighted in red, those rejected by the cut will be highlighted in blue.
5. The cut will be saved in the Cuts tabs for re-use in the current model (if you close
and re-open the model, the cut will still be there).
6. To rename a cut, right-click the cut and select Rename.
7. To create a new cut, right-click on a cut and in the pop-down menu select Duplicate
or Create.
8. If you want to have a property without changes, enter 0 in the Arithmetics command
line for Cuts and press Apply.
9. To modify an existing cut, click on its name in the tab, enter a new expression in the
Arithmetics command line, then click Apply.
10. Use Export button to save the created cut to a file for later use. For example: file
SPE9-2-1_E100_Cut.map will be created.
Activating a User Cut.
1. To activate a Cut in 2D, 3D or histogram, check Use Cut.
2. Select user cut (Cut, Cut1, etc.) or built-in cuts (pvtnum, rocknum, etc.) In the fig-
ure 192 only the blocks accepted by the Cut are shown.
3. To change the Cut defining the visualization of blocks, right-click on the required Cut
(for example, Cut1) and select Use for Displaying as shown in the figure 194.
15.3. User Cuts 341

17.3
Figure 194. Use the Cut for Displaying.
4. It is available to use equality and inequality signs and filter value box for more ad-
vanced settings of block visualization by filter. In the figure 195 blocks that don’t
belong to the 2nd FIPNUM region are visualized: Cut which select blocks of the 2nd
FIPNUM region (”FIPNUM == 2”) is equal to 1.
Figure 195. Advanced settings of block’s visualization.
15.3. User Cuts 342

17.3
User Cuts Pop-Down Menu by Right-Clicking.
If you right-click any of the Cuts created, a menu will pop down, with the following
features (see the menu on figure 194):
• Use for Displaying (if a cut has been selected, only the blocks satisfied by the Cut
will be shown);
• Rename;
• Edit (this will open Property Editing);
• Load (load a saved cut);
• Load FIP Boundaries (load from file FIP boundaries in meters);
• Export (is an analogy to Export button, saves the cut to a file);

• Create (create a new cut; the value in every block is 1);
• Duplicate (duplicate an existing cut);
• Remove;
• Update (update the User Cut (or User Maps) at this moment);
• Autoupdate (if you check Autoupdate, the property will be auto updated in every
time step);
• Update All (update all User Cuts (or User Maps) at this moment);
• Save Side Track Well Report.
Drill a Well using Cut.
You can use User Cuts to add wells with connections only in the blocks selected by the
cut. For example, only those with oil saturation exceeding 0.5 (the Arithmetics command
line entry: Soil>0.5) or those in layers numbered 8 or higher along the Z-axis (write k>7
in the Arithmetics command line).
Examples of Cuts.
• Pressure < 200
Only low-pressure blocks (below 200) will be shown.
• (Soil > 0.5) & (pressure > 200)
Only high oil saturation (>0.5) and high-pressure (>200) blocks will be shown.
Examples of using wells data to create cuts are represented in a training course 4.5 User
Arithmetic (How To Make Filters Via Arithmetic).
15.3. User Cuts 343

17.3
15.3.1. Load FIP Boundaries to User Cuts or to User Maps

You can use User Maps to load FIP boundaries assigned in the file.
1. Go to the option Maps or Cuts.
2. Right-click Map (or Cut).
3. Select Load FIP Boundaries – figure 196.
4. Select the text file with the FIP boundaries.
Figure 196. Loading FIP regions’ boundaries to a User Map.
In a text file a FIP region’s boundaries are assigned as follows:
• the region’s number;
• the region’s name;
• X1, Y1 (the boundary point’s X and Y coordinates in meters) X2 Y2 are the same.
The text file is shown below:
15.3.1. Load FIP Boundaries to User Cuts or to User Maps 344

17.3
Figure 197. FIP regions’ boundaries text file.
The boundaries of three FIP regions (in meters) are defined in the file.
Figure 198. FIP regions’ boundaries.
The boundaries of the regions specified in the file are loaded in the model’s User Map –
see figure 196.
• You can save the created User Map as a FIP Regions, defined by the keyword FIPNUM
(see 12.4.10). Save the map by clicking Export button and using the keyword
FIPNUM (see 12.4.10). Further, you can load it to the model.
• You can use the User Maps (and the Cuts) to split the model into FIP regions.
15.3.1. Load FIP Boundaries to User Cuts or to User Maps 345

17.3
15.3.2. Save a Report for the Well Side Tracks

Summation of User Maps over grid’s blocks around well bores.
1. In the box Radius, enter the number of the well’s neighbouring blocks (those blocks’
parameters will be summed up).
2. If you use a well filter, check Use Well Filter (only the parameters of the wells
selected by the filter will be included).
3. Enter the path for saving the report file.
Figure 199. Saving a side-track report for wells.
A text report file (.rep) is created for the current User Map with the data shown below:
———————————
well name | function
’102’ | 45
’213’ | 52
’104’ | 56
’103’ | 65
’214’ | 75
’106’ | 82
’109’ | 86
’105’ | 98
’111’ | 105
’216’ | 110
’126’ | 117
’112’ | 150
’119’ | 165
’117’ | 204
———————————
Well name: the column lists well names.
15.3.2. Save a Report for the Well Side Tracks 346

17.3
Function: the column contains the sum of a parameter of all the blocks around the well
defined in item 1. The parameter is the current user property. This column is sorted down.
This report is useful to estimate oil resources in wells’ areas (e.g., oip, moip, oipm – oil
in place, recoverable oil, mass oil in place).
15.3.2. Save a Report for the Well Side Tracks 347

17.3
15.3.3. How to Use a User Cut to Add an Aquifer

See the training tutorial 2.4 How To Add Aquifer for the detailed information.
15.3.3. How to Use a User Cut to Add an Aquifer 348

17.3
15.4. User Maps

You can use User Arithmetic to create an arbitrary number of User Maps. User Maps and
Cuts allow to perform a thorough analysis of a field, to display only the required regions of
reservoir and to visualize arithmetic expressions defined by user.
The detailed description of tNavigator arithmetic functions is presented in the section

User Arithmetic.
How to Create a New User Map. Map Arithmetic Command Line. How to Save a
User Map.
1. Select the tab User Maps (the viewing options for 2D, 3D User Maps, and histograms
are the same as for regular properties).
2. In the Map Arithmetic command line, enter the expression for creating a new User Map
in terms of User Arithmetics. Example: multx (X transmissibility multiplier). Use
Calculator button (near Arithmetic Command Line) helps with creating arithmetic
expressions, selecting available parameters and operations.
3. Click Apply in the right of the Arithmetics command line. A multx property will be
created.
4. You can edit the property using the Arithmetic Command Line or the Property Editing
feature. Right-click the User Map’s name and select Edit (e.g., you can change the
transmissibility multiplier only in a certain region).
5. The property will be saved in a tab in the User Maps option for re-use in the current
model (if you close and re-open the model in tNavigator, the created User Map will be
in the project).
6. To rename a User Map, right-click on the Map and select Rename.
7. To create a new User Map, right-click on a Map and in the pop-up menu, select
Duplicate or Create. If necessary enter the expression for the new User Map in the
Arithmetic command line.
8. To create a ”clear” User Map (without changes), enter 0 in the Map Arithmetics
command line. Click Apply.
9. To modify an existing User Map, click on its name and enter a new expression in the
Arithmetics command line, then click Apply.
10. Use the Export button to save the created User Map into a file for later use. (e.g., the
file SPE9-2-1_E100_Map.map will be created). You can use the saved User Map in a
computation, if you load it to the model.
15.4. User Maps 349

17.3
Maps Pop-Down Menu.

If you right-click on a User Map’s name, a following menu will pop down:
• Rename;
• Edit (this will open Map Editing);
• Load (load property).

File type: Map in tNavigator format.
File format – .map.
Data description: file is loaded in the following way: blocks sequentially assigned
values from the file. The coordinates of blocks ascending by X, Y, Z.
--Map: Depth
--Time step: 0
Depth
-- Layer 1 --
+2.748260e+003 +2.742420e+003 +2.742420e+003 +2.737400e+003
+2.737400e+003 +2.733930e+003 +2.733930e+003 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
• Load FIP Boundaries (load from file FIP boundaries in meters);
• Export (is an analogy to Export button);
• Create (a new User Map will be created; the default value in every block is 0);
• Duplicate (duplicate an existing User Map);
• Remove;
• Update (update the property at this moment);
• Autoupdate (if you check Autoupdate, the User Map will be auto updated at each
time step);
• Update All (update all User Maps now);
• Save Side Track Well Report.
15.4. User Maps 350

17.3
15.4.1. How to Add the Created User Map to the Model

You have two options for adding a User Map to the model:
• Adding a User Map in the GUI (the faster option):
1. Click Export button and enter the keyword (the property’s name).
For example: PERMX – X permeability, NTG – net-to-gross, etc. The
User Map will be saved as a file MODEL_NAME_Map.map (Example:
TEST6_WATERFLOOD_Map.map).
2. Go to Grid Properties, Initial. Right-click on the properties you want to be
replaced with the saved User Map . Select Load. Select the required User Map :
MODEL_NAME_Map.map.
• Adding a User Map using the model’s data file. In order to use a User Map created
in a computation, you should save and then add it as the file with *.inc extension.
1. Click on Export button and enter the keyword (the User Map’s
name). For example: PERMX – X permeability, NTG – net-to-gross, etc.
The map will be saved as a file MODEL_NAME_Map.map (Example:
TEST6_WATERFLOOD_Map.map).
2. In the data file, include the file at the end of the section GRID:
INCLUDE
MODEL_NAME_Map.map
/
3. In the data file, you can edit properties using the arithmetic expressions. For ex-
ample, for consistency of distribution of permeabilities, when adding the PERMX
permeability, you can define a command to edit other permeabilities, namely:
ARITHMETIC
PERMY = PERMX
PERMZ = PERMX/10
/
4. If you reload the model the new loaded property will be added to the model.
15.4.1. How to Add the Created User Map to the Model 351
17.3
15.5. Property Editing

To open the Property Editing dialogue:
1. Go to User Maps or User Cuts.
2. Right-click Map or Cut.
3. Select Edit – see figure 200.
Figure 200. Open Property Editing.
Select one of Map Editing tabs:

• Arithmetic Expressions:
– Arithmetics;
– Block;
– Cylinder;
– Wells;
15.5. Property Editing 352

17.3
– Profile;
– Cross-Section.
• Wells Data;
• Grid Properties;
• Streamlines;
• Derivative Properties;
• Voronoi Diagrams;
• Connected Components;
• Smoothing and Interpolation:
– Smoothing;
– Interpolation;
– Permeability Multiplier.
• Region Brush;
• Faults.
Figure 201. Property editing.
15.5. Property Editing 353

17.3
15.5.1. Arithmetics
After clicking Apply 1, 0 or Expression will be assigned to blocks of the model, satisfying
the condition written in the Box.
• If the entry in Box is 1, the value in the Assign Value box (0, 1 or Expression –
depending on the selection) will be assigned to the property value in the blocks. If the
entry in Box is 0, no value will be assigned to the property value in any block.
• If the entry in Box is a condition (e.g., pressure > 200), the value will be assigned
to the property value in all blocks satisfying this condition (i.e. all the blocks with
pressures higher than 200).
• If the entry in Box is cut > 0, the expression selected will be assigned to all the blocks
accepted by the Cut.
Example is in the figure 202.

The region selected by the Cut (since the entry in Box is cut > 0) will be assigned to
the value of the expression sum(moipm*cut) – the mass oil in place in the region (moipm));
that value will be assigned to all the blocks in the region.
Figure 202. Property Editing: Arithmetics.
15.5.1. Arithmetics 354

17.3
15.5.2. Block
This tab is used to change the property with the coordinates in a specified range (specify the
block numbers: X-range, Y-range, and Z-range). The expression below (1, 0, the value in
the Expression box) will be assigned to the blocks in the selected part of the model only.
Click Apply, and, as shown in the figure 203, the value of 1 will be assigned to the
region of the blocks from 23 to 53 along the X-axis, from 24 to 55 along the Y-axis, and
from 1 to 1 along the Z-axis.
By default, the Block tab includes all blocks along all the axes (i.e., the expression is
applied to the entire property).
You can set block numbers manually by clicking on the left top block and then the right
bottom block of the 3D visualization of User Map. If Apply on mouse click on map is
checked, you can double-click on the 3D visualization to assing the specified value to the
blocks in the region defined by clicks. X, Y, Z ranges of blocks corresponding to this region
will show in the Property Editing dialogue. You can use those boxes to monitor and edit
the size of the region (e.g., Z range) and then click Apply again.
Figure 203. Property Editing – Block.
15.5.2. Block 355

17.3
15.5.3. Cylinder
This tab is used to apply the expression below (1, 0, the value in the Expression box) to any
cylinder within the model. To assign a cylinder, you specify:
• the cylinder center’s coordinates (block numbers); you can set the coordinates by
clicking on the required block in the 3D visualization of User Map. If Apply on
mouse click on map is checked, you can click on the 3D visualization of User Map
to assing the specified value to the blocks within the cylinder with the center in this
block. The cylinder’s coordinates will be displayed in the Center box.
• the direction (X, Y or Z).
• the radius (in the number of blocks or in meters).
• The height (in the number of blocks, the default height is the total number of blocks).
You can check Smoothing along Height to have the cylinder smoothed by height.
• Smoothing (slider-controlled). If no smoothing is assigned (the slider in the leftmost

position), the expression below (1, 0 or the value in the box Expression) will be
assigned to all the blocks within the cylinder without changes. If some smoothing,
other than zero, is assigned, the value of 1, 0, or Expression will be assigned to the
cylinder center block, and the values in the other blocks will be smoothed towards the
values in the cylinder’s boundary blocks (points). Figure 204 shows cylinders in the
Z direction. The red cylinder has a minor smoothing (a slider is in the left position);
cylinders with the colors changing from the center towards their edges are those with
various degrees of smoothing.
The formula for map editing (it is supposed that Z direction is selected):
mapnew = mapold · (1.0 − r_ f ading · h_ f ading) + expr · h_ f ading · r_ f ading,
where:
• expr – expression in the field Expression.
• r_ f ading = |1.0 − rq2 | p ;
• if the field Smoothing along Height is checked, then h_ f ading = |abs(1.0 −

abs(axis2 − c2 )/h2 )| p , otherwise h_ f ading = 1;
• q = (axis0 − c0 )2 + (axis1 − c1 )2 ;
• r is radius value in the field Radius;
• p = 0.002 · smoothing;
15.5.3. Cylinder 356

17.3
• smoothing is Smoothing parameter value which is set via slider. The value belongs to
interval from 1 to 1000;
• axis 0 is value of I coordinate (or X if units are meters/foots) of selected center;
• axis 1 is value of J coordinate (or Y if units are meters/foots) of selected center;
• axis 2 is value of K coordinate (or Z if units are meters/foots) of selected center;
• c0 – X-coordinate of selected center;
• c1 – Y-coordinate of selected center;
• c2 – Z-coordinate of selected center;
• h2 – half-height in blocks. Height is set in the dialog Range along Direction.
This formula is applying to blocks which satisfy the following condition:
box = (q < r2 )&(dir_range),

where:
• & – logical AND;
• dir_range = (axis2 > minb + 1)&(axis2 < maxb + 1). dir_range is also box of blocks,
which satisfy the condition at right;
• (min b , max b ) is vertical interval in blocks, which is set in the dialog Range along
Direction.
Figure 204 shows editing of 3D grid property – multx; in the wells region, multx is mul-
tiplied by 5 (Expression: multx*5), and various degrees of smoothing towards the cylinder
edges are assigned.
Figure 205 shows cylinder region when X direction is selected.

17.3
Figure 204. Property Editing – Cylinder along Z-direction.

17.3
Figure 205. Property Editing – Cylinder along X-direction.
15.5.4. Wells
This tab is used to apply the value of 1, 0, or Expression to any number of blocks neigh-
bouring with any wells (or well connections).
A Well Mask assigns well groups (categories). For example, PROD2* includes all the
wells which name starts with PROD2. The asterisk * includes all the wells in the model. You
can assign a single well, too.
You can also assign modification of properties in the region around a well by clicking on
the block with the well’s connection. If Apply on Mouse Click on Map is checked, you can
click on the well’s connection in 3D visualization of User Map to assign the value specified
to the cylindrical area with the center in the blocks containing the wells’ connections, and
the well’s name will be displayed in the box Well Mask.
The box Extend selection by shows the number of blocks adjacent to the connected well
to which the expression is to be applied. If the value in the box is 1, this refers to the well’s
block only.
In the figure 206 the blocks adjacent to all injection wells’ connections (mask – INJ*)
have the value of permx assigned to them. The resulting visualization shows in all the blocks
the value of property is 0, but in the blocks neighbouring to well connections have permx.
15.5.4. Wells 359

17.3
Figure 206. Property Editing – Wells.
15.5.5. Profile
This tab is used to apply the value of 1, 0 or Expression to any previously created profile
(Creating a Profile). An expression can be applied to the following blocks (check the boxes
required in Property Editing):
1. Apply to Profile Blocks (only to blocks reached by the profile);
2. Apply to Profile Inside (Auto Close Profile Curve) (apply to the blocks within the
profile and the straight line connecting the profile’s beginning and end);
3. Apply to Profile Outside (Auto close Profile Curve) (apply to all the blocks except the
blocks within the profile and on the profile).
Let us view Profile 1 (white line in the 3D visualization shown in the figure 207):
15.5.5. Profile 360

17.3
Figure 207. Profile 1.
Apply Expression ”2” for Case 1: Profile Blocks, by checking the relevant box in Prop-
erty Editing. The result is shown in the figure 208:
Figure 208. Case 1: profile blocks.
Apply Expression ”2” for Case 2: Profile Inside (Auto Close Profile Curve); see fig-
ure 209:
15.5.5. Profile 361

17.3
Figure 209. Case 2: Profile Inside (Auto Close Profile Curve).
Apply Expression ”2” for Case 3: Profile Outside (Auto Close Profile Curve); see fig-
ure 210.
Figure 210. Case 3: Profile Outside (Auto Close Profile Curve).
15.5.5. Profile 362

17.3
15.5.6. Cross-Section
This tab is used to apply the value of 1, 0 or Expression to any previously created cross-
section (including well cross-sections, points cross-sections, well path cross-sections, etc.) –
Creating a Cross-Section). An expression can be applied to the following blocks (check the
boxes required in Property Editing):
1. Apply to Cross-Section Blocks (only to blocks reached by the cross-section);
2. Apply to Blocks Above the Cross-Section (horizontal cross-section only);
3. Apply to Blocks Beneath the Cross-Section (horizontal cross-section only).
In the figure 211 Expression 1 is applied to blocks of this cross-section located at 2377,63
m.
Figure 212 shows a fence running through wells 5, 20 and 23 (as selected by a previously
created well filter 1. The commands checked in the Property Editing: Apply to Cross-
Section Blocks and Apply to Blocks Inside Fence (Auto Close Fence Curve). Expression
1 is applied.
15.5.6. Cross-Section 363

17.3
Figure 211. Property Editing – Cross-section 1.
15.5.6. Cross-Section 364

17.3
Figure 212. Property Editing – Cross-section 2.
15.5.7. Wells data

This tab is used to project well data (rates, totals, water-cut and other parameters) in to the
connection intervals.
A Well Mask assigns well groups (categories). For example, * includes all the wells in
the model, PROD2* includes all the wells whose name starts with PROD2. The asterisk *
includes all the wells in the model. You can assign a single well too.
You can also assign modification of properties in the region around a well by clicking on
the block with the well’s connection, and the well’s name will be displayed in the box Well
Mask.
The value of the parameter selected (Rates, Accum. Rates – Cumulative oil produc-
tion, analysis parameter) will be assigned to all the blocks that accommodate the well’s
connections.
In the box Assign Value shows the value (1, 0 or Expression) that will be assigned to
the blocks have no connections of the well selected by the Mask.
In the figure 213 mask selected is * (so it assigns all the wells in the model), the
parameter is cumulative oil, and the value of 0 will be assigned to all the blocks that have
no connections of the well.
15.5.7. Wells data 365

17.3
Figure 213. Property Editing – Wells data.
15.5.8. 3D Grid Properties Data

This tab works as follows. Select any Initial or Calculated 3D Grid property. For example,
a porosity (see figure 214).
At the bottom, the minimum and the maximum value of the selected 3D grid property
are shown.
You can use sliders to set the porosity range: From – To. Click Apply. Blocks with
porosities within that range will have 1 assigned to them. Blocks with porosities outside the
range will be designated 0. (You can use any other parameter instead of porosity).
15.5.8. 3D Grid Properties Data 366

17.3
Figure 214. Property Editing – 3D grid properties data.
15.5.9. Stream lines

This tab can used to highlight a well’s drainage area.
15.5.10. Derivative Maps

This tab is used for debugging/checkout purposes.
15.5.11. Voronoi Diagrams

Voronoi Diagrams is a method of slitting a 3D grid property into regions (as many regions
as wells) in such way that the boundary between two ”neighbouring” regions is perpendicular
to the straight line connecting the wells (region centers) and runs halfway between two wells.
An example. Voronoi diagrams are used for a rough estimation of resources in the well’s
regions (the well’s resources in its Voronoi region). Voronoi diagrams are also used for esti-
mating a well’s drainage area.
See the training tutorial 4.6 How To Use Voronoi Diagrams for more detailed descrip-
tion.
15.5.9. Stream lines 367

17.3
15.5.12. Connected components

This tab highlights the model’s connected components and sequence-numbers them.
A connected component is a portion of a model in which blocks are connected through
faces or ribs, you can reach all the blocks of a component moving from one block rib to
another. However, you cannot go from one connected component to another.
Figure 215 shows two connected components.
Figure 215. Map Editing. Connected components.
15.5.12. Connected components 368

17.3
15.5.13. Faults
This tab is used to highlight faults assigned by the keyword FAULTS (see 12.2.38). The
blocks in which a fault is assigned shall have the value of 1 (highlighted in red). There is a
pop-down menu for you to select the fault to be highlighted or you can highlight All Faults
– figure 216.
Figure 216. Map Editing. Faults.
15.5.13. Faults 369

17.3
15.6. Smoothing
Any 3D grid property can be smoothed. For a property to be smoothed, it should be
opened as a user map.
See the training tutorial 4.3 How To Use Smoothing for more detailed description.
15.6. Smoothing 370

17.3
15.7. Interpolation methods

An interpolation is a process of applying the values (e.g. porosity, permeability, uncertainty
etc.) assigned to certain points to entire domain.
In tNavigator an interpolation is used:
• in graphical interface of hydrodynamic simulator to edit properties, User Maps, User

Cuts via Property Editing.
• in modules Geology Designer and Model Designer to interpolate 2D Maps, horizons

and grid properties.
The details of interpolation usage in hydrodynamic simulator’s interface is in the section

15.8.
tNavigator supports the following interpolation methods:
• Deterministic method:
- Least Squares method;

- Trivial interpolation method;
- Multilayer IDW method.
• Geostatistical method:
- Kriging;
- Sequential Gaussian Simulation (SGS) method.
In this section a general description of methods is given.
15.7.1. Least Squares method

There are a large number of interpolation methods. The most popular of deterministic methods
is the Least-Squares method (see [3], [6]).
In tNavigator there are two possibilities of this method’s implementation:
• Multilayer Least Squares method;
• 3D Least Squares method.
In the first case, the three-dimensional interpolation problem is converted to the two-
dimensional one, i.e. an interpolation is carried out for each grid’s layer independently.
General description of the method. Let’s consider a grid, consisting of arbitrary shaped
non-crossing polyhedrons (blocks) {b} defined by 8 peaks. Some of polyhedron’s peaks may
coincide. For each block’s peak the space coordinates (cx , cy , cz ) are defined. Let’s N values
of function F defined at arbitrary points {x} are known: Fi = F(xi ), i = 1, ..., N . If a block
15.7. Interpolation methods 371

17.3
bi contains a point xi , then the value Fi = F(bi ) is defined in the block. Generally speaking
a distribution of points do not coincide with grid’s blocks. In this case the values F(xi ) are
interpolated to grid’s blocks. Further, for the sake of simplicity, let’s suppose that values
of function F are defined in grid’s blocks, i.e. Fi = F(bi ). In addition to a set of blocks
{b}, a grid contains a set of links between blocks links. linked(bk ) denotes a set of blocks
connected with a block bk , li j denotes a link between bi and b j blocks. A non oriented
direction of link between blocks Axis(li j ) = (x(li j ), y(li j ), z(li j )) is defined by faces, which
are mutal for the blocks. An orientation of the link between blocks is defined by the function
Dir(li j ) (i.e. x+ , x− , y+ , y− , z+ , z− ). hx (bi ), hy (bi ) and hz (bi ) are the distance between mass
centers of bi block’s faces along Ox , Oy and Oz, respectively.
Based on the limited set of function values the function f ∗ , minimizing a least mean
square error of approximation calculated at the points {x}, can be defined as:
N
f ∗ = ∑ (Fi − f (xi ))2 + αR1 ( f ) + β R2 ( f ),
i=1
where R1 ( f ) and R2 ( f ) are correction functions, α and β are coefficients, which defines an
impact level of correction functions and varies in the range [0.01, 100]. Correction functions
limit a variability of approximation values and allow to obtain smoother solutions. First and
second derivatives of function f can be chosen as correction functions. R1 ( f ) and R2 ( f )
are computed by summation over neighboring blocks (i, j):
R1 ( f ) = ∑ w2i j ( f (bi ) − f (b j ))2 ,

l(bi ,b j )∈links
N 2

2
R2 ( f ) = ∑ ∑ wik f (bk ) − f (bi ) − wk j f (b j ) − f (bk ) / hAxis(lik ) (bk )
k=1 bi ,b j ∈linked(xk )
Dir(lik )=Dir(lki )
where wi j is the weight coefficient, which can be defined differently, li j = l(bi , b j ) is a link
between bi and b j blocks, linked(bk ) are set of blocks linked with a block bk , hAxis (bi )
is the distance between mass centers of bi block’s faces, quasi-orthogonal to directions
Axis = (x, y, z).
Depends on the chosen grid’s geometry coefficients wi j can be defined as:
• If wi j = 1/hi j (where hi j is the distance between mass centers of adjoining blocks),
then R1 is a sum of square of finite-difference approximations of f derivatives along
directions Axis = (x, y, z). R2 is a sum of square of approximations of second deriva-
tives .
• If wi j = 1 the grid’s geometry does not take into account.
• If wi j = Ti j , where Ti j is transmissibility of link li j , then R1 is computed by integration
of (∇ f ,~n) over adjoining face of bi and b j blocks, where ~n is the unit vector normal
to the face directed to bi block. In case of rectangular grid Ti j is the ratio of square of
adjoining face of bi and b j blocks to the distance between their mass centers.
15.7.1. Least Squares method 372

17.3
15.7.2. Trivial interpolation method

In the trivial interpolation method to each grid’s block bi , i = 1, ..., M , in which a function
f value is not defined, a constant value C is assigned: f (bi ) = C . By default C = 0. The
assignment is carried out by layers independently.
With this method, only the cells situated along the wells will be affected by a value
different from 0. If the input data are logs, an arithmetical mean (in the case of continuous
property) or the most frequent value (in the case of discrete property) will be affected to the
cells with several data points.
15.7.2. Trivial interpolation method 373

17.3
15.7.3. Multilayer IDW method

Method of Inverse Distance Weighting (IDW) is a deterministic interpolation method. IDW
method is based on the idea that objects placed in the vicinity are more similar to each
other then objects placed far from each other. To interpolate a value in arbitrary space point
IDW method uses known values defined in the points neighbouring to this point. At the
same time, the values in the points placed closer to the interpolated point have a stronger
impact on the forecast value, then values in the remoted points. Thus, each point affects the
forecast value only locally, and the impact decreases with increase of distance. This means
that points placed close to the interpolated point have larger weights. Point’s weight decreases
as a function of distance. Therefore, method is called as inverse Distance Weighting method.
In case of three–dimensional interpolation is carried out a dimension can be decreased to
two–dimension by implementing the IDW interpolation to each two–dimensional layer of
three–dimensional grid.
Let’s N values of arbitrary function f are known and defined at grid’s points xi : fi =
f (xi ). The interpolated value of the function f at a space point x∗ is calculated by using the
function’s values fi at the points xi (interpolation nodes), i = 1, ..., N :
N
 ∑ ωi (x∗ ) fi
, if d(x∗ , xi ) > 0 for each i;
 i=1

 N
∗ ∗
f (x ) = ∑ ωi (x )
 i=1


fi , if d(x, xi ) = 0 for an arbitrary i;

where ωi = d(x∗1,xi ) p are weights corresponding to data points, d(x∗ , xi ) is the distance between
x∗ and xi , p is a power parameter.
15.7.3. Multilayer IDW method 374

17.3
15.7.4. Kriging
Kriging is a general linear regression method using statistical parameters to find optimal es-
timations in terms of minimum mean square deviation when constructing surfaces, properties
and User Maps ([5, 4, 7]). The method is based on the principle of undisturb average value.
This means that all values taken together should have a correct average value. A global
undisturbness is formally provided by increase of low values and decrease of high values. To
calculate unknown value of variable at a space point the Kriging method uses a variogram,
a configuration of space data and values at the points in the vicinity of the selected point.
A construction of variograms allows user to match a quantitative model with an available
structure of space data.
In tNavigator there are two possibilities of Kriging’s implementation:
• Multilayer Kriging;
• 3D Kriging.
In case of Multilayer Kriging method is used, an interpolation is carried out independently

for each grid’s layer, i.e. a three–dimensional interpolation problem is converted to a two–
dimensional one.
The following Kriging’s methods are supported:
• Simple Kriging;
• Ordinary Kriging;
• Universal Kriging.
General description of the method Let’s N values of function f are known and defined
at points (blocks) xi of grid G: fi = f (xi ). A function value is assumed to be constant inside
a block. A grid is a set of arbitrary shaped non-crossing polyhedrons (blocks) defined by 8
peaks. Some of polyhedron’s peaks may coincide. For each block’s peak the space coordinates
(cx , cy , cz ) are defined. The aim of interpolation is to construct an interpolation function fb,
which is a good approximation of unknown function f : fb(x) ≈ f (x) for each x ∈ G.
At a space point x∗ the Kriging interpolation is linear combination of known values of
the function defined at the points x :
N
fb(x∗ ) = ∑ wk (x∗) f (xk )
k=1
Summation is carried out for known function values defined at corresponding points with
coefficients wk . wk coefficients are calculated by solving the system of linear equations.
Notice that to calculate wk coefficients f1 , ..., fN values do not use. Instead, positions of
points x1 , ..., xN and a model of probability process (variogram) are used.
It is supposed that a function f is a random function. Hence, fi = f (xi ) are random
values. Then, their linear combination is a random value as well. wk coefficients are calcu-
lated in such way that a mathematical expectation of random variable fˆ(x∗ ) is equal to a
15.7.4. Kriging 375

17.3
mathematical expectation of value of random function f (x) at this point, and dispersion of
their difference is minimal:
M( fb(x)) = M( f (x)), D( fb(x) − f (x)) → min.
Construction of variogram.
Variogram is a key tool in a classical geostatistic, which is applied for analysis and mod-
elling a space correlation [7]. Further the approach to construction of variogram is briefly
outlined. Physical intuition suggests that values at two points, placed close to each other, are
close because these values are generated under similar physical conditions (have the same
”geological environment”). On the contrary, at long distance the conditions are different and
greater variations are to be expected. The value variability with distance can be quantified
with variogram cloud.
Let’s consider known values of f at N sample points {x} , i = 1, ..., N , for which a
variogram will be constructed. All possible pairs of available points xi , x j , where 1 ≤ i <
j ≤ N , are considered. For each pair the distance ρ = |xi − x j | and square of difference
between values at these points v = ( fi − f j )2 are computed. The obtained set of points on
a plane (ρ, v) is called a variogram cloud. A variogram cloud can display anisotropy (i.e.
shows different behaviours along the different directions). This is frequent in 3D cases, where
vertical veriability is rarely of the same nature as horizontal variability (layer media). The
main anisotropy directions are often suspected from geological knowledge, and a varigogram
cloud is calculated along these directions.
Depends on function v(ρ), using to construct a curve, the following variogram models
are implemented:
v(ρ) = c 1 − e− ρa

Exponential
Spherical 
c 3ρ − ρ 3 , if ρ < a;

2a 2a3
v(ρ) =

c, if > a;
ρ2

Gauss −
v(ρ) = c 1 − e a2
3 7ρ 5 3ρ 7

Cubic v(ρ) = c 7 ρa − 35ρ
4a3
+ 2a5
− 4a7
Nugget-effect v(ρ) = c(1 − ρa sin ρa )

Power v(ρ) = cρ a
Cauchy v(ρ) = c log ρ
2
De-Vijs v(ρ) = c ρ 2ρ+a2
15.7.4. Kriging 376

17.3
15.7.5. Sequential Gaussian Simulation (SGS) method

Sequential Gaussian Simulation method is similar to the Kriging. To get more details see
[4, 7].
In tNavigator there are two possibilities of implementation of this method:
• Multilayer SGS;
• 3D SGS.
Multilayer SGS method is carried out independently for each grid’s layer, i.e. a three–
dimensional interpolation problem is converted to a two–dimensional one.
General description of the method. Let’s define a grid G composed of arbitrary shaped
non-crossing polyhedrons (blocks) {b} defined by 8 peaks. Some of polyhedron’s peaks may
coincide. For each block’s peak the space coordinates (cx , cy , cz ) are defined.
Let’s consider known values of function f at N sample points xi of grid G: fi = f (xi ),
i = 1, ..., N . A function value fi is assumed to be constant inside a block.
A process of variogram construction for this method coincide with construction in method
Kriging.
In contrast to Kriging method, for the SGS method the result of interpolation at point x∗
is a linear combination of defined number of points Nk (where Nk is the number of kriging
points) selected in the region limited by Kriging Radius.
A summation is carried using known values of function f defined at points xi :
Nk
fb(x∗ ) = ∑ wi (x∗ ) f (xi )
i=1
wi coefficients are calculated by solving a system of linear equations.
15.7.5. Sequential Gaussian Simulation (SGS) method 377

17.3
15.8. Interpolation
Interpolation is a process of applying the values assigned in certain points (or certain blocks
of the model) to the entire grid (to all blocks of the model).
tNavigator supports the following interpolation methods, which can be selected from a
pop-down menu – see figure 217:
• Multilayer Least Squares;
• 3D Least Squares;
• Multilayer Kriging;
• 3D Kriging;
• Multilayer SGS;
• 3D SGS;
• Trivial;
• Multilayer IDW.
Figure 217. Property Editing. Interpolation.
15.8. Interpolation 378

17.3
You can set interpolation preferences via GUI and model data files using the keyword
INTERPOLATE (see 12.3.13).
Examples of implementation of interpolations are given in training courses 4.2 How To
Use Arithmetic (via keyword) and 4.4 How To Use Interpolation (via GUI).
Available Interpolation options are the following: Use Grid Data or Use Well Data
(check an option you need).
Use Grid Data.
• Blocks containing wells (interpolation nodes are blocks that contain well connections
(perforation intervals) with a property Map value in the block).
• Blocks containing wells’ trajectories (interpolation nodes are blocks that contain wells’
trajectories with a Map value in the block).
Use Well Data.

The values of the selected parameter for each well connection (perforation interval) are
projected to the block with the well connection (perforation interval). Then the values in the
blocks with connections (perforation intervals) are interpolated to the whole Map.
For example, if you select Mismatches, Oil Total (Mismatch): the historical computed
value of cumulative oil for each well connection (perforation interval) is projected to the
block with the connection (the perforation interval). Then the values of the blocks with
connections (perforated intervals) are interpolated to the whole Map.
The following parameters are available to be selected:
• Well logs;
• Rates;
• Cumulative production (Totals);
• User Maps;
• Initial;
• Calculated;
• Analysis;
• Pressure;
• Connections;
• Mismatches.
You can select a default value – the value assigned to the layer, if the layer contains no
interpolation nodes. The initial default value is 0.
15.8. Interpolation 379

17.3
15.8.1. Interpolation by Multilayer Least Squares method

In this section a specification on implementation of the interpolation method to edit a property
Map is given. A general description of the method, formulas and details of the use of
multipliers and coefficients, mentioned in this section, are given in the section Least Squares
method. Interpolation is carried out for each layer independently from other layers.
Figure 218 shows an example of interpolation parameters selected.
1. Interpolation tab in Property Editing.
2. Select interpolation parameters (see the formula below).
3. Check Use Well Data.
4. Select Mismatches, Oil total (Mismatch).
5. Apply.
6. The User Map is created as follows: the historical computed cumulative oil value
for each well connection (perforation interval) is projected to the block that contains
the connection (perforation interval). Then the values of blocks with well connections
(perforation intervals) are projected to the entire Map.
Figure 218. Multilayer Least Squares method.
A smoothness of interpolation is defined by α and β coefficients:
• α is the coefficient, which is defined an impact level of the first-order derivative and
varies in the range [0.01, 100]; it is set by a slider (see figure 218);
15.8.1. Interpolation by Multilayer Least Squares method 380

17.3
• β is the coefficient, which is defined an impact level of the second-order derivate and
varies in the range [0.01, 100]; it is set by a slider (see figure 218).
Generally, the radius and the smoothing extent are equal to 0. If the radius is equal to r
and the smoothing extent is t , the following applies:
1. For this User Map, a multilayer Voronoi diagram is created – Show distances instead
of an integer mask (near the wells, the property’s value is close to zero, in regions
remote from the wells, the values are higher).
2. For this User Map: if the distance for a block is larger than the radius r, the weight
coefficients wi j for computation of interpolated function are assumed to be equal to 1.
3. For this User Map: if the distance between blocks is smaller than the radius r , then
mindist
wi j = 1 + t · 1 − r , where t is the smoothing extent, mindist is the minimum
distance between blocks Bi and B j . Thus, if the distance decreases the smoothing
effect increases.
Interpolation Mesh Step.

In case of large model to speed up an interpolation process, you can define an interpolation
mesh step: blocks will be selected in accordance with defined steps in terms of indices.
15.8.1. Interpolation by Multilayer Least Squares method 381

17.3
15.8.2. Interpolation by 3D Least Squares method

multipliers and coefficients, mentioned in this section, are given in the section Least Squares
method.
Figure 219. 3D Least-Squares Method.
A smoothness of interpolation is defined by coefficients α and β :
• α is the coefficient, which is defined the impact level of the first-order derivative and
varies in the range [0.01, 100]; it is set by slider (see figure 218);
• β is the coefficient, which is defined the impact level of the second-order derivate and
varies in the range [0.01, 100]; it is set by slider (see figure 218).
Geometry.
• Do not take into account grid’s geometry (all weights wi j are assumed to be equal to
1).
• Use the distance between blocks (all weights wi j are equal to 1/d , where d is the
distance between block centers).
• Use transmissibilities (all weights wi j are assumed to be equal to the transmissibilities).
Threshold value. If a threshold value is defined, values of transmissibilities below its

value are assumed to be zero.
15.8.2. Interpolation by 3D Least Squares method 382

17.3
15.8.3. Interpolation by Multilayer Kriging

multipliers and coefficients, mentioned in this section, are given in the section Kriging. An
interpolation is carried out in each layer independently from other layers.
Implementation of Kriging:
1. The interpolation method: Multilayer Kriging;
2. First, compute a Variogram (Assign non-interactive parameters and click Re-compute

variogram) – see figure 220.
A variogram is created as follows. The X-axis shows the distances between wells split
into the number of intervals assigned by the user. All well pairs are considered and
distances between them (i.e. the distances between connections of wells (perforation
intervals) in the same layer) are computed. For each pair of wells the difference between
corresponding values of the selected property is computed. The Y-axis displays the
squared difference of the selected property values (e.g. the squared difference between
the value of porosity at the perforation block of well 1 and the value of porosity at the
perforation block of well 2).
In case of the large number of wells, the point of variogram’s cloud (shown by a cross)
represents a group of pairs of well, not a single pair. The wells are grouped by distance
between the wells and the variogram’s point displays the average X-axis and Y-axis
values. The red curve is created depending on the selected model type of variogram.
If the check-box Synchronize Variogram with Multilayer SGS Variogram is
checked a created variogram can be used for both methods (Multilayer Kriging and
Multilayer SGS method).
If you select the Multilayer SGS method, the computed variogram is preserved.
15.8.3. Interpolation by Multilayer Kriging 383

17.3
Figure 220. Multilayer Kriging.
3. Select non-interactive variogram parameters (the variogram will need to be recom-

puted if the parameters are changed):
• Layer Number – the number of the layer for which the variogram is created;
• Correlation Radius – the distance between the wells; Wells separated by dis-
tances exceeding the assigned radius are excluded from the variogram construc-
tion. If the distance between wells is within the radius wells are included in the
variogram construction;
• Number of Intervals – the number of X-axis intervals.
• Variogram Model Type (the red-line function):
- Exponential;
- Spherical;
- Gauss;
- Cubic;
- Nugget-effect;
- Power;
- Cauchy;
- De-Vijs.
4. Click Re-Compute Variogram, if you input new values of non-interactive parameters.

17.3
5. Interactive Parameters. When you change interactive parameters (by moving the
slider), the red-line curve will be re-plotted automatically. These parameters can be
changed manually, if you see that the red-line curve plotted automatically does not
sufficiently correspond to the distribution of the variogram’s points (blue crosses). You
can adjust the curve by setting these parameters.
• Effective Correlation Radius (Range) – the starting point of the near-straight-

line section of the curve.
• Plateau (Sill) – the height of the near-straight-line section of the curve.
• Nugget Effect (the curve moving up or down).
6. After then, apply Kriging. Kriging’s types (select from the pop-down menu):
• Simple;
• Ordinary;
• Universal.
Figure 221 shows the result of Simple Kriging interpolation for a porosity property (Map,
Arithmetics value: poro). The report box below displays the absolute and relative residuals
and the message that interpolation has been completed successfully.
Figure 221. Interpolation of porosity using the multilayer Kriging.

17.3
15.8.4. Interpolation by 3D Kriging

multipliers and coefficients, mentioned in this section, are given in the section Kriging. An
interpolation is carried out in each layer independently from other layers.
All pairs of connections (perforation intervals) are considered, and the distances between
them are computed. A distance between perforation intervals of two wells in the 3D space is
calculated as d 2 = dx2 + dy2 + (A · dz)2 . For each pair of connections (perforation intervals)
the difference between corresponding values of the selected property is computed. Here
coefficient A – Horizontal/vertical scaling is a non-interactive parameter, it can be set by a
slider (figure 222).
If check-box Synchronize Variogram with 3D SGS Variogram is checked a created
variogram can be used for both methods (3D Kriging and 3D SGS methods). If you select
the method 3D SGS, the computed variogram is preserved.
Figure 222. 3D kriging.
15.8.4. Interpolation by 3D Kriging 386

17.3
15.8.5. Interpolation by Multilayer SGS method

Map is given. A general description of the method, formulas and details of the use of multi-
pliers and coefficients, mentioned in this section, are given in the section Sequential Gaussian
Simulation (SGS) method. An interpolation is carried out in each layer independently from
other layers.
The procedure for creating a multilayer SGS variogramm is exactly the same as for a
Multilayer Kriging method.
If check-box Synchronize Variogram with Multilayer Kriging Variogram is checked
a created variogram can be used for both methods (Multilayer Kriging and Multilayer SGS
methods). If you select the method Multilayer Kriging, the computed variogram is preserved.
Application of the SGS method.
Define interpolation parameters:

Kriging Radius. – radius around each block. For each block, in this radius the interpo-
lation points (the number of kriging points) are selected.
The number of kriging points – N (by default, N = 16). The number of values defined
in these points are used for interpolation. Interpolation points are selected for each layer inde-
pendently from other layers. In contrast to Multilayer Kriging method the SGS interpolation
in an arbitrary point is the linear combination of values defined in the points within Kriging
Radius, not all available data.
Random Seed. This method adds a random seed normally distributed to the value in
each block. The resulting property will vary with the random seed: 1, 2, etc. But if the same
random seed is used, the property corresponding to it is re-created (i.e., there is only one
property distribution corresponding to each random seed).
Figures 223 and 224 show interpolation results for various random seeds. The resulting
properties are different for different random seeds.
15.8.5. Interpolation by Multilayer SGS method 387

17.3
Figure 223. Interpolation result: Random Seed 1.
Figure 224. Interpolation result: Random Seed 5.
15.8.5. Interpolation by Multilayer SGS method 388

17.3
15.8.6. Interpolation by 3D SGS method

multipliers and coefficients, mentioned in this section, are given in the section Sequential
Gaussian Simulation (SGS) method.
The procedure for creating a 3D SGS variogramm is exactly the same as for a 3D Kriging
variogram, including Horizontal/Vertical Scaling.
If check-box Synchronize Variogram with 3D Kriging Variogram is checked a created
variogram can be used for both methods (3D Kriging and 3D SGS methods). If you select
the 3D Kriging method, the computed variogram is preserved.
The procedure for using the 3D SGS method is similar to using the multilayer SGS
method, the only difference is that the interpolation nodes (the number of kriging’s points)
are selected in a 3D space, not in a layer.
Figure 225. 3D SGS.
15.8.6. Interpolation by 3D SGS method 389

17.3
15.8.7. Interpolation by trivial interpolation method

In this section a specification on implementation of the interpolation method to edit a prop-
erty Map is given. A general description of the method, formulas and details of the use
of multipliers and coefficients, mentioned in this section, are given in the section trivial
interpolation method.
To all blocks, in which property value is not defined, constant value is assigned. The
constant value is 0 by default.
1. Right-click by Map of User Maps tab. Edit;
2. Smoothing and Interpolation. Interpolation;
3. Select Trivial interpolation method. Set parameters.
Figure 226. Trivial interpolation.
15.8.7. Interpolation by trivial interpolation method 390

17.3
15.8.8. Interpolation by multilayer IDW method

multipliers and coefficients, mentioned in this section, are given in the section Multilayer
IDW method.
In order to implement the Multilayer IDW method follow the steps:
1. Right-click by Map. Edit, select Interpolation;
2. Multilayer IDW. Set parameters and power parameter.
Figure 227. Multilayer IDW.
15.8.8. Interpolation by multilayer IDW method 391

17.3
15.9. Permeability Multiplier

This tab in the Property Editing can be used to convert a User Map (an interpolated property,
for instance) into a MultX property (an X transmissibility multiplier).
A new property NewMap is created as follows:
NewMap = eαMap
where α is the multiplier (to be assigned by the Degree Coefficient slider).

Bounds of Multiplier Value: the minimum and the maximum permissible value (if the
computed value exceeds the maximum, the maximum value assigned is used). In the case,
which shown on figure 228, 0 is replaced by 1, the minimum value is 0, the maximum value
is 15 (so the MULTX will be 0 to 15).
15.9. Permeability Multiplier 392

17.3
Figure 228. Property Editing: Transmissibility Multiplier.
15.9. Permeability Multiplier 393

17.3
16. Field Development Planning

In GUI you can do the following operations for Field Development Planning:
• Add a vertical well;
• Add a horizontal or deviated well;
• Add a side track;
• Edit Well Properties;
• Export well trajectories in WELLTRACK format (X, Y, Z, measured depth);
• Set tracer injection;
• Create a Forecast Model;
• Create hydraulic fracture;
• Set well bottomhole zone treatment;
• Load wells data (trajectories, groups, events, history, RFT (MDT), PLT). Data can be
loaded via the menu Document. Load Well Data. Formats are described in the section
9.
16. Field Development Planning 394

17.3
16.1. Adding a well. Forecast. Tracers

You can add wells prior to a computation or at any step during a pause in computation. Wells
are visualized as they drilled. Even if the model has not been computed yet, you can display
all the wells if you move the time slider to the last time step or checking Show All Wells.
Wells not yet in operation at the current time step will be shown in gray.
The default command for adding a well / group of wells is Alt+Click. To edit the prop-
erties of an existing well, put the cursor on the well on a 2D Map or 3D Map and press
Ctrl+Click.
Detailed description of the following features is presented in training course 1.2 How To
Do Field Development Planning:
• Add a vertical well;
• Add a horizontal or deviated well;
• Add a well trunk;
• Export well trajectories in WELLTRACK format (X, Y, Z, measured depth);
• Add a well as per a well pattern;
• Add new wells with open connections in certain layers only (with high oil saturation
or with number of Z-layer in specified range).
The detailed description of creating of forecast model in GUI is presented in the training
course 1.6 How To Use Restart.
Basic steps to create a forecast:
1. Set the time slider on the previously computed time step from which the forecast is to
start.
2. On the top panel, click Document, Create Forecast.
3. In the dialog Create Forecast Model, set the required parameters.
The detailed description of setting tracer injection and tracer graphs in GUI is presented
in the training course 2.2 How To Interactive Tracer Injection.
16.1. Adding a well. Forecast. Tracers 395

17.3
16.2. Hydraulic fracture

A frac job is described by the following parameters:
• The well’s name and the frac job’s date;
• The properties of the proppant used (penetration vs. reservoir pressure) (the number
of proppant types in the model is assigned by the keyword NPROPANTS (see 12.8.1),
the proppants’ names by the keyword PROPANTNAMES (see 12.8.2), and the table of
proppant properties vs. pressure – by the keyword PROPANTTABLE, see 12.8.3). This
is assigned in the option Properties. Proppant;
• Proppant washout is a function of the fracture penetration vs. phase flow or time (as-
signed by the keywords FLOWFUNC (see 12.8.4), FLOWFTAB (see 12.8.7), FLOWF-
NAMES, see 12.8.6). This is assigned in Fluid Properties. Flow Functions;
• induced fractures’ azimuth – ϕ ;
• induced fractures’ half-length – L ;
• fracture aperture (fracture width at the well) – w;
• height (the numbers of the first block and the last block penetrated by the well path) –
h;
• fractures’ slow angle – ψ .
Full description of the mathematical model of Frac Job is presented in the section Modi-
fied well model of tNavUserManual.
Figure 229. A scheme of Frac model.
16.2. Hydraulic fracture 396

17.3
A frac job can be assigned in an interactive procedure in the GUI, which corresponds
to the keyword WFRACP (see 12.18.129). You can also use the GUI to pre-assign proppant
properties (Properties. Proppant) and proppant washout (Properties. Flow Functions).
In tNavigator’s SCHEDULE section, a frac job can be assigned by the keywords WFRAC
(see 12.18.127), COMPFRAC (see 12.18.131), ACTIONC (see 12.18.145) (for multi-frac job,
for example, automatic fraction opening if certain event happens).
The detailed description and examples of frac job are represented in the following training
courses:
• 5.1 How To Add Fracs;
• 5.2 Add fractures via keywords (How To Add Fracs Via Kwrds).
16.2. Hydraulic fracture 397

17.3
16.3. Well bottomhole zone treatment (BHZT)

To simulate bottomhole treatment with acids, solvents and/or surfactant solutions, the follow-
ing data are used:
• The date of the job;
• The well’s name;
• The bottomhole radius (R)
• The function of the bottomhole radius vs. the phase flow (the keyword: FLOWFUNC,
see 12.8.4) and the Flow Function (in the GUI: Fluid Properties. Flow functions);
• Bottomhole permeability (K ): radial (r ) – K r and vertical (z) – K z .
Figure 230. A scheme of bottomhole zone treatment.
You can assign a bottomhole treatment job in the GUI interactively or in the model’s text
file using the keyword WBHZONE (see 12.18.135).
The formula for calculating well inflows added by a bottom-hole treatment job is provided
in the section Simulation of well bottom zone dynamics: processing acids, surfactants of
tNavUserManual.
Detailed description and examples of BHZT are presented in training course 5.3 How To
Do well bottom zone treatment.
16.3. Well bottomhole zone treatment (BHZT) 398

17.3
17. tNavigator settings

To open tNavigator’s options, go to the main menu, click Settings and select Options in the
pop-down menu.
You will see the following tabs:
• General,
• Models,
• Paths,
• Graphics (settings for graphics (artwork) and fonts),
• Properties and Graphs (settings for lists of maps and graphs displayed and maps editable
in the GUI),
• Strings (settings for property’s captions),
• Updates (settings for obtaining the latest version of tNavigator),
• Client Options,
• Advanced,
• Designer.
Model preferences are available in menu Document in model opened window.
17. tNavigator settings 399

17.3
Figure 231. tNavigator’s Options.
17.1. tNavigator’s General Settings

To open tNavigator’s basic options, go to the main menu, click Settings and select Options
in the pop-down menu. Go to the tab General.
The tab’s settings are:
1. Global Profile
• Advanced Profile (with all the existing options, all properties and graphs).
• Simple Profile (some options, properties, and graphs have been removed to sim-
plify the use of tNavigator).
2. Settings File: Apply settings file for Model Opened First Time.
3. Recent Documents (recent documents (projects) handling parameters):
• The number of recent documents available (the number of documents that can be
opened from the list in the option File, Recent Document). The default number
is 10.
• Actions for unavailable documents (the pop-down menu options: Exclude Record,
Ask for Action, Do Nothing). The default action is Ask for Action. If the latest
17.1. tNavigator’s General Settings 400

17.3
Figure 232. tNavigator’s General Settings.
recent document has been deleted or moved to a different location, you will see
window below (see figure 233) when trying to open that document from File,
Recent Documents:
Actions available: Delete record from Recent Documents list, Indicate new location
of the document, or Save the record.
4. Controls: Default, Petrel, IRAP RMS (select in the pop-down menu). This helps make
settings for scaling and movement of 2D and 3D visualizations in accordance with the
programs’ control buttons (the default controls are the tNavigator buttons).
5. Preferred Model Type: Gas and Oil Model, Oil model, Gas model (this type defines
which properties and graphs will be checked for visualization by default).
6. Differentiate Loaded Graphs: using icons, using color shift. Sets the difference in
visualization between the graphs. The detailed description how to load graphs is given
in the section Multiple Models’ Results Graphs in the Same Window
17.1. tNavigator’s General Settings 401

17.3
Figure 233. Select the action when trying to open an unavailable document.
17.2. Models
Saving/Loading Models (Load/Save parameters).
• Check and Load MORE Results Files.
If Eclipse or Tempest MORE results files have been loaded, you will have Eclipse or
Tempest MORE results graphs with the above names marked [E] for Eclipse or [M]
for Tempest MORE). For example, Oil Rate [E] means oil rate computed by Eclipse.
• Check and Load Eclipse Restart Files.
• Automatically Load User Files (auto reads user files from the USER subfolder on
Model Load).
If this option is not checked, then you will be asked while opening model to specify
which files in the USER subfolder should be loaded and which should be ignored.
See the detailed description in the section USER folder of tNavUserManual.
• Automatically Save User Files (auto saves user files to the USER subfolder). If this
option is not checked, you will be asked when closing the model whether the files with
new events and properties should be saved to the USER subfolder. User files autosave
procedure is described here.
• Automatically Run Model on Open (check this option is the model does not have to
edited or viewed prior to a computation).
• Save Intermediate Eclipse Model (non-Eclipse models only). This will save interim
model files for IMEX, STARS, and MORE models in Eclipse syntax.
• Don’t Hide Multiple Messages on Conversion.
17.2. Models 402

17.3
• Show Selective Writing of Results Wizard on First Open.

Setting for a selective recording of steps if necessary (this can be selected when opening
the model – Results Writing Wizard). Selective recording of results to the RESULTS
sub–folder. You can have all the data for all steps recorded (the default setting) or have
only some data for some time steps recorded.
Describing of Selective Writing of Results Wizard is represented in the section 1.
• Use Compressed Format for User Maps Saving on Model Close.
• Write Initial Properties.

To save and split the model it is necessary to check this setting. Recording of initial
properties is not done for default to speed-up models’ opening on slow shared disks
and to reduce the size of the folder with calculation results.
• Show limits in Historical Graphs.

If this option is activated specified limits will be visualized in graphics.
• Keep inactive wells in MORE models.

If this option is activated wells located outside a reservoir are not taken into account
when calculating parameters based on historical data and visualizing number of wells.
• Default Input Syntax for Data Files (pop-down menu options: E100, E300). By
default, all the Data-models will be opened in the format selected.
• Default Input Syntax for Dat Files (pop-down menu options: IMEX, GEM, STARS,
MORE). By default, all the Dat-models will be opened in the format selected.
17.2. Models 403

17.3
17.3. Paths
1. Editor. You can assign a text editor by entering the full path to its executable file (e.g.,
C:/WINDOWS/Program Files/Notepad++/notepad.exe). In this case files from Files
menu will be open via this editor.
Figure 234. Open model files in tNavigator.
2. Console version. Specify path to exe-file of console version.

Detailed description of console version is given in the section tNavigator Console
version of tNav User Manual.
3. PDF-viewer (select pdf-viewer to view manuals files opened using menu Manuals of
tNavigator main window or option Help of top menu of main window). Specify full
path to exe-file of non-default PDF-viewer.
17.3. Paths 404

17.3
17.4. Graphics
To open tNavigator’s graphics and fonts options, go the main menu, click Settings and select
Options in the pop-down menu. Go to the tab Graphics.
Figure 235. Graphics and Fonts dialog.
The tab’s settings:

1. Visual Themes:
• Don’t Use Windows Theme (option will be applied on next program run)
2. Fonts:
• Font, font style, size, effects, writing system;
3. OpenGL Settings:
• Use VBO;
• Use Lighting;
• Use shaders.
• Use Antialiasing;
• Automatically Upscale Large Models For Visualization;
• Minimal Number of Blocks for Upscaling;
17.4. Graphics 405

17.3
• Maximal Simultaneous Polygons Count.
4. Use Gray Color for values Out of Palette Boundaries.
17.4. Graphics 406

17.3
17.5. Maps and Graphs

To open the dialog for settings for properties and graphs to be displayed and properties
edited in the GUI, go to tNavigator’s main window, click Settings and select Options in the
pop-down menu. Go to tab Properties and Graphs.
Figure 236. Dialog for selecting properties to be displayed and edited.
In this tab, you can select properties and graphs to be displayed:
1. Base Profile:
• All Elements (all possible properties and graphs will be displayed);

• Simple (this will display only certain properties and graphs, whose list can be
viewed in the tree Properties and Graphs);
• Custom (the user creates a customized list of properties and graphs to be displayed
by checking those required). On figure 237, for instance, Initial grid properties
and Interblock Flows are unchecked. So those properties are not listed in the
Grid properties. Initial option.
2. Hide Mass Graphs.
17.5. Maps and Graphs 407

17.3
Figure 237. Initial properties and Interblock Flows are not shown.
17.6. Strings
To open the Strings dialog, go to tNavigator’s main window, click Settings, and select
Options in the pop-down menu. Go to the tab Strings.
Settings available:
• Thousands, Millions, etc. Number Format;
• Show Small Values with Actual Precision (not set by default);
• Number Precision in Tables: Format (floating-point format, for example 0,012, or

exponential format – 1,2e-2) (see figure 238), Maximum number of significant digits
(default – 6);
• Precision of Palette Labels (the number of digits after the decimal point – the default
setting is 5 digits).
Grid Block Coordinates Representation.
Place the cursor on a block to see the following information displayed below in 2D or
3D view:
• Grid Block Number,
• Block Center Coordinates (in meters),
• Internal Grid Block Number (is not shown by default);
17.6. Strings 408

17.3
Figure 238. Format number in tables.
An example is in the figure 239:

Block size along X [22, 43, 1] = [-1264, 6110, 1747] = [5121] = 122.649471 m. This
means that: for the block with the coordinates [22, 43, 1], the block center’s coordinates in
meters are: [3470, -1995, 1424], the block’s internal number is: [31058], the block size is:
122.649471 m.
Maps’ and graphs’ names (labels):
• Full;
• Short (names will be visualized in the form PRES, SOIL, SWAT, WOPT, WOPTH
etc.);
• Short in Tables and Full in Graph Labels.
Maps’ and graphs’ names are displayed full by default.
17.6. Strings 409

17.3
Figure 239. Map captions settings.
17.6. Strings 410

17.3
Figure 240. Maps’ short names.
17.6. Strings 411

17.3
17.7. Update settings

To open the Updates Settings dialog, go to tNavigator’s main window, click Settings, and
select Options in the pop-down menu. Go to the tab Updates. (You can also open this menu
by clicking Help in tNavigator’s main window and selecting Updates Settings).
In the Settings dialog, enter the source of updates, the user ID and password provided by
Rock Flow Dynamics. Set the auto update frequency. Click Apply, OK.
Figure 241. tNavigator Updates Settings.
17.7. Update settings 412

17.3
17.8. Client Options

In this dialog you can specify settings of connection to cluster and settings to operate
with it. The detailed description is given in the document Remote GUI Guide.
17.8. Client Options 413

17.3
17.9. Advanced
1. Use Fast Array Reader.
2. Don’t Correct Boundary conditions if they seem to be wrong.
3. NUMA Optimization. You can check this option for computers with more than one
processor (NehalemEX, NehalemEP) that support NUMA. If you are computing several
models simultaneously and each computation does not use all the processor cores, this
option may even reduce overall computation speed. We recommend that you check
this option when computing only one model. Other models may be viewable, but you
should not run the computation.
4. Open Models in the Same Process (Reload is needed).
5. Use Click to Open Main Window Buttons.
17.9. Advanced 414

17.3
17.10. Designer
For Designer it is possible to Use New Objects Selecting:
• Select All of New Objects. All new objects added to a tree of objects will be auto-
matically checked;
• Select First of New Objects Only. Only the first object from a group of added objects
will be checked.
17.10. Designer 415

17.3
17.11. Preferences
tNavigator allows you to assign colors of your choosing to diameters of wells and connections
(perforated intervals), fractures, background colors for 2D, 3D properties, graphs, and bubble
maps.
In the Document menu on the top panel, select Preferences (figure 242, 243). You will
see the following tabs:
• Visualization;
• Well Options;
• Contour Lines (see figure 58);
• Streamlines;
• Drainage network.
You can also access Visualization preferences by right-clicking on the map and select
Visualization Options.
This will open the Visualization Options dialog (figure 242):
1. Click the subject item whose color you wish to change:
• a producer, an injector, a stopped well, a shut well;

• connection (the perforated interval) of a producer, an injector, a stopped well, or
a shut well;
• a fracture;
• a bubble map;
• background (of a 2D map, a 3D map, a graph);
• text color on maps and graphs;
• grid lines.
2. Select Color from the palette.
3. Results Playback. Slideshow interval in milliseconds (you can play computation

results by clicking the Results Playback button). Playback of calculated results
(step changes on maps, graphs, and tables).
4. Set scaling sliders for:
• the well diameter,

• the well height,
• the connection diameter.
17.11. Preferences 416

17.3
5. Well trajectories visualization. Part of visible well trajectory can be hided. Select
Cut Trajectory by Depth, then:
• set visualized trajectory interval by Z direction manually;

• or press Set by Mesh, then visible part of trajectory will be bounded by mesh.
6. Contour Lines. Set the needed number of contour lines, inscriptions density (the
number of captions per contour line), the level of precision control (the number of
decimal digits to be displayed).
7. Click Apply, OK.
Figure 242. Preferences.
17.11.1. Well And Connection Icons

In tNavigator there is a opportunity to upload your own icons for wells and connections in
vector format. Do the following to perform it:
17.11.1. Well And Connection Icons 417

17.3
Figure 243. Preferences.
1. Go to tab Well And Connection Icons of settings window (pic. 244).
2. Click on the icon to be replaced.
3. Specify path to new icon in .svg format.

17.3
Figure 244. Preferences. Well And Connection Icons.

17.3
18. References
[1] Nelder, J.A. and Mead, R., A simplex method for function minimization, Comput. J., 7, pp.
308–313, 1965.
[2] Kathrada, Muhammad, Uncertainty evaluation of reservoir simulation models using particle
swarms and hierarchical clustering Doctoral dissertation, Heriot-Watt University, 2009.
[3] N.S. Bahvalov, N.P. Zhidkov, G.M. Kobelkov, Numerical methods, M. «Nauka», 1987 [in rus-
sian]
[4] Clayton V. Deutsch, Geostatistical Reservoir Modeling, Oxford University Press, 2002
[5] A. Bardossy Introduction to Geostatistics University of Stuttgart
[6] S. D. Conte, Carl de Boor Elementary Numerical Analysis McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1980.
[7] J-P Chiles, P. Delfinder Geostatistics Modeling Spatial Uncertainty Wiley & Sons, Canada, 1999.
18. References 420

T Nav User Guide English

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

T Nav User Guide English

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

17.

Rock Flow Dynamics

Press to open tNavigator Library

3. Open model in tNavigator 13

5. Grid Properties. Right panel buttons 65

6. Grid Properties. General principles 94

6.7.4. Correlation Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

7. Graphs. General principles 138

8. Graphs. Graphs list 168

8.13. Profile info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

9. Load Well Data 243

10. Waterflood 261

11. 2D Histogram. Crossplot 284

12. Fluid Properties 293

13. Economical parameters 308

14. User Arithmetic 313

15. Property editing. Smoothing. Interpolation 336

15.3.1. Load FIP Boundaries to User Cuts or to User Maps . . . . . . . . . . 344

16. Field Development Planning 394

17. tNavigator settings 399

18. References 420

• Geology Designer (includes PVT Designer and VFP Designer);

• Model Designer (includes PVT Designer and VFP Designer);

• Network Designer (includes PVT Designer and VFP Designer);

• Black Oil simulator;

• Assisted History Matching (AHM, optimization and uncertainty analysis);

• Graphical User Interface.

The list of tNavigator documentation is available in tNavigator Library.

• Download docs ENG – download documentation in English (including all training

• Download docs RUS – download documentation in Russian (including all training

Figure 2. Download the newest tNavigator’s documentation

3. Open model in tNavigator

3.1. tNavigator main window

Figure 3. tNavigator main window.

3.2. Menu bar

3. Open model in tNavigator 13

The list of recent projects persists even if the tNavigator executable

3.2. Menu bar 14

! Changing language requires restarting tNavigator.

• Options. See detailed description in section tNavigator settings.

3.2. Menu bar 15

• License Server Guide.

3.3. Main toolbar

3.4. Module’s Tabs

• New. New project;

• New. New project;

3.3. Main toolbar 16

• Open. Open project;

• New. Create project;

• New. Create project;

• New. Create project;

• Install. Install licenses;

3.4. Module’s Tabs 17

or to record some data for certain time steps only.

• 8.1 AHM Theoretical Course,

3.4. Module’s Tabs 18

• 8.3 How To Use RFT in History Matching,

• New. Create project;

10. Batch Jobs.

11. Remote GUI. Hot key – Ctrl+M.

• New. Create project;

3.4. Module’s Tabs 19

3.5. tNavigator window with opened model